Yamaha PM5000 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PM5000

Categorie: Aanvullende muziekapparatuur

Type: de handleiding

Owner's Manual

The above warning is located on the rear of the unit.

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude

to constitute a risk of electric shock to per-

sons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and mainte-

nance (servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install

in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as

radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appa-

ratus (including ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polar-

ized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug

has two blades with one wider than the other. A

grounding type plug has two blades and a third

grounding prong. The wide blade or the third

prong are provided for your safety. If the pro-

vided plug does not ﬁt into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete

outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on

or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from

the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by

the manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or

table speciﬁed by the manu-

facturer, or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is

used, use caution when

moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury

from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms

or when unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service person-

nel. Servicing is required when the apparatus

has been damaged in any way, such as power-

supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has

been spilled or objects have fallen into the

apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to

rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or

has been dropped.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from

electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the device. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the PW5000.

• Use only the speciﬁed power supply PW5000.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy

objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,

or roll anything over it.

• Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have

it inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill

into any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power

switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• If this device or the power supply should be dropped or damaged,

immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the

outlet, and have the device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service

personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or

damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

•Turn the unit ON or OFF using only the POWER switch on the power supply

PW5000. Turning the unit ON or OFF by plugging or unplugging the power

cord, using a switch on a power tap, a breaker switch, or similar external

means can result in damage.

• Do not turn the PW5000 POWER switch OFF and ON in rapid succession.

Doing so can result in excessive current ﬂow that can cause damage. Wait

at least 5 seconds before turning the POWER switch ON after it has been

turned OFF.

• When transporting or moving the device, always use six or more people.

• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables.

• Always remove the memory card before moving the console. Accidental

impact or shock during transport can damage the memory card and/or the

card reader unit.

•Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum.

Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause

feedback and may damage the speakers.

• Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold

or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day)

to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top/front/

rear to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high. In particular,

do not place the device on its side or upside down, or place it in any

poorly-ventilated location, such as a bookcase or closet.

• Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the device, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord Location

(5)-1 1/3

• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all

devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume

levels to minimum.

• Do not insert your ﬁngers or hand in any gaps or openings on the device

(vents, etc.).

•Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into

any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off

the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then

have the device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not use the device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.

If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and

avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord

from the AC outlet, the internal data is retained. However, if the backup

battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. When the backup battery is

running low, the display indicates “LoBT(Low Battery).” In this case,

immediately save the data to a Memory Card (CompactFlash), then have

qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery.

XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-).

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.

The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, connectors, and fans, deteriorates over time. Consult qualiﬁed Yamaha

service personnel about replacing defective components.

Connections

Handling caution

Backup battery

(5)-1 2/3

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.

Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og

type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batter-

ityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-

tillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens

instruktion.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda

paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.

Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

(lithium caution)

NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS

• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.

• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.

• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij

op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de lev-

ensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing

Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT

Tel. 030-2828425

•For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal

at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or

Yamaha Service Center as follows:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center

Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT

Tel: 030-2828425

• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small

chemical waste.

(lithium disposal)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.

Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by Yamaha may void

your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accesso-

ries and/or another product use only high quality shielded

cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used.

Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instruc-

tions could void your FCC authorization to use this product

in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance

that your use of this product in a residential environment

will not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful

to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance

with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference

will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to

be the source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to dis-

tribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appro-

priate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of

America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products dis-

tributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsid-

iaries.

(5)-1 3/3

Foreword

Thank you for choosing a Yamaha PM5000 Mixing Console. The PM5000 is the

proud successor to the highly acclaimed Yamaha PM4000, which became the

deﬁnitive sound reinforcement console of the preceding decade in terms of both

performance and features.

The PM5000 carries on the PM-series pedigree with unprecedented sound and

operability, while inheriting new digital control features from Yamaha’s top-line

PM1D digital console. In an era in which digital consoles are becoming the

mainstream, the PM5000 represents the peak of reﬁnement in analog sound

technology, with the added beneﬁts of digital control.

Please read this manual carefully before use to ensure that you beneﬁt from the

maximum performance and control capabilities that your PM5000 can deliver.

Also keep the manual safe but handy so you can refer to later.

Copying of the commercially available music data and/or digital audio ﬁles is strictly prohibited except for

your personal use.

* The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes

only, and may be different from the ones on your device.

* The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective companies.

* CompactFlash is a registered trademark of SanDisk Corporation.

About This Manual

General Approach

Most of this manual is devoted to describing the features and functions of the various PM5000 modules.

Since the operational design of the PM5000 is based on familiar analog console principles, anyone who is

familiar with the PM4000 or similar consoles should be able to begin operating the PM5000 without

hesitation. New features and multi-module control operations will be described in column form.

The names of physical controls such as buttons and knobs will be shown in square brackets.

The manual is organized as follows:

■ PM5000 Overview (page 10)

The names and functions of the various sections of the console are broadly described in the context of

the console as a whole. Please read this section before continuing on to the details. This section

explains the console’s overall internal signal ﬂow and how it relates to external equipment.

■ The Sections and Modules (page 15)

Following the signal ﬂow from input to output, the individual features and functions of each section

and module are described individually.

■ Scene Memory Functions (page 51)

Operation of the PM5000 scene memory functions, including storage of panel settings and motor fader

operations, is described here.

■ Utility Functions (page 56)

This section describes operation of the utility functions relating to overall system setup and

communication with external equipment.

■ Appendix (page 84)

Options, plugs and connectors, and other information for general operation and maintenance.

References, hints, and additional information will be provided throughout the text where appropriate.

The PM5000 Models

The PM5000 series includes three basic models, as described below:

■ PM5000-52C (52 input channels/center master)

■ PM5000-36 (36 input channels/right master)

■ PM5000-28 (28 input channels/right master)

For each model the number following “PM5000” refers to the total number of mono and stereo input

channels. The only actual difference between models is the number of mono input modules. All other

modules and conﬁguration are the same. This manual applies to all three models.

Contents

Foreword 6

About This Manual 7

General Approach ....................................... 7

The PM5000 Models .................................... 7

PM5000 Overview 10

Panel Layout .............................................. 10

Top Panel ................................................... 10

Rear Panel .................................................. 12

Expansion: Connecting to

External Equipment .............. 14

Cascade ........................................................ 14

MIDI................................................................ 14

GPI (General Purpose Interface)................. 14

Input Channel Section 15

Mono and Stereo Input Modules .............. 15

Head Amp Block........................................... 15

HPF Block ..................................................... 16

EQ Block ....................................................... 16

Insert Block................................................... 17

Stereo Aux Send 1~12 Block ...................... 17

G/A (Group/Aux) Send 1~8 Block ............... 18

Main Out Block ............................................. 18

Channel Fader Block ................................... 20

Channel Grouping ..................................... 21

VCA Grouping .............................................. 21

Assigning VCA and Mute Groups............... 21

VCA Master and

Master Mute Switch Group Control ............ 24

Master Out Section 26

Multiple Masters In

Single Modules .......................................... 26

Basic Signal Routing................................. 27

Controls Common To All Masters............ 28

Stereo Aux Master Module ....................... 30

G/A (Group/Aux) Master Module .............. 31

Group/Aux Switching................................... 32

Stereo and Mono Master Modules ........... 34

Matrix Send and

Master Out Section 35

Matrix Send Section .................................. 35

Matrix Master Out Section ........................ 37

Oscillator and

Talkback Section 38

Oscillator/Talkback Signal Output ........... 39

Monitor Control Section 40

Monitor Source........................................... 40

The Monitor Outputs.................................. 41

Cue Signal Monitoring............................... 41

Solo Mode................................................... 44

Cue and Solo .................................................44

Basic Operation ............................................45

Meter Bridge ............................................... 47

Digital Control Section 49

Control Functions ...................................... 49

Scene Memory Functions ......................... 51

Overview ........................................................51

Fade Time ......................................................52

Scene Store ...................................................53

Scene Recall..................................................53

Title Edit........................................................54

The Preview Function...................................55

Utility Functions......................................... 56

Overview ........................................................56

Common Operations ....................................57

Basic Functions ............................................58

Battery Check ............................................58

Date/Time ..................................................59

CompactFlash Memory..............................59

Lock Mode .................................................61

Memory Protect .........................................62

Scene Edit .................................................62

Bus Mode.......................................................63

G/A Bus Mode ...........................................63

Stereo Matrix Mode ...................................64

Safety and Protection Functions.................65

Group Assign Safe.....................................65

G/A Bus Assign Safe .................................65

Recall Safe Select .....................................66

Solo Enable ...............................................66

Input Solo Safe ..........................................67

Monitor .......................................................... 67

Monitor Mode ............................................ 67

Monitor Delay............................................ 68

Master Cue AFL Position .......................... 69

Scene Recall ................................................. 69

Theater Mode............................................ 69

Fader Mode............................................... 70

Automation................................................ 70

Direct Recall/ Mute Master........................ 71

GPI ................................................................. 72

Scene Inc/Dec (GPI In) ............................. 72

GPI Out ..................................................... 72

Cascade ........................................................ 74

Cascade.................................................... 76

MIDI................................................................ 77

MIDI Program Change .............................. 80

MIDI Control Change ................................ 81

MIDI Setting .............................................. 81

MIDI Echo Back ........................................ 82

MIDI Program Change Table .................... 83

Appendix 84

Installing Options And

Changing Internal Switch Settings ...........84

Module Removal and Replacement............ 84

Input Transformer Installation .................... 86

Internal Switch Settings For

Each module................................................. 88

Connector Pin Assignments .....................92

PM5000 Self-diagnostic Function .............93

Initializing the Internal Memory .................. 93

Error Messages...........................................94

Troubleshooting .........................................95

Specifications .............................................96

1. General Specifications ............................ 96

2. Inputs/Outputs.......................................... 97

3. Others........................................................ 98

MIDI Data Format ........................................99

Index 102

PM5000 Overview

Panel Layout

The layout of the PM5000’s functional sections in the basic conﬁguration is shown below. In the PM5000-

52C the master output section is located in the center of the console, while in all other models it is located

to the right of the console.

Top Panel

PM5000 Overview

NOTE

In this manual the console’s main functional groups are referred to as “sections.” Each section further contains “blocks” of

functions. The basic hardware divisions are “modules.” For example, all of the console’s input modules make up the “input

channel section.” Each input channel is made up of an “EQ block,” a “fader block,” and others. In the PM5000 each input

channel is made up of two separate hardware components: an “input channel module” and a “fader module.”

PM5000-28

PM5000-52C

PM5000 Overview

1 Input Channel Section (page 15)

Two types of input channels are provided – mono and

stereo – but the basic block structure of each is the same.

After going through phantom power, input gain, phase

reversal, and high-pass ﬁlter stages, the audio signal

passes through a 4-band equalizer before it reaches the

channel fader. External processing gear can be inserted

into the channel signal path either before or after the EQ

block. The post-EQ signal can be sent to any or all of 12

stereo aux buses and 8 G/A (group/aux) buses. The audio

signal from the input channel can be assigned to the

stereo L&R bus and/or mono bus. On mono input

channels the signal can also be assigned to the stereo and

mono (center) buses in LCR mode. Up to 12 VCA

groups and 8 mute groups can be set for each channel’s

fader block. Furthermore, the channel on/off status,

master bus assign settings, grouping, and fader settings

can be stored in the console’s scene memory for instant

recall whenever required.

2 Master Output Section (page 26)

The master output section is further subdivided into

stereo aux master, G/A (group/aux) master, and stereo/

mono master sections. Each stereo aux master module

independently controls the signals from two adjacent

stereo aux buses (a total of 12 stereo aux buses).

Depending on the selected G/A bus mode, each G/A

master module can handle the signals from two adjacent

group/aux buses as up to 4 stereo pairs or 8 mono feeds.

The stereo and mono masters are integrated into a single

module, but are independent internally. The stereo and

mono masters receive the signals from the stereo and

mono buses, respectively, and send these signals to the

stereo and mono main outputs. Each master features a

SUB IN input and a [SUM GAIN] control for gain

adjustment. The on/off status of each master, as well as

bus assign and other settings can be stored in the

console’s scene memory.

Matrix Send and Master Out Section (page 35)

The matrix section is made up of 4 stereo and 8 mono

matrix mixes. The sends to the matrix mixes are all

derived from the master output section. The matrix input

section is located at the top of the master output section.

The signal from each master can be sent to a matrix bus

by turning the master’s [TO MATRIX] switch on and

using the matrix level controls to apply the signal to the

required matrix bus. The [SUB IN] control located next

to the stereo/mono master [SEND LEVEL] control

adjusts the level of the [MATRIX SUB IN L&R] signal

sent to each matrix bus.

The matrix output section is located to the right of the

matrix input section, and it is here that the ﬁnal matrix

bus output levels are set. The stereo matrix buses can be

switched to function as mono sends via a utility mode

function, in which case the summed L & R mono signal

is delivered via the L and R outputs. The on/off status of

the matrix outputs can be stored in the console’s scene

memory.

4 VCA Master Section (page 21)

The VCA section can be used to independently control

up to 12 VCA groups (VCA1 ~ VCA12) set up via the

fader blocks of each input channel. The VCA master

faders function as master faders for the corresponding

VCA groups, while the [VCA MUTE] switches mute or

un-mute the corresponding VCA groups. With this

versatile system it is possible to assign a channel to

multiple VCA groups set up for different purposes.

5 Oscillator/Talkback Section (page 38)

From this section the oscillator and talkback signals can

be sent to any of the console’s master and matrix sends.

The [TB/OSC] switches in the master and matrix

sections assign the oscillator and talkback signals to the

corresponding output.

6 Monitor Control Section (page 40)

With two monitor outputs (MONITOR A & B) and

[CUE] switches on each module, any source or

combination of sources can be monitored as required.

Normally the same monitor signal is delivered via the

two main monitor outputs as well as the console’s three

headphone jacks (one at the top of the monitor module,

and two on either side of the front panel). When the

[LCR] switch is engaged the MONITOR A and B

outputs can be used simultaneously for LCR monitoring.

The [SOLO MODE] switches on the meter bridge allow

the module [CUE] switches to be used as solo switches

independently for the console’s input and output sections

(CUE/SOLO function).

PM5000 Overview

7 Mute Master Section (page 21)

The 8 [MUTE MASTER] switches can be used to mute

speciﬁed input channel groups, or as [DIRECT

RECALL] switches for the scene memory. Whether

these switches function in the MUTE MASTER or

DIRECT RECALL mode is speciﬁed via a utility mode

function.

8 Digital Control Section (page 49)

The PM5000’s digital control features are concentrated

in this section. One of the main functions of this section

is storage and recall of console settings to and from the

scene memory. In addition to memorizing the on/off

status of panel switches, the scene memory can also

store fader settings that will be reproduced by the

motorized channel and VCA faders when recalled. A

fader time function is provided to specify the amount of

time it will take for the faders to physically reach the

recalled settings. This section also provides access to

utility functions that deﬁne basic operation of the

console and the way it interacts with some types of

external equipment. External CF (CompactFlash)

memory cards can be initialized and used to store scene

memory data.

9 Meter Bridge (page 47)

Used in conjunction with the monitor control section, the

meter bridge’s LED bar-graph meters provide visual

monitoring of ﬁnal output levels at the console’s rear-

panel outputs. Indicators are also provided to display the

status of the PW5000 Power Supply unit as well as the

console’s internal fan unit and phantom power supplies.

Brightness controls for the console’s illuminated

controls and gooseneck lamps are also provided. Other

controls provided on the meter bridge are scene memory

preview on/off and mode selectors for the CUE/SOLO

function.

) Memory Card Slot

The console's memory card reader is located on the front

panel. The PM5000 can use CF (CompactFlash)

memory cards (see page 59).

Rear Panel

NOTE

The two screws on the right side of the digital control section can

be used to attach a protective cover. The six screws on the sides of

the master sections can be used to attach a book rest or a talkback

cable. These 8 screws do not affect the mechanical strength of the

unit. Use the attached screws or M3-size machine screws 8

millimeters or less in length.

NOTE

All PM5000 inputs and outputs are balanced except for the PHONES outputs and expansion connectors. See the input/output speciﬁcations at the

end of this manual for details.

@##

&*( ™£¢

º¡º¡

$%^∞

PM5000-28

@##

&*( ™£¢

º¡º¡

$%^! !∞

PM5000-52C

PM5000 Overview

! Mono (Stereo) Inputs

XLR-type input connectors, DIRECT OUT connectors,

and INSERT IN and OUT connectors are provided on

each input channel. Stereo modules feature separate

connectors for the L and R channels, but do not have

DIRECT OUT connectors.

@ Sub Inputs

Each stereo aux master has L and R stereo aux SUB IN

connectors, each group/aux master has G/A SUB IN

connectors, both monitor outputs feature stereo 2TR IN

(1 & 2) and L/C/R CUE SUB IN connectors, and the

stereo and mono master outputs have L and R ST SUB

IN and MONO(C) SUB IN connectors. L and R

MATRIX SUB IN connectors are also provided for all

matrix outputs. Please check the supplied block diagram

for details.

# Insert Inputs and Outputs

Insert input and output connectors are provided on all 12

stereo aux masters, 8 group/aux masters, the stereo and

mono masters, and the 4 stereo matrix and 8 mono

matrix outputs.

$ Stereo Aux Master Out

% G/A (Group/Aux) Master Out

^ Matrix Out

The stereo aux master, G/A (group/aux) master, and

matrix output connectors are grouped together here.

& Monitor Out

These are the console’s two stereo monitor outputs (A &

B). You can use outputs A and B as separate stereo

monitor outputs, or use A and B simultaneously for LCR

monitoring (MONITOR B = Center).

* Talkback/Oscillator Out

The talkback or oscillator signal appears at this output.

( Stereo Output and Mono Output

These are the stereo and mono master outputs (ST OUT,

MONO (C)).

º Lamp Connectors

The supplied gooseneck lamps can be connected here (4

connectors on the PM5000-52C, 3 on the PM5000-36

and PM5000-28). Lamp brightness can be adjusted via

the [LAMP DIMMER] control on the meter bridge.

Engage the [LAMP OFF] switch to turn the lamps off.

¡ Fan Vents

These are the air vents for the console’s internal cooling

fans (4 locations on the PM5000-52C, 3 on the PM5000-

36 and PM5000-28). Be sure that the vents aren’t

blocked when installing the console.

™ Fan Switch

Sets the speed of the console’s internal cooling fans to

match prevailing operating conditions. Normally the

[LOW] setting can be used. When the ambient

temperature is high, however, such as in some outdoor

applications when the console is exposed to direct

sunlight, the [HIGH] setting should be used. Also switch

to the [HIGH] setting if the top-panel temperature feels

higher than normal.

£ +48V Master Switch

This is the master switch for the 48-volt phantom power

supply to all input channels. When using phantom power

use the individual input channel [+48V] switches to turn

phantom power on or off as required.

¢ External Expansion Connectors

Type A and B CASCADE connectors, a D-sub 25-pin

GPI connector, and MIDI IN/OUT/THRU connectors for

connection to compatible external equipment.

∞ Power Supply Connector

The dedicated external PW5000 power supply unit must

be connected to this connector using the power supply

cable supplied with the PM5000 console.

NOTE

Stereo aux SUB IN and G/A SUB IN connectors are not provided

on the PM5000-28.

PM5000 Overview

Expansion:Connecting to External Equipment

The PM5000 is entirely self-contained and can be used

effectively on its own, but it does provide some versatile

expansion capabilities. In this section we’ll describe how

the PM5000 can be synchronized with external gear and

cascaded with other Yamaha mixing consoles.

Cascade

Two types of cascade connectors are provided on the

PM5000 rear panel: TYPE [A] for connection to a

second PM5000, and TYPE [B] for connection to

Yamaha PM4000/3500 series mixing consoles. In either

case the extra console will be added to increase the total

number of available input channels.

Type A

When the TYPE [A] connectors of two PM5000 consoles are

connected via a cross cable the functions listed below become

linked between the master and slave consoles. The slave console’s

utility mode can be used to specify reception of individual

parameters.

• VCA master section (mute & fade, fade time link).

• Mute master.

• The cue/solo setting (sync of all cue groups).

• Scene memory (synchronized storage and recall of the same

scene number).

The TYPE [A] port can also be connected to the serial RS-422 or

RS-232C port of a personal computer for ofﬂine console parameter

editing. PM5000 setup data can be transferred to and from the

console in standard CSV ﬁle format and edited in any spreadsheet

application that can import and export CSV data. The edited data

can then be directly read back into the PM5000.

Type B

The TYPE [B] cascade connector can be used to connect the

PM5000 to a Yamaha PM4000 or PM3500 series console for

linkage of the functions listed below. In this case the PM5000 will

function as the master console, there is no need to use the utility

mode to set the receive parameters. Cue/solo settings can,

however, be transmitted from the PM4000/3500.

• VCA master section (mute & fade, fade time link).

• Mute master (except for the PM3500).

• The cue/solo setting (sync of input cue only).

MIDI

The PM5000 MIDI connectors allow connection to other

MIDI equipment to provide the following capabilities:

• Program change message reception from an external MIDI

device for scene memory selection.

• Transmission of appropriate program change messages to

external MIDI gear when a scene memory is recalled on the

PM5000.

• Control change reception from an external MIDI device for

control of PM5000 panel control values.

• Transmission of appropriate control change messages to

external MIDI gear when a panel control is operated on the

PM5000.

In order to select the PM5000’s 1000 internal scene

memories using MIDI program change messages 1~128

it is necessary to use program change bank select

messages or create an program change table for the

PM5000. The program change table will also determine

which program change number is transmitted by the

PM5000 when a scene memory is recalled. MIDI

settings can be accessed via the console’s utility

functions. Also refer to the MIDI data list at the end of

this manual.

GPI (General Purpose Interface)

The GPI port allows pulse-signal interfacing with

compatible external equipment for bi-directional control

of several functions. Receive functions include

incrementing or decrementing of the PM5000 scene

memory and talkback on/off switching. GPI data can be

transmitted when a fader is operated (manually or

automatically), or when a speciﬁed scene memory is

recalled. All of these functions are accessible via the

PM5000 utility functions. Refer to the GPI Pin

Assignments chart at the end of this manual for more

information.

NOTE

See the detailed descriptions of the related utility functions in the

Utility Functions section beginning on page 56.

THRU

OUT

MIDI

GPI

RS232C

RS422

MASTER

SLAVE

NOTE

Appropriate MIDI cables must be connected from the OUT

connector of the transmitting device to the IN connector of the

receiving device. The THRU connector on the receiving devices

re-transmits the data received at the IN connector. On the

PM5000 an “echo” function can be used to retransmit data

received at the IN connector via the OUT connector.

Input Channel Section

Mono and Stereo Input Modules

Mono and stereo input modules make up the console’s

input channel section. In essence each stereo module

contains two parallel mono signal paths, and the panel

controls control both channels simultaneously.

Head Amp Block

Initial adjustment of the input audio signal level and

other parameters can be carried out here.

1 [+48V] Switch

Engage this switch to supply +40-volt phantom power to

the corresponding input.

2 [PAD] Switch

When this switch is engaged a 26-db pad is inserted at

the channel’s input to compensate for high-level source

signals.

Input Channel Section

Mono Input

Module

Stereo Input

Module

The arrows indicate controls and indicators that differ

between the mono and stereo input modules.

NOTE

In order to use phantom power, the rear-panel [+48V MASTER]

switch must be turned on. The [+48V MASTER ON] indicator on

the left side of the meter bridge will light when the master

phantom power switch is on.

Mono Input

Module

Stereo Input

Module

1 14

3 3

2 2

Input Channel Section

3 [GAIN] Control

Adjusts the input level. When the [PAD] switch is off the

input level can be adjusted from –10 dB through –60 dB.

When the [PAD] switch is engaged the range is from +16

dB through –34 dB.

4 [L+R] Switch (stereo modules only)

When this switch is engaged the stereo input signal is

summed to a mono mix, allowing the stereo input

modules to be used as mono input modules, as required.

5 [ø] (Phase) Switch

Engaging this switch reverses the phase (also referred to

as the “polarity”) of the input signal.

HPF Block

The high-pass ﬁlter can be used to attenuate unwanted

low-frequency noise that can adversely affect the overall

sound.

6 [HPF] Switch and Control

The ﬁlter is activated when the switch engaged, and the

control can be used to adjust the high-pass ﬁlter cutoff

frequency from 20 Hz through 400 Hz. The ﬁlter has a

12-dB/oct. cutoff slope.

EQ Block

This 4-band equalizer features

individually-adjustable HIGH,

HI-MID, LO-MID, and LOW

bands for versatile shaping of

the channel signal. The HIGH

and LOW bands are switchable

between shelving and peaking

operation, while the HI-MID

and LO-MID bands are peaking

types.

7 EQ Controls

Two controls are provided for

each EQ band: the upper “Q”

control adjusts bandwidth,

while the lower concentric

control adjusts frequency (outer

control) and gain (inner

control). The HIGH and LOW

bands additionally have a

peaking/shelving switch that

determines the band’s mode of

operation: engaging the switch

selects the shelving mode.

* For all bands Q (bandwidth) can be adjusted from 0.5 ~ 3.0.

8 [EQ] Switch

Turns the 4-band EQ block on or off. When the [EQ]

switch indicator is off the EQ circuitry is bypassed. EQ

is active when the indicator is lit.

NOTE

Stereo modules feature concentric gain controls: the inner control

adjusts the gain of the left channel and the outer control adjusts

the gain of the right channel.

NOTE

To maintain the proper subjective signal level the left and right

channels are attenuated by 3 dB.

HIGH

1 kHz ~ 20 kHz, -15 dB ~ +15 dB (peaking

and shelving modes)

HI-MID 400 Hz ~ 8 kHz, -15 dB ~ +15 dB

LO-MID 80 Hz ~ 1.6 kHz, -15 dB ~ +15 dB

LOW

30 Hz ~ 600 Hz, -15 dB ~ +15 dB (peaking

and shelving modes)

Input Channel Section

Insert Block

These switches are used to determine whether and where

external processing gear connected to the rear-panel

INSERT IN and OUT connectors will be inserted into

the channel signal path.

9 Insert [ON] Switch

Turns channel insert on or off. When the [ON] switch is

engaged an external equipment connected to the rear-

panel INSERT IN connectors is inserted into the

channel’s signal path. The [PRE] switch (below)

determines whether the insert is pre- or post-EQ.

) [PRE] Switch

Determines whether the channel’s INSERT IN and OUT

connectors insert the externally connected gear before or

after the channel EQ stage. When the switch is off the

insert is post-EQ. When on (when the indicator is lit) the

insert is pre-EQ.

Stereo Aux Send 1~12 Block

The controls in this block determine

the levels at which the channel signal is

sent to the console’s 12 stereo aux

buses.

Send Level and Pan Controls

(mono modules)

Send Level and Balance

Controls (stereo modules)

The inner controls adjust send level (0

dB at approximately 2 o’clock), and

the outer controls adjust pan for mono

modules or balance for stereo modules.

@ [ON] Switch

When an [ON] switch is engaged the

send to the corresponding aux bus is

active.

# [PRE] Switch

When this switch is engaged the pre-

fader signal is sent to the

corresponding aux bus. When off, the

post-fader signal is sent to the aux bus.

NOTE

The channel signal appears at the rear-panel INSERT OUT

connector whether the INSERT [ON] switch is engaged or not.

)

Input Channel Section

G/A (Group/Aux) Send 1~8 Block

These controls determine how the channel signal is sent

to the console’s 8 group/aux buses.

$ Send Level Controls

Adjust send level to the corresponding group/aux bus (0

dB at approximately 2 o’clock).

% [ON] Switch

When an [ON] switch is engaged the send to the

corresponding group/aux bus is active.

^ [PRE] Switch

When this switch is engaged the pre-fader signal is sent

to the corresponding group/aux bus. When off, the post-

fader signal is sent to the group/aux bus.

Main Out Block

This block determines how the channel signal is

assigned to the console’s main stereo and mono (center)

buses. The stereo and mono outputs can be used

independently, or combined for LCR output.

& [PAN]/[CSR] Control

(mono modules only)

Adjusts panning of the signal sent to the bus(es) to which

the channel signal is assigned via the main out switches

(. When the [ST] switch is engaged, assigning the

channel signal to the stereo bus, stereo panning is

adjusted via the inner control. When the [LCR] switch is

engaged and the channel signal is assigned to both the

stereo and mono buses in LCR mode, the outer [CSR]

(Center-Side Ratio) control can be used – refer to the

column below.

* [BAL] Control (stereo modules only)

Determines the stereo balance when the stereo-module

[ST] main out switch is engaged to send the channel

signal to the stereo bus.

NOTE

The above descriptions apply when the group/aux buses are used

as 8 mono aux buses (the default mode). The functions of the

controls will vary depending on the G/A bus mode selected via

the group/aux master section – refer to “Group/Aux Switching”

on page 32 for details.

(

Mono Input

Module

Stereo Input

Module

(

¡¡

Input Channel Section

( Main Out Switches

Determine where the post-fader channel signal will be

sent. To assign the channel signal to the stereo bus

engage the [ST] switch and use the [PAN] & or [BAL]

* control to adjust the stereo image. To send the signal

to the mono bus engage the [MONO] switch. In all cases

the channel fader determines the signal level.

On mono modules it is also possible to send the channel

signal to the stereo and mono buses in LCR mode, using

the mono bus as the center signal. To do this engage the

[LCR] switch and use the [CSR] control & to adjusts the

Center-Side Ratio to achieve the desired LCR balance.

º Channel [ON] Switch

Turns the input channel on or off. When off the channel

signal is not sent to the STEREO AUX, GROUP AUX,

STEREO or MONO buses.

¡ Level Meter

Displays the channels post-EQ pre-fader signal level.

The [PEAK] indicator will light when the signal level

exceeds 17 dB above nominal (0 dB) level.

NOTE

The [PEAK] indicator responds to the pre-EQ and pre-insert

signal level as well as to the post-EQ pre-fader level.

LCR vs. Stereo + Mono Operation

When the [LCR] switch is engaged the stereo and mono (center) buses become linked for LCR operation and the

[ST] and [MONO] switches cannot be engaged. On the other hand, when the [LCR] switch is not engaged the [ST]

and [MONO] switches can be engaged simultaneously. In either case the channel signal is sent to both the stereo and

mono buses. The difference between these two setups is described below.

For example, mono sources are normally positioned in the stereo sound ﬁeld or swept from one side to the other by

adjusting the panning to the stereo bus. This works ﬁne when the distance between the left and right speakers is

relatively small, but problems arise in venues where the speakers are further apart. In fact, in even modest venues if

a channel is panned fully left, for example, audience members sitting on the right side of the house will hear very

little of that signal, if any. In such cases it is useful to provide a center channel, the output level of which will be

adjusted to reinforce the stereo image and provide more effective coverage. Manually adjusting the levels and

panning of the stereo and mono buses to achieve this effect can be extremely difﬁcult, and that’s where the LCR

output mode with CSR (Center-Side Ratio) control comes in handy. With this system and an LCR speaker setup it is

possible to produce natural stereo positioning and smooth panning in large venues with a single control. The [PAN]

control adjusts panning as always, while the [CSR] control determines how the center channel responds to [PAN]

control operation as shown in the diagrams above. The more the [CSR] control is rotated clockwise, the higher the

center channel level as the [PAN] control approaches center position.

Outer: CSR

Inner: PAN

L Bus Level

R Bus Level

MONO(C) Bus Level

CSR Control: LR CSR Control: Center CSR Control: CSR

LR CSR LR CSR LR CSR

Input Channel Section

Channel Fader Block

The channel faders determine the level of the channel signal sent to the console’s master buses, and are of primary

importance in setting up the balance between the various channels in the mix. The channel faders can also be assigned to

speciﬁc VCA and mute groups for group level and mute control.

™ Channel Fader

Adjusts the out signal level from the corresponding

channel. The channel faders also affect the signal level

sent to the stereo aux and group/aux buses when the

[PRE] switches associated with the corresponding sends

are off (i.e. they are sending the post-fader signal).

£ [RECALL SAFE] Switch

¢ [FADER SAFE] Switch

Either of these switches can be engaged to prevent the

corresponding data from changing the channel settings

when a scene memory is recalled. Use the [RECALL

SAFE] switch to maintain the master bus assign switch

settings, or [FADER SAFE] switch to maintain the level

of the channel fader.

∞ VCA Indicators 1~12

Indicate the VCA groups to which the corresponding

channel fader is assigned. If a VCA group master to

which the channel is assigned is muted via its [VCA

MUTE] switch, the corresponding VCA indicator will

ﬂash rather than light continuously. More details are

provided in the “Channel Grouping” section on page 21.

§ MUTE Indicators 1~8

Indicate the mute groups to which the corresponding

channel is assigned. More details are provided in the

“Channel Grouping” section.

¶ [CUE] Switch

When this switch is engaged the pre-fader channel signal

is sent to the console’s CUE L&R buses regardless of the

channel’s on/off status. The cue signal can be monitored

via the rear-panel MONITOR OUT connectors or any of

the console’s PHONES jacks.

™

∞

NOTE

The channel faders are motor-drive types that will physically

move to the memorized settings when a scene memory is recalled

– after the speciﬁed “fade time,” if one has been programmed.

Refer to “Scene Memory Functions” on page 51 for details.

NOTE

Using the VCA CUE function, the post-fader channel signal can

be monitored.

NOTE

The [CUE] switches are also used to assign channels to VCA and

mute groups (page 21), as well as to specify target channels when

setting fade time parameters (page 52). Normal [CUE] switch

function is suspended while any of these operations are in

progress.

Input Channel Section

Channel Grouping

This section will describe how channels can be assigned to VCA and mute groups.

VCA Grouping

The PM5000 provides two methods of “grouping” input

channels so that they can be controlled via a single

master fader while maintaining the level relationship

between the individual channels in the group. The

traditional method is to send the channel signals to any

of the console’s 12 stereo aux or 8 mono group/aux

buses and use the bus master fader for group control.

The second method, pioneered by Yamaha’s introduction

of VCA-controlled groups in the PM3000 console, is to

directly control the levels and muting of the channels

assigned to a group via voltage control. The main

advantage of this system is that a number of different

group conﬁgurations – for different scenes in a show, for

example – can be set up beforehand and then recalled

instantaneously as needed. This type of speed and

ﬂexibility is simply not possible using the traditional

group bus assignment method.

Assigning VCA and Mute Groups

Each input channel can be freely assigned to any of 12

VCA groups and 8 mute groups for group level control

via the VCA master faders or group muting via the mute

master switches. VCA or mute group assignment is

initiated by using the ASSIGN MODE keys in the

PM5000’s digital control section.

VCA 1 VCA 12VCA 11VCA 10VCA 3VCA 2

VCA Master Section Mute Master

Switches

NOTE

The ASSIGN MODE keys include a [FADE TIME] key which

will not be discussed here. Fade time assignment speciﬁes the

amount of time it will take the motor faders to reach the recalled

fader levels when a scene memory is recalled. Refer to the “Scene

Memory Functions” section on page 51 for details concerning the

fade time function.

Input Channel Section

VCA Group Assignment Procedure

1 Press the ASSIGN MODE [VCA] key to initiate the assignment procedure (the indicator will ﬂash).

2 Engage a VCA master [CUE] switch to specify the VCA master to which a channel or multiple channels are to be

assigned. The [CUE] switch will ﬂash. If any input channels are already assigned to the selected VCA master, their

corresponding VCA indicators will ﬂash.

3 Engage the [CUE] switches of the input channels to be assigned to the selected VCA master (the corresponding VCA

indicators will ﬂash). To undo an assignment simply press the channel [CUE] switch a second time (the VCA

indicator will go out).

4 Repeat step 3 for all input channels to be assigned to the selected VCA master.

5 If a different VCA master [CUE] switch is pressed at this point the target VCA master will change accordingly and

new channel assignments can be made. All channel assignments to the previously-selected VCA master will be

conﬁrmed and their corresponding VCA indicators will light.

6 Channel assignments can now be made to the newly-selected VCA master.

7 Press the ASSIGN MODE [VCA] key to end the assignment procedure (its indicator will go out). Pressing any other

ASSIGN MODE key will also end the VCA assignment procedure – assignment will switch to the newly-selected

ASSIGN MODE.

NOTE

Normal [CUE] switch operation is suspended during the assignment procedure but the current cue settings are retained.

VCA 1 1234 5 6 7

VCA Fader Channel Fader

1234 5 6 7VCA 2VCA 1

VCA Fader Channel Fader

Input Channel Section

Mute Group Assignment Procedure

1 Press the ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key to initiate the assignment procedure (the indicator will ﬂash).

2 Engage a mute master ([1] ~ [8]) switch to specify the muter master to which a channel or multiple channels are to be

assigned. The mute master switch will ﬂash. If any input channels are already assigned to the selected mute master,

their corresponding MUTE indicators will ﬂash.

3 Engage the [CUE] switches of the input channels to be assigned to the selected mute group (the corresponding

MUTE indicators will ﬂash). To undo an assignment simply press the channel [CUE] switch a second time (the

MUTE indicator will go out).

4 Repeat step 3 for all input channels to be assigned to the selected mute group.

5 If a different mute master switch is pressed at this point the target mute group will change accordingly and new

channel assignments can be made. All channel assignments to the previously-selected mute group will be conﬁrmed

and their corresponding MUTE indicators will light.

6 Channel assignments can now be made to the newly-selected mute group.

7 Press the ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key to end the assignment procedure (its indicator will go out). Pressing any

other ASSIGN MODE key will also end the mute group assignment procedure – assignment will switch to the newly-

selected ASSIGN MODE.

NOTE

Normal [CUE] switch operation is suspended during the assignment procedure but the current cue settings are retained.

1234 5 6 7

Mute Master Switch Channel Fader

1234 5 6 7

Mute Master Switch Channel Fader

Input Channel Section

VCA Master and Master Mute Switch Group Control

If a number of input channels are assigned to VCA masters or mute master switches as described in the preceding

section, those channels can be controlled as a group from a single fader or mute switch.

VCA Section

VCA master faders 1 ~ 12 function as group faders for the assigned input channels, adjusting the output level of all

assigned channels while maintaining the level relationships between them. The ﬁnal fader level of each channel will be

the sum of the channel fader and VCA fader settings. In the example below input channels 1, 3, 5, and 7 are assigned to

VCA group 1 while input channels 1 through 4 are assigned to the VCA 2 group.

In the same way, the [VCA MUTE] switches on the VCA master modules function as group mute switches for the

assigned input channels.

NOTE

The [VCA MUTE] switches function in a slightly different way than the mute master switches. When a [VCA MUTE] switch is engaged the

effect is the same as turning that VCA fader all the way down to -∞. The mute master switches, on the other hand, disengage the channel [ON]

switches of the assigned channels.

VCA 2VCA 1 1234 5 6 7

VCA Faders Channel Faders

Since the VCA 2 fader is set to 0 dB (nominal), the

final fader levels of input channels 2 and 4 will

correspond exactly to their respective channel fader

settings.

Since the VCA 1 fader is set to –20 dB and the

VCA 2 fader is set to 0 dB, the final fader levels

of channels 1 and 3, which are assigned to both

VCA 1 and VCA 2, will 20-dB lower than the

input channel fader settings.

1234 5 6 7VCA 2VCA 1

VCA Faders Channel Faders

[VCA MUTE]

Switch

Since the VCA 2 [VCA MUTE] switch is engaged

the final fader level of input channels 1 ~ 4 will be -∞.

Input Channel Section

The VCA 1 ~ VCA 12 [CUE] switches function as group cue switches for all assigned input channels. When a VCA

master [CUE] switch is engaged it will light, while the [CUE] switches of all assigned channels will ﬂash, and the signals

from those channels will be routed to the console’s cue (L&R, C) buses for monitoring.

The Mute Master Switches

Mute master switches [1] ~ [8] function as group mute switches for the assigned input channels.

Press any of the MUTE MASTER switches, [1] ~ [8], to mute the assigned channels. You can conﬁgure the channel [ON]

switches to either ﬂash or go out entirely when muted, as described on page 25-1.

NOTE

Refer to the “Monitor Control Section” on page 40 for more details.

NOTE

If the mute safe function is on, the channel [RECALL SAFE] switches can be used to prevent speciﬁed channels in the group from being muted

when the assigned mute master switch is engaged (details on page 66). When the direct recall function is on and the [DIRECT RECALL]

indicator is lit, the mute master switches can not be used for group muting (details on page 71).

1234 5 6 7VCA 2VCA 1

VCA Faders Channel Faders

Channels 1 and 3 can be monitored by engaging either the

VCA 1 or VCA 2 [CUE] switch.

1234 5 6 7

Mute Master Switches Channel Faders

In this setup channels 1 and 3 can be muted by engaging either the mute master [1] or [2] switch.

25-1

Group Mute Channel [ON] Switch Indication Mode

When the channels assigned to a MUTE MASTER ([1] ~ [8]) switch are muted, the [ON] switches of the muted channels

can be set to either ﬂash or go out entirely. Flashing is the initial default setting.

1 Enter the Group Mute Display Setup Mode by turning the power off, and then back on while holding the ASSIGN

MODE [MUTE] switch. Please note, however, that the console will automatically restart in the normal mode if no

operations are performed for 5 seconds.

NORMAL

CAUTION

+16 -16 +12 +48

HIGH

STOP THERMAL

POWER

ON OFF

OPERATION MONITOR FAN LINE VOLTAGE

FAN SPEED

AUTO HIGH

POWER SUPPLY

M U T E

M O D E : B L I N K

PW5000

Power Switch

25-2

2 While the Group Mute Display Setup Mode display is showing use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select either “BLINK”

(the muted channel [ON] switches will ﬂash) or “STATIC” (the muted channel [ON] switches will go out).

3 Press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm the selection and restart in the normal mode. Press the [CLEAR/EXIT] key if you

want to restart in the normal mode without altering the previous setting.

NOTE

• This setting is retained when the console power is turned off, but is not included in the setup memory and therefore can not be saved to a CF

memory card.

• When the STATIC mode is selected the [ON] switches will still ﬂash when PREVIEW is engaged.

• When the STATIC mode is selected pressing the group-muted channel [ON] switches will be ignored.

M U T E

M O D E : B L I N K

BLINK Mode

Flashing

M U T E

M O D E : S T A T I C

STATIC Mode

Going out

Master Out Section

Multiple Masters In

Single Modules

The master output section is made up of modules

housing the masters for 12 stereo aux buses, 8 G/A

(group/aux) buses, a stereo bus, and a mono bus. Both

the stereo aux and G/A master modules combine pairs of

adjacent masters – odd and even numbers – in each

module.

While the stereo aux master modules each handle two

stereo signal pairs, each G/A master module can be used

to handle two independent mono signals, a linked pair of

mono signals, or a stereo pair.

Similarly, the stereo/mono master module combines the

console’s main stereo and mono bus masters.

Master Out Section

Stereo Aux

Master Module

G/A Master

Module

Stereo/Mono Master

Module

Master Out Section

Basic Signal Routing

In the same was as the input channel modules, the only real difference between the stereo aux, G/A, stereo,

and mono masters is whether they are mono or stereo. The basic routing is the same for all signals, as

summarized in the diagrams below.

Each master receives the signal from the assigned input channels via the corresponding bus, and that signal

is summed with the signal from the related SUB IN connector and the talkback and oscillator signal (in

stereo in the stereo masters). [SUM GAIN] controls are provided at this point to allow excessively hot

signals to be reduced as necessary to prevent overload. The next step in the signal path is the master insert,

allowing external processing gear to be applied at this point. From there the signal goes to the

corresponding rear-panel master output, and/or to the corresponding stereo or mono matrix.

ST AUX

MATRIX

MASTER OUT

MATRIX

INSERT

G/A OUT

MATRIX

INSERT

MASTER OUT

MATRIX

MONO

MONO (C)

MATRIX

MONO (C)

OUT

MONO (C) SUB IN

TB/OSC

ST AUX L

ST AUX R

SUM

GAIN

ST AUX SUB IN L

ST AUX SUB IN R

TB/OSC

MASTER OUT

MATRIX

STEREO BUS IN L

STEREO BUS IN R

SUM

GAIN

STEREO SUB IN L

STEREO SUB IN R

TB/OSC

MASTER OUT

MATRIX

STEREO

MATRIX

STEREO

OUT

G/A

G/A IN

SUM

GAIN

G/A SUB IN

TB/OSC

SUM

GAIN

* Shaded blocks correspond to switches on the modules.

Master Out Section

Controls Common To All Masters

Since the basic signal routing is common to the various master modules, all modules also feature many of

the same controls. It is the differences that, in a sense, deﬁne the character of each module type. The stereo

and mono masters have completely independent sets of controls, while the stereo aux and G/A masters

each combine two pairs of channels with two identical sets of controls. In all cases the controls on the left

side of the paired modules apply to an odd-numbered master while those on the right apply to the adjacent

even-numbered master. In the illustrations below the black bullets with white numbers refer to controls

common to all master modules.

NOTE

After the common controls have been described below, the independent controls (white bullets with black numbers) will be

described for each type of master module.

1 1

)

6 6

7 7

$ $$ $

8 8 8

Odd-numbered

Master Controls

Even-numbered

Master Controls

Odd-numbered

Master Controls

Even-numbered

Master Controls

Master Out Section

1 [TO MATRIX] Switch

When this switch is engaged the signal from the

corresponding master is sent to the stereo and mono

matrix. The matrix send is derived after the master fader

and master [ON] switch. Because of this the master

[ON] switch must be engaged in order to send the master

signal to the matrix via the [TO MATRIX] switch.

2 [SUM GAIN] Control and Indicator

3 ∑·PEAK Indicators

The ∑·PEAK indicators indicate the state of the signal

after summing in each master. The indicators light when

the mixed signal reaches 3-dB below clipping. When a

∑·PEAK indicator lights it is advisable to rotate the

corresponding [SUM GAIN] control counterclockwise

to reduce the sum gain to prevent possible overloading (a

maximum reduction of 20 dB is possible). The SUM

GAIN [ON] indicator will light to notify the operator

that sum gain reduction is in effect.

4 [TB/OSC] Switch

When the [TB/OSC] switch is engaged the oscillator

and/or talkback signal can be sent to any or all of the

console’s master outputs as well as the matrix. The

signal to be sent is determined by the talkback section

controls (page 38).

6 [INSERT] Switch

When this switch is engaged external equipment

connected to the corresponding INSERT IN and OUT

connectors is inserted into the master signal.

7 [RECALL SAFE] Switch

Engaging this switch prevents the corresponding

master’s settings from being changed by a scene recall

operation. The parameters to be protected can be

speciﬁed via a utility function (page 65).

8 Master Fader

Determines the output level presented at the

corresponding master output connector.

9 Master [ON] Switch

Turns output of the corresponding master on or off.

When a master [ON] switch is engaged and lit, the

master signal is available at the corresponding master

output.

$ [CUE] Switch

The [CUE] switches are used to monitor the

corresponding master signals via the console’s cue bus.

PFL (pre-fader listen) or AFL (after-fader listen) can be

selected as required. When the monitor control section

[MASTER PFL] switch is engaged, the [CUE] switches

send the master’s pre-fader signal to the cue bus. If the

[MASTER PFL] switch is disengaged the post-fader

master signal is sent to the cue bus.

NOTE

The stereo aux master modules are dual conﬁgurations, each

including two stereo master faders.

NOTE

With the initial default setup the AFL signal cannot be monitored

unless the master [ON] switch is engaged. This can be changed to

allow AFL monitoring even when the master [ON] switch is

disengaged via a utility function (PRE ON, see page 69).

Master Out Section

Stereo Aux Master Module

Refer to the preceding “Controls Common To All Masters” section for descriptions of the stereo aux master controls not

included in this section.

5 [L+R] Switch

Engaging this switch sums the corresponding premixed

stereo signal to a mono signal which is then delivered via

both the L and R master channel.

ST AUX

ST AUX L

ST AUX R

SUM

GAIN

ST AUX

TO MATRIX

ST AUX SUB IN L

ST AUX SUB IN R

TB/OSC

INSERT

MASTER OUT

MATRIX

NOTE

To maintain the proper subjective signal level the left and right

channels are attenuated by 3 dB.

NOTE

The [L+R] switches allow the stereo aux masters to be used as

mono masters. In this case a signal applied to either the L or R

SUB IN connector will be send to both the L and R master

channels. Since the L and R insert patch points are independent, it

is possible to separately process the left and right outputs even

though the source for both channels is the same mono mix.

Master Out Section

G/A (Group/Aux) Master Module

Refer to the preceding “Controls Common To All Masters” section for descriptions of the G/A master controls not

included in this section.

) [TO ST] Switch

! [PAN] Control

@ [TO MONO] Switch

When the [TO ST] switch is engaged the post-fader is

sent to the stereo bus via the [PAN] control for left/right

positioning. When the [TO MONO] switch is engaged

the same signal is sent to the mono bus.

# G/A Bus Mode Indicators

Indicate the current mode of the G/A master module.

When the GROUP POST PAN indicator is lit the module

is functioning as a group stereo master. When the

GROUP PRE PAN indicator is lit the module is

functioning as dual group mono masters. And when the

AUX indicator is lit the module is functioning as a dual

mono aux master.

G/A

G/A IN

SUM

GAIN

G/A OUT

TO MATRIX

G/A SUB IN

TB/OSC

INSERT

MASTER OUT

MATRIX

)

NOTE

The signal sent from the G/A master modules to the stereo and

mono buses is the same as the post-fader AFL signal that can be

monitored by using the [CUE] switches. For this reason with the

initial default setup the signal cannot be monitored unless the

master [ON] switch is engaged. However, similar to the way that

this can be changed to allow AFL monitoring even when the

master [ON] switch is disengaged via a utility function

(MASTER CUE AFL POSITION = PRE ON), an internal switch

setting can be changed to allow the G/A master signal to be sent

to the stereo and/or mono bus whether the master [ON] switch is

engaged or not.

Master Out Section

Group/Aux Switching

The G/A modules are all dual types that can be set for GROUP

POST PAN (stereo master), GROUP PRE PAN (dual mono

master), or AUX (dual mono master) operation. The current

mode of each G/A module is shown by the G/A bus mode

indicators.

When the G/A bus mode is switched, the actual change occurs not in the G/A module, but in the way the mono or stereo

input channel signal is sent to the group/aux buses (please refer to the block diagram). The operational differences

between the three G/A bus modes are organized in the following chart. Be sure to select the mode that best suits your

application.

NOTE

The G/A master module mode can be switched via a utility

function (page 63).

G/A Bus Mode From Mono Input Modules From Stereo Input Modules

GROUP POST PAN

(L = odd, R = even)

The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch

and [SEND LEVEL] control have no

effect. The post-fader mono signal is L/R

assigned via the [PAN] control and sent to

the odd and even-numbered G/A buses

(L = odd, R = even).

The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch

and [SEND LEVEL] control have no

effect. The post-fader stereo signal is L/R

balanced via the [BAL] control and sent to

the odd and even-numbered G/A buses

(L = odd, R = even).

GROUP PRE PAN

The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch

and [SEND LEVEL] control have no

effect. The post-fader mono signal is sent

to the odd and even-numbered G/A buses

in parallel.

The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch

and [SEND LEVEL] control have no

effect. The post-fader stereo signal is sent

directly to the odd and even-numbered G/

A buses (L = odd, R = even).

AUX x 2 (default)

The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch

and [SEND LEVEL] control function

normally. The post-fader mono signal is

sent to the odd and even-numbered G/A

buses in parallel.

The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch

and [SEND LEVEL] control function

normally. A mono mix of the post-fader

stereo signal is sent to the odd and even-

numbered G/A buses in parallel.

NOTE

When the G/A bus mode is set to GROUP POST PAN or GROUP PRE PAN or when the mode is set to AUX and the input channel [PRE FADER]

switch is off the channel fader level affects the G/A bus send level. In such a case the send from channels assigned to a VCA or mute group will

also be affected by VCA fader, [VCA MUTE] switch, and mute master switch operation.

Mono AUX mode (default)

Master Out Section

Cue Operation Differences In

the G/A Bus Modes

The way the G/A master signal is sent to the cue buses

varies according to the selected G/A bus mode. When

the GROUP PRE PAN or AUX mode is selected adjacent

G/A master channels function independently and the

same signal is sent to both the L and R cue buses when

cue is engaged. When the GROUP POST PAN mode is

selected, however, adjacent G/A master channels

function as a stereo pair and the odd-numbered master

feeds the L cue bus while the even-numbered master

feeds the R cue bus.

In the GROUP POST PAN mode the two [CUE]

switches on a module function in tandem so that

engaging either one will automatically engage the other

at the same time.

CUE L CUE R CUE L+R CUE L+R

Stereo

signal L

channel

Same

mono signal

to both

L and R

channels

Same

mono signal

to both

L and R

channels

Stereo

signal R

channel

Master Out Section

Stereo and Mono Master Modules

Refer to the preceding “Controls Common To All Masters” section for descriptions of the stereo and mono

master controls not included in this section.

Compared to the stereo aux and G/A master modules just described, the stereo and mono masters are

relatively simple. The stereo master controls on the left side of the module correspond approximately to

one half of the controls on a stereo aux module (i.e. the controls for one stereo pair). For maximum

convenience in practical applications, however, independent [TB/OSC] switches are provided for the left

and right channels so that the talkback or oscillator signal can be applied independently to one channel or

the other, or to both if required. Similarly, the mono master controls correspond approximately to one half

of the controls on a G/A master module. Since the stereo and mono masters feed the console’s master

stereo and mono outputs there is no need for mono mix or send-to-stereo assignment switches.

Stereo Master (Left) Mono Master (Right)

Matrix Send and Master Out Section

Matrix Send Section

The matrix send section is located at the top of the console’s master out section. From the hardware

standpoint it is a “matrix send block” fed by the outputs of the various master modules, but from an

operational perspective it is a separate section to which the signals from the master modules are assigned

via their respective [TO MATRIX] switches.

The matrix send conﬁguration for each master is basically the same. From the top down there are four

stereo matrices (ST MATRIX 1 ~ 4) and eight mono matrices (MATRIX 1 ~ 8). The outputs from the

master modules can be assigned to the matrix inputs and the matrix send levels individually adjusted as

required.

Matrix Send and Master Out Section

STEREO MATRIX 1

STEREO MATRIX 2

STEREO MATRIX 3

STEREO MATRIX 4

MATRIX 1

MATRIX 2

MATRIX 3

MATRIX 4

MATRIX 5

MATRIX 6

MATRIX 7

MATRIX 8

Stereo Aux

Master Module

G/A

Master Module

Stereo/Mono

Master Module Monitor Module

The master signals flow vertically.

The matrix bus signals

flow horizontally.

[TO MATRIX] Switches

Matrix Send and Master Out Section

The level and balance of signals sent from the mono masters (group/

aux, mono) a stereo matrix can be adjusted via the inner and outer

controls, respectively. Stereo signals from stereo masters (stereo aux,

stereo) sent to a mono matrix are internally mixed to mono at the

matrix input and then routed to the appropriate mono matrix bus.

The stereo and mono master matrix input blocks also feature [SUB

IN] controls that allow signals from the MATRIX SUB IN inputs to

be sent to the matrix buses.

The console’s talkback and oscillator signals can be fed to any matrix

bus by engaging the [TB/OSC] switch located to the right of each

[SUB IN] control (the talkback/oscillator signal is simultaneously

assigned to the L and R channels of stereo matrix buses). The

∑·PEAK indicators light when the matrix bus signal reaches 3-dB

below clipping. When a ∑·PEAK indicator lights it is advisable to

reduce the send level from the corresponding masters until the

indicator goes out.

Stereo Aux Master Module

G/A Master Module

Stereo/Mono Master Module

ST MATRIX

(MONO)

MATRIX

ST MATRIX

(MONO)

MATRIX

LR LR

G/A G/A MONO

ST AUX

SUB IN

ST AUX

Stereo channel sends to the stereo matrices are sent

directly with the L/R balance determined by the source

channel.

Mono channel sends to the stereo matrices are

internally mixed to mono.

Mono master signals sent to the stereo matrices can

be adjusted for level (inner control) and L/R balance

(outer control).

Mono channel sends to the mono matrices are sent

with the L/R balance determined by the source

channel.

Matrix Send and Master Out Section

Matrix Master Out Section

The matrix master out section is located to the right of the matrix send section. The matrix master out

section determines where the signals received at the matrix send section will ﬁnally be output, with a

comprehensive complement of [INSERT], [RECALL SAFE], and other functions.

Easiest to conceive of as an extension of the matrix send section, the matrix master out section has

corresponding independent stereo matrices (ST MATRIX 1 ~ 4) and mono matrices (MATRIX 1 ~ 8).

Since the only function of this section is to control output of the signals from each matrix bus its control

complement is quite simple, with no visible difference between the stereo and mono matrices (the L and R

channels of stereo matrices are controlled simultaneously). The only difference is the MONO MODE

indicator provided on the stereo matrices (ST MATRIX 1 ~ 4). The MONO MODE indicator lights when

the corresponding stereo matrix is being used as a mono matrix.

Engaging the matrix [ON] switch activates the corresponding matrix output (output from that matrix is

disable when the [ON] switch is disengaged). For active matrix outputs the [MASTER] control determines

the level of the signal that will appear at the corresponding rear-panel MATRIX OUT connector. External

processing gear connected to the MATRIX INSERT (MONO/ST) connectors is inserted into the matrix

signal when the [INSERT] switch is engaged. The [RECALL SAFE] and [CUE] switches function in

exactly the same way as those on the master out section (page 29).

Matrix Send

Section

Matrix Master

Out Section

MONO MODE

Indicator

Matrix [ON]

Switch

Oscillator and Talkback Section

The oscillator and talkback sections, located to the right of the master section, are independent. The

oscillator section is capable of generating pink noise or sine-wave signals for testing and system setup via

the TB bus, while the talkback section can be used to send the audio signal from the talkback mic via the

TB bus. The [TB/OSC] switches provided on each master and matrix bus allow the talback/oscillator

signal to be routed as required.

The oscillator and talkback signals are applied to the TB bus by engaging the [OSC ON] or talkback [ON]

switch, respectively. Since the oscillator and talkback sections share the same TB bus, however, only one

can be engaged at a time. If both the [OSC ON] and talkback [ON] switches are engaged simultaneously,

the talkback section takes priority. The talkback and oscillator signals can be sent to the rear-panel

TB/OSC OUT connector by engaging the [TB/OSC OUT] switch.

Oscillator and Talkback Section

[OSC ON] Switch

[TB/OSC OUT] Switch

Talkback [ON] Switch

Oscillator and Talkback Section

Oscillator/Talkback Signal Output

The oscillator is capable of producing continuous or burst-output pink noise, or sine wave signals from 20 Hz through 20 kHz.

Engage the oscillator section [PINK] switch to generate

pink noise. If the [SWEEP/BURST] switch is off the

pink noise produced will be continuous. When the

[SWEEP/BURST] switch is engaged the control

immediately above it can be used to set the burst-output

interval from 1 second through 20 seconds. The length of

each pink noise burst is ﬁxed at 200 milliseconds.

To generate sine-wave signals disengage the [PINK]

switch. To select the sine-wave frequency, use the [10k],

[1k], or [100] frequency selector. If the [SWEEP/

BURST] switch is engaged the control immediately

above it can be used to vary the selected frequency from

0.2x through 2x (in 120 steps), thus making the entire

audible spectrum from 20 Hz through 20 kHz available.

When the [OSC ON] switch is engaged the oscillator

signal is output at the level determined by the oscillator

[LEVEL] control (make sure the talkback section [ON]

switch is disengaged).

To deliver a talkback signal via the TB bus an

appropriate microphone must be plugged into the

INPUT connector (input level = –50 dB). When using a

phantom-powered microphone engage the [+48V]

switch to supply +48-volt phantom power to the INPUT

connector. The [ ] switch engages an 80-Hz high-

pass ﬁlter for the microphone connected to the INPUT

connector to cut out unwanted low-frequency noise.

When the talkback [ON] switch is engaged the talkback

signal is output at the level determined by the talkback

[LEVEL] control.

NOTE

The current oscillator setting – sine wave frequency or burst

interval – can also be visually conﬁrmed via the digital control

section message display when no other message is being

displayed.

NOTE

In order to supply phantom power to the talkback INPUT

connector the rear-panel [+48V MASTER] switch must be turned

on. When the [+48V MASTER] switch is on the +48V MASTER

ON indicator on the left side of the meter bridge will light.

Monitor Control Section

Monitor Source

The monitor out section controls output to the consoles

two monitor outputs (MONITOR A & B OUT) as well

as to the headphone jacks.

Three sources can be selected for monitoring: the stereo

master signal, input from the 2-track inputs (2TR IN 1 &

2), and CUE. The stereo master signal can be monitored

via the MONITOR A or MONITOR B output simply by

engaging the corresponding [ON] switch and adjusting

the [LEVEL] control as required. If the [2TR IN 1] or

[2TR IN 2] switch is then engaged the monitor source

will be switched to the corresponding 2-track input. Cue

monitoring occurs when any channel or master [CUE]

switch is engaged (cue monitoring takes priority over 2-

track input monitoring).

Monitor Control Section

NOTE

A monitor delay function is provided to allow a delay to be

applied to the monitor and headphone outputs for time alignment

between the sound from the main house and monitor speakers.

Normal

Operation

[2TR IN 1/2]

Engaged

[CUE]

Engaged

Monitor

Signal

Stereo

master.

2-track input. Cue

NOTE

If the console is set up so that the stereo master signal is not

normally output (see page 67), only the cue signals will appear at

the MONITOR outputs.

Monitor Control Section

The Monitor Outputs

The two monitor outputs can be used independently or

simultaneously. When using MONITOR A and B at the

same time, the [LCR] switch can be engaged to allow the

MONITOR B L channel to function as the C (center)

channel for LCR monitoring in conjunction with the L

and R channels from MONITOR A. Engage the [L+R]

switch to sum the L and R channels to form a mono mix

which will be delivered via both the L and R outputs. If

you engage the [+MONO (C)] switch the mono master

signal will be output via L and R in addition to the center

channel.

Cue Signal Monitoring

If an input channel, VCA master, master out, or matrix

out [CUE] switched is engaged while the stereo master

or 2-track input signal is being monitored by the

system’s monitor speakers or headphones, the

corresponding cue signal can be monitored.

The cue signals from the input channel section, VCA

section, or master out section (including the matrix out

section) can be monitored one section at a time. When a

[CUE] switch is engaged in any section the

corresponding cue indicator will light: INPUT CUE,

VCA CUE, or MASTER CUE. The cue signal is derived

from different points in different sections, as described

in the chart below.

NOTE

The [LCR] switch has no effect on headphone output. When the

[+MONO (C)] switch is engaged, however, the cue C signal is

delivered to the L and R channels at the same level, producing a

similar effect.

Normal Operation

[LCR] Engaged

[L+R] Engaged

[+MONO (C)] 

Engaged

[L+R] and 

[+MONO (C)] 

Engaged

LC R

L+R (C) R+L

L+C (C) R+C

L+R+C (C) R+L+C

Section

To MONITOR

OUT When

[CUE] Engaged

Cue Point

Input Channel

Channel

(mono/stereo)

PFL (ﬁxed)

VCA

Channels assigned

to VCA groups

(mono/stereo)

AFL (after [PAN/

BAL] control)

Master Out

Stereo aux,

G/A (group/aux),

stereo, mono,

matrix

[MASTER PFL]

switch

ON: PFL

OFF:AFL

One will light during

cue monitoring.

Monitor Control Section

When a channel [CUE] switch is operated directly the channel’s pre-fader signal will be sent to the

MONITOR OUTs regardless of whether the channel [ON] switch is engaged or disengaged. In contrast to

this situation, cue monitoring of input channels via the VCA section is always AFL (post fader and post

[PAN/BAL] control). For example, If a VCA master [CUE] switch is engaged, the [CUE] switches of all

channels assigned to that group will ﬂash and only the signals from channels on which the channel [ON]

switch is engaged will be sent to the MONITOR outputs. It is therefore possible to switch individual

channels in a VCA group on or off while monitoring.

It is thus possible to monitor the PFL or AFL signal from each input channel, but a considerable shift in

level may occur when switching from one to the other. Cue trim controls are provided to compensate for

this: the [INPUT CUE TRIM] adjusts the PFL cue signal level while the [VCA CUE TRIM] control

adjusts the AFL cue signal level.

VCA 1 1234 5 6 7

VCA Fader Channel fader

Flashing

Lit

Only channels 1 and 5 can be sent to the MONITOR outputs

1234567

Gain compensation for the PFL signals

from each channel.

Gain compensation for the AFL signals

monitored via the VCA faders.

Monitor Control Section

The cue points for all masters can be switched at once.

To monitor the pre-master-fader signals engage the

[MASTER PFL] switch, or disengage it to monitor the

post-monitor-fader signals. In the latter case if the “PRE

ON” cue point is selected (before the master [ON]

switches – page 69) monitoring is possible even when

output to the house speakers is off.

As described above cue monitoring can be active for one

section at a time. Normally when multiple [CUE]

switches in a section are engaged the corresponding

signals are all sent to the monitor outputs (MIX CUE

mode). When the [LAST CUE] switch is engaged,

however, only the last [CUE] switch engaged in any one

section will be active (LAST CUE mode).

NOTE

All active [CUE] switches will be disengaged when switching

between the MIX CUE and LAST CUE modes. A neat “trick” to

disengage all cues at once, therefore, is to engage and then

immediately disengage the [LAST CUE] switch.

[MASTER PFL] Switch

[LAST CUE] Switch

The Cue Stack Function

All current [CUE] switch settings are normally

disengaged if a [CUE] switch in a different section

is engaged. When all panel [CUE] switches are

turned off monitor output reverts to the main stereo

program or 2-track input signal. In some situations,

however, the PM5000 “cue stack” function applies.

If, for example, cue monitoring is engaged for the

master out section, then the VCA section, and then

the input channel section (master out ➝ VCA ➝

input channel), and then all of the [CUE] switches

in one of the latter sections are disengaged, the cue

status of the preceding section will be restored.

Cue Stack Flow

• Master Out ➝ VCA ➝ Input Channel

• Master Out ➝ VCA

If all VCA [CUE] switches are disengaged the

preceding master out section cue status is restored.

• VCA ➝ Input Channel

If all input channel [CUE] switches are disengaged

the preceding VCA section cue status is restored.

• Master Out ➝ Input Channel

If all input channel [CUE] switches are disengaged

the preceding master out section cue status is

restored.

The cue stack function will not work if the above

order is reversed (input channel ➝ VCA ➝ master

out), or if a [CUE] switch in any other section is

engaged.

Master Out

Input

Channel

VCA

Master Out

Input

Channel

VCA

Monitor Control Section

Solo Mode

Cue and Solo

The terms “solo” and “cue” monitoring are often used interchangeably, and in some cases they are actually

the same thing. In the PM5000 and most other sound-reinforcement consoles, however, “CUE” is a signal

sent to the operator’s monitor speakers while “SOLO” is a signal sent to the speakers fed by the console’s

master or matrix outs. Since solo monitoring in the PM5000 is handled in essentially the same way as cue

monitoring, the term “cue/solo function” can be used in cases in which no clear distinction is necessary.

Keyboard

Vocal

Bass

Guitar

CUE

PM5000 (Cue Engaged)

SOLO

Keyboard

Vocal

Bass

Guitar

GuitarGuitar

PM5000 (Solo Engaged)

Guitar

Bass

Vocal

Keyboard

Guitar

Bass

Vocal

Keyboard

Guitar Guitar

House Speaker House Speaker

Console Monitor Console Monitor

House Speaker House Speaker

Console Monitor Console Monitor

Monitor Control Section

Basic Operation

The solo mode can be activated by holding the [SOLO

MODE] switch on the meter bridge for more than two

seconds – the [SOLO MODE] switch will ﬂash.

For reasons why you might not be able to switch to the

solo mode, see page 66.

No change in the output signal will occur when the solo

mode is ﬁrst engaged (you won’t suddenly have only one

channel blasting from your house speakers). Once the

solo mode has been engaged the [CUE] switches are

used to select the channel or channels to be soloed via

the master or matrix outs. The channel [ON] switches of

all other channels will ﬂash and their output will be

muted.

Let’s take a look at what happens if solo monitoring is

engaged when channel 1 is feeding stereo aux 1 (L & R),

group/aux 1, and the stereo and mono masters.

Additionally stereo aux 1 is routed to stereo matrix 1 and

group/aux 1 is routed to matrix 1.

When the solo mode is active and the channel 1 [CUE]

switch is engaged, only the channel 1 signal will appear

at all master and matrix outputs to which it is routed (the

stereo aux 1 and group/aux 1 master [TO MATRIX]

switches must be engaged).

NOTE

The [PREVIEW] indicator is used for scene memory

conﬁrmation editing (page 55).

NOTE

If you engage the solo mode during cue monitoring, all [CUE]

switches will be disengaged.

PREVIEW

SOLO SELECT

SOLO

MODE

MATRIX

STEREO

AUX

GROUP/

AUX

ST·

MONO(C)

NOTE

Solo monitoring can be activated for one section at a time: input

channel, VCA, or master out. The [LAST CUE] switch can be

used to switch between the LAST CUE and MIX CUE modes.

Also, the cue stack function will operate as described on page 43.

PREVIEW

SOLO SELECT

SOLO

MODE

MATRIX

STEREO

AUX

GROUP/

AUX

ST·

MONO(C)

GROUP/

AUX1

STEREO

MONO

MATRIX1

STEREO

AUX1

MATRIX1

Sub Speaker

Main House

Speaker

CH1 [CUE]

Switch

CH1

Signal

Main House

Speaker

Main House

Speaker

2ch

Recorder

On-stage

Monitor

Speaker

Monitor Control Section

Master Solo Select

With complex, large-scale setups, the basic method of

using individual [CUE] switches to check the sends to

the main house speakers, sub-speakers, on-stage

monitors, recording equipment and other gear can be

confusing and tedious. The Master Solo function comes

in handy in this type of situation.

The four SOLO SELECT switches located below the

[SOLO MODE] switch can only be used while the solo

mode is active. These switches determine which section

will be muted when a solo channel is engaged. For

example, if the SOLO SELECT [STEREO AUX],

[GROUP/AUX], and [ST. MONO (C)] switches are all

engaged. No major change is immediately apparent, but

when the stereo aux 1 master [CUE] switch is engaged

the sub L & R speakers will automatically be soloed. In

the same way, if the stereo master [CUE] switch is

engaged the main L & R speakers will be soloed.

If the stereo master [CUE] switch is also engaged the

main L & R speakers will also be soloed. All this time

the channel 1 signal is being sent to the recording gear

via stereo aux 1. The signal does not appear at the on-

stage monitors, however, because group/aux 1 is muted

(an internal switch allows this setting to be changed so

that the on-stage monitors do receive the channel 1

signal).

With this setup it is possible to solo-monitor the stereo or

stereo aux 1 master outputs by simply operating a single

[CUE] switch, making comparison of the main and sub

L & R speakers a simple operation. The SOLO SELECT

switches are idea for this type of operation, letting you

specify which groups of outputs are to be muted when a

solo channel is engaged.

PREVIEW

SOLO SELECT

SOLO

MODE

MATRIX

STEREO

AUX

GROUP/

AUX

ST·

MONO(C)

NOTE

The solo mode directly affects the signal at the console’s master

outputs. In addition to the SOLO SELECT switches described

above, the PM5000 has input solo safe and solo enable functions

that can be used to prevent speciﬁed channels from being affected

by solo operations. These functions are accessible via the utility

mode (page 66).

GROUP/

AUX1

STEREO

MONO

MATRIX1

ST AUX1

MATRIX1

Sub Speaker

Main House

Speaker

Main House

Speaker

Main House

Speaker

2ch

Recorder

CH1

Signal

On-stage

Monitor

Speaker

Monitor Control Section

Meter Bridge

The PM5000 meter bridge features precise bar-graph meters that display the signal levels at the master

outs (stereo aux, group/aux, stereo, mono), matrix outs (stereo, mono), cue (L/C/R), and the talkback/

oscillator bus, from –39 dB to PEAK level in 3-dB increments.

The meters are switched to display the stereo aux or stereo matrix signals, or the group/aux or mono matrix

signals. The [METER SELECT] switch in the console’s monitor control section alternately selects aux or

matrix monitoring for both of these meters at once. The CUE C meter is automatically switched to display

the talkback/oscillator signal level when either the [OSC ON] or talkback [ON] switch is engaged (the TB/

OSC LED at the bottom of the meter will light).

NOTE

Since there are only four stereo matrices, meters 5 ~ 12 are not active when the meters are switched to stereo matrix level

display.

PREVIEW

SOLO SELECT

SOLO

MODE

MATRIX

STEREO

AUX

GROUP/

AUX

ST·

MONO(C)

LAMP

DIMMER

LAMP OFF

OUT METER

LED DIMMER

PANEL

LED DIMMER

STEREO MONO(C) CUE

LR C

MATRIX

GROUP/AUX

STEREO AUX

STEREO MATRIX

123456 789101112 12 34 56 78

CAUTION

FAN

CAUTION

STEREO MATRIX

STEREO AUX

CUE

+12

PEAK

LR C

-12

-18

-24

-30

-39

-6

+12

PEAK

TB/OSC

-12

-18

-24

-30

-39

-6

Monitor Control Section

The meter bridge also features independent dimmer

controls for the meters, panel switch illumination, and

gooseneck lamps, as well as a [LAMP OFF] switch for

the gooseneck lamps.

Conﬁrmation LEDs are also provided for the phantom

power supply and other power-supply voltages, as well

as operation of the console and external power supply

cooling fans.

NOTE

If excessive temperature or abnormal voltages are detected in the

dedicated external PW5000 power supply unit the PW

CAUTION indicator will light as long as continued operation is

possible, but if operation becomes impossible the power supply

will automatically shut down. The FAN CAUTION indicator if

one or more of the PM5000’s internal cooling fans ceases to

operate. In either case have the unit(s) checked by qualiﬁed

service personnel as soon as possible.

LAMP

DIMMER

LAMP OFF

OUT METER

LED DIMMER

PANEL

LED DIMMER

Gooseneck lamp

dimmer.

Gooseneck lamp

off switch.

Bar-graph meter

dimmer.

Panel switch

dimmer.

CAUTION

FAN

CAUTION

+48V

MASTER

+48V

+12V

+16V

-16V

Phantom

power supply

and

other voltage

supplies.

External power supply

(lights when a problem

is detected).

Cooling fans

(lights when a problem

is detected).

Master phantom

power supply switch on.

Digital Control Section

Control Functions

The digital control section includes the majority of

functions used for digital control of the PM5000 scene

memory and utility features.

Digital Control Section

15 24

)

Digital Control Section

1 Scene Display (3 Digits + 3 Dots)

When the PM5000 scene memory function is active the

current (last recalled) scene memory number – 000 ~

999 – is shown on this display. The three display dots

indicate the status of the current scene as follows:

Left dot: The scene contains no data.

Center dot: A MIDI message has been received.

Right dot: The panel settings are different from the

recalled scene.

2 Message Display (4 Characters)

Messages relating to certain operations and functions are

displayed here. Error messages are also shown on the

display when problems occur (page 94).

3 Parameter Display (12 Characters)

Normally the name of the current scene is displayed

here, but when a utility function is being used the name

of the parameter being edited and its value is displayed.

4 [RECALL] Switch

5 [RECALL UNDO] Switch

6 [STORE] Switch

The [RECALL] switch actually recalls the settings for a

speciﬁed scene memory, the [RECALL UNDO] switch

undoes the last recall operation, and the [STORE] switch

is used to store new scene data in the selected scene

memory.

7 [PREVIEW] Switch

When the [PREVIEW] switch is engaged the parameters

of the selected scene are called to the console’s controls

without affecting the current audio setup, allowing the

settings to be previewed and edited as required.

8 Alpha-numeric Keypad

9 [CLEAR/EXIT] & [ENTER] Keys

) [INC] & [DEC] Keys

The alpha-numeric keypad is used to enter scene

numbers and titles, the [CLEAR/EXIT] key cancels

scene number entry or deletes title characters, and the

[ENTER] key conﬁrms an entered scene number or other

operation. The [INC] and [DEC] keys are used to

increment or decrement scene numbers or parameter

values. Either key can be held for continuous scrolling in

the corresponding direction.

! MONITOR DELAY Indicator

This indicator will light when the PM5000’s digital

delay has been applied to the monitor outputs via the

corresponding utility function (page 68).

@ [UTILITY] Switch

Accesses the console’s utility functions. Editing and

conﬁrmation of the various utility functions is carried

out via the alpha-numeric keypad 8, [CLEAR/EXIT]

and [ENTER] keys 9, and [INC] and [DEC] keys ).

# [TITLE] Switch

$ [ALPHABET] Switch

Engage the [TITLE] switch when you want to edit the

title of a scene memory. To enter characters rather than

numbers via the alpha-numeric keypad 3, engage the

[ALPHABET] switch.

% [ASSIGN MODE] Switches

The three assign mode switches are used for VCA and

mute group setup (page 21) as well as setting the scene

fade times (page 52).

NOTE

When the PM5000 power is turned on the last panel setup before

it was turned off is automatically recalled (scene memory “000”

will be recalled the ﬁrst time the power is turned on after the

console is initially shipped).

Digital Control Section

Scene Memory Functions

Overview

A “scene” is a set of panel settings stored in one of the PM5000’s 1,000 internal scene memories (000 ~ 999). Any stored

scene can be instantly recalled at any time for fast efﬁcient changes. The ﬁrst 10 scene memories (000 ~ 009) contain

preset data for common basic setups. The presets cannot be overwritten, but the remaining 990 scenes (010 ~ 999) are

available to store original setups. The parameters that can be store in each scene are listed in the chart below.

Since the parameters stored in the scene memory are the

normal panel settings used in setting up signal routing

and mixes, you can easily take “snapshots” of various

setups you might need to recall later. The preview

function can be used to check and edit the stored settings

as necessary. Stored scenes can then be recalled

instantaneously at any time.

Fade time settings can be individually stored with each

scene, so that when a scene is restored the faders settings

will, rather than jump to the recalled values immediately,

gradually fade to the recalled settings over the speciﬁed

fade time.

It is also possible to protect certain parameters so that

the speciﬁed parameters will not change when a scene is

recalled. The [RECALL SAFE] switches provided on

the input channels, master outputs and matrix outputs,

and the [FADER SAFE] switches provided on the input

channel and VCA master faders are used to specify

which parameters are to be protected for the

corresponding input or master channel, as listed in the

chart above. When a [RECALL SAFE] or [FADER

SAFE] switch is engaged the corresponding settings will

not be affected by scene recall operations, regardless of

the settings contained in the recalled scene.

Section Stored Parameters (Panel Controls)

Protect Capability

(■: Panel Control.

■: Utility Function)

Input Level (channel fader)

Fader Safe

Channel on/off

Recall Safe

Stereo bus send on/off

Mono bus send on/off

LCR send on/off

Stereo aux bus send on/off

Group/aux bus send on/off

VCA group assign

Mute group assign

Fade time assign on/off

n/a

Output STEREO AUX Master out on/off

Recall Safe

GROUP/AUX Master out on/off

Stereo bus send on/off

Mono bus send on/off

STEREO Master out on/off

MONO (C) Master out on/off

STEREO MATRIX Master out on/off

MATRIX Master out on/off

VCA Level (VCA fader)

Fader Safe

Mute on/off (VCA mute)

Fade time assign on/off

n/a

Other Scene title (entered after scene storage)

n/a

Fade time (common to input channels & VCAs)

NOTE

If you don’t intend to use the PM5000 scene memory function,

the “AUTOMODE OFF” mode can be selected (page 70) to

prevent potential problems caused by accidental scene storage or

recall operations.

Digital Control Section

Fade Time

Fade time settings can be used to create smooth

transitions between recalled scenes. The fade time

speciﬁed for a scene is common to all channel and VCA

faders, but you can individually specify the faders to

which the fade time will apply. The procedure for setting

and assigning fade times is described below.

1 To set a fade time engage the ASSIGN MODE

[FADE TIME] switch so that its indicator lights (at

this point the [CUE] switches of input and VCA

master channels currently assigned to fade time

operation will ﬂash).

2 Press the [ENTER] key so that the fade time appears

on the message display to activate the fade time

function. The fade time function can be turned off at

this point by pressing the [CLEAR/EXIT] key so that

“OFF” appears on the display.

3 Engage the [CUE] switches of the input and master

VCA channels to be assigned to the fade time

function so that their indicators ﬂash. Pressing a

ﬂashing [CUE] switch will cause the indicator to go

out and that channel will be unassigned from the fade

time function (it will not be affected by the fade time

setting and the fader setting will change

instantaneously when a scene is recalled).

4 Use the [INC] and/or [DEC] keys to set the fade time

from 0.1 to 60 seconds, as required. The fade time

can be set in 0.1-second increments from 0.1 through

10 seconds, in 0.2-second increments from 10

through 20 seconds, and in 0.5-second increments

from 20 through 60 seconds.

5 When all of the above settings have been made as

required disengage the ASSIGN MODE [FADE

TIME] switch (its indicator will go out). Pressing any

other ASSIGN MODE switch will have the same

effect (the assign mode will change to that of the

newly selected switch).

6 The speciﬁed fade time and fader assignments can be

stored in a scene memory as described in the

following section. Please note that if you recall a

different scene before performing the scene store

procedure the fade time settings you have made will

be lost.

10.0

NOTE

When a scene containing a fade time setting is recalled, “FADE”

will appear on the message display while the scene fade is in

progress (unless another message is being displayed at the same

time).

Digital Control Section

Scene Store

The following procedure stores the panel settings along

with the current fade time settings (set as described in

the preceding section).

1 Specify the scene memory number to which the

scene is to be stored (010 ~ 999). The desired scene

number can be directly entered via the alpha-numeric

keys, or the [INC] and [DEC] keys can be used to

scroll through the available scene memory numbers.

In either case the selected scene number will ﬂash,

and the current scene title will appear ﬂashing on the

parameter display (no title will appear if the scene

contains no data).

2 Press the [STORE] switch and, if necessary, edit the

scene title (steps 2 and 3 on page 54).

If not necessary, press the [STORE] switch again.

3 The following conﬁrmation message will appear.

4 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to store the scene.

The scene number will light continuously indicating

that the current settings have been stored in the

selected scene. Press the [3] if you want to abort the

store operation.

Scene Recall

Stored scene data can be recalled as follows.

1 Specify the scene memory number from which the

scene is to be recalled (000 ~ 999). The desired scene

number can be directly entered via the alpha-numeric

keys, or the [INC] and [DEC] keys can be used to

scroll through the available scene memory numbers.

In either case the selected scene number will ﬂash,

and the scene title will ﬂash on the parameter display.

2 Press the [RECALL] switch. The scene number will

light continuously and the corresponding scene

settings will be recalled.

NOTE

Settings cannot be stored in protected scenes. If the protect

function is active, it must be turned off before new data can be

stored in the scene (page 62).

Execute the

store operation

Parameter

display

Alpha-numeric

keypad

INC key

DEC key

SURE?Y:1 N:3

NOTE

Be sure to engage the [RECALL SAFE] or [FADER SAFE]

switches for any channels on which the corresponding settings

need to be maintained.

NOTE

If the selected scene contains no data “NoDT” will appear on the

message display and the recall operation will be ignored (no

changes will be made to the panel settings).

NOTE

When the theater mode is engaged, it is possible to directly recall

scenes in sequence by using the [INC] and [DEC] keys, without

having to press the [RECALL] key (page 69). The DIRECT

RECALL switches can also be used for direct scene recall (page

71).

NOTE

Normally the channel and VCA faders will physically move to

the recalled settings via the console’s motor drive system. Motor

drive can be turned off if necessary (page 70).

Message display

Execute the recall

operation

Parameter display

Alpha-numeric

keypad

INC key

DEC key

Digital Control Section

Recall Undo

The previous scene recall operation can be undone by

pressing the [RECALL UNDO] switch. If the [UNDO

RECALL] switch is then pressed a second time the pre-

undo state will once more be recalled.

Title Edit

Titles of up to 12 characters can be entered for each

scene.

1 Select the scene for which you want to enter or edit a

title (010 ~ 999). To edit the title of the current scene

press the [TITLE] switch so that its indicator lights.

2 A cursor will appear on the parameter display, and

the character at the cursor location will ﬂash. The

scene title can now be edited. Alphabet (non-

numeric) characters can be entered via the alpha-

numeric keypad after engaging the [ALPHABET]

switch.

NOTE

The [RECALL UNDO] switch will have no effect immediately

after the console power has been turned on, before any recall

operations have been performed.

NOTE

Scene numbers 000 through 009 cannot be edited.

Parameter

display

Alpha-numeric

keypadss

Edit title

Select alphabet

(non-numeric)

characters

INC key

DEC key

CLEAR/EXIT key

ENTER key

B A A N D # 0 1 O P E N

The [CLEAR] key deletes

the character at the cursor

position and moves all

following characters

to the left.

Numbers can be entered via

the alpha-numeric keypad.

When the [ALPHABET] switch

indicator is lit the alpha-numeric

keypad can be used to enter

the characters of the alphabet.

The [INC] and [DEC]

keys move the cursor

left and right.

Digital Control Section

3 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to conﬁrm and

enter the title, the [TITLE] switch indicator will go

out and the scene number will revert to that of the

current scene (if the title of the current scene was

edited after the scene was stored, the scene number

will not change). If you have edited the title of the

current scene the new title will appear on the display

immediately.

A title edit operation in progress can be aborted by

disengaging the [TITLE] switch.

The Preview Function

The preview function is sort of an “ofﬂine editing

function” that allows you to check and edit the contents

of a scene memory location without affecting the

console’s current status and audio output.

1 To turn the preview function on, engage the

[PREVIEW] switch. Both the [PREVIEW] switch

indicator and the PREVIEW indicator on the meter

bridge will ﬂash while the preview function is on.

2 To select a scene to preview simply enter the desired

scene number (000 ~ 999). The desired scene number

can be directly entered via the alpha-numeric keys, or

the [INC] and [DEC] keys can be used to scroll

through the available scene memory numbers. In

either case the selected scene number will ﬂash, and

the scene title will appear on the parameter display.

Number

Key

Non-numeric Characters (selected sequentially by the key)

1 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . \ : ; < = > ? @ [

2 A B C a b c

3 D E F d e f

4 G H I g h I

5 J K L j k l

6 M N O m n o

7 P Q R S p q r s

8 T U V t u v

9 W X Y Z w x y z

0 (space)

NOTE

The preview function, described below, can be used to check the

title of a scene other than the one that is currently.

NOTE

The preview function cannot be engaged while the utility mode is

active (i.e. while the [UTILITY] switch indicator is lit).

NOTE

The preview function cannot be engaged during a scene fade (i.e.

a fade speciﬁed by the console’s fade time function).

PREVIEW

SOLO SELECT

SOLO

MODE

MATRIX

STEREO

AUX

GROUP/

AUX

ST·

MONO(C)

Flashes while the preview function is engaged.

Digital Control Section

3 Press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm the selected scene

number and the scene number will light

continuously. At the same time the scene settings will

be reproduced by the panel controls but no change

will occur in the console’s audio output.

4 If necessary, change the fader and switch settings as

required (page 51). If you press the [STORE] switch

at the point the edited settings will be stored in the

scene memory selected in step 2, above (the scene

number currently being displayed). If you select a

different scene number and then press [STORE] the

edited settings will be stored in the newly selected

scene number.

5 When conﬁrmation and/or editing of the scene

settings has been completed, exit from the preview

mode in any of the following three ways.

• Press the [PREVIEW] switch: The console will

return to the pre-preview state. If the setting changes

made in step 4 above have not been stored, they will

be lost.

• Press the [RECALL] switch: The current preview

settings become the active console settings and

console operation continues normally. If, however, a

different scene number is selected before the

[RECALL] switch is pressed, the current preview

settings are overwritten by the settings from the

recalled scene. In the latter case the preview settings

will be lost if they have not been stored as described

in step 4, above.

• Press the [UTILITY] switch: The utility mode will

be engaged and the console will return to the pre-

preview state.

Utility Functions

Overview

The utility functions include functions that facilitate

operation of the PM5000 as well as the console’s basic

setup parameters. Press the [UTILITY] switch to access

these functions and parameters.

NOTE

During preview all stored settings will be reproduced on the panel

controls. In this state the [CUE] switches cannot be operated (the

pre-preview settings are maintained), but the [RECALL SAFE]

and [FADER SAFE] switches can be set as required.

NOTE

If the panel settings are saved to a CompactFlash memory card in

CSV ﬁle format, the scenes can be edited ofﬂine on a personal

computer (page 59).

NOTE

The utility mode cannot be engaged while a scene title is being

edited (page 54). If the title edit mode is active it will be

necessary to disengage the [TITLE] switch and return to normal

console operation before pressing the [UTILITY] switch to

engage the utility mode. Similarly, the scene preview function

(page 55) cannot be engaged while the utility mode is active.

Digital Control Section

Common Operations

All utility functions are accessed and edited by using the

alpha-numeric keypad, [CLEAR/EXIT] key, [ENTER]

key, and [INC] and [DEC] keys while checking

functions and values on the scene display, message

display, and parameter display.

1 Press the [UTILITY] switch so that its indicator

lights, a parameter will appear on the 12-character

parameter display. At the same the corresponding

parameter number will ﬂash on the scene display.

2 The various utility parameters are selected by using

the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the desired

parameter number. You can also directly enter the

desired parameter number (1 ~ 28) via the alpha-

numeric keypad. The parameter numbers will

appears as “U01” through “U28” on the display.

* In addition to storing the above parameters in the internal PM5000

setup memory, they can be saved externally on CompactFlash

memory cards.

3 When the desired parameter has been selected, the

ﬁrst editable value for that parameter will appear on

the parameter display.

NOTE

When the [UTILITY] switch is engaged the last selected

parameter will be recalled.

B A T T . C H E C K

Function

Category

Parameter

No.

Parameter

Basic

1BATTERY CHECK

2DATE/TIME

3 COMPACT FLASH MEMORY

4 LOCK MODE

5 MEMORY PROTECT

6SCENE EDIT

Bus Mode*

7 G/A BUS MODE

8 STMATRIX MODE

Safety &

Protection*

9 GROUP ASSIGN SAFE

10 G/A BUS ASSIGN SAFE

11 RECALL SAFE SELECT

12 SOLO ENABLE

13 INPUT SOLO SAFE

Monitor*

14 MONITOR MODE

15 MONITOR DELAY

16 MASTER CUE AFL POSITION

Scene Recall*

17 THEATER MODE

18 FADER MODE

19 AUTOMATION

DIRECT RECALL/

MUTE MASTER

GPI*

21 SCENE INC/DEC

22 GPI OUT

Cascade* 23 CASCADE

MIDI*

24 MIDI PGM CHANGE

25 MIDI CTL CHANGE

26 MIDI SETTING

27 MIDI ECHO BACK

28 MIDI PGM CHANGE TABLE

D A T E

D T 2 0 0 3 / 0 2 / 1 0

Digital Control Section

4 When a parameter that can be edited is selected, the

ﬁrst editable parameter will appear ﬂashing on the

display. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys or the alpha-

numeric keypad to edit the value as required, and

then press [ENTER]. When available, the next

editable value will ﬂash and can be edited in the

same way. To go back to the previous editable value

press the [CLEAR/EXIT] key.

5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to check or edit the required

parameters. When all utility operations are complete

press the [UTILITY] switch so that its indicator goes

out to exit from the utility mode and return to normal

console operation.

Basic Functions

Battery Check (Parameter No. U01)

The PM5000 has an internal memory backup battery that

maintains the console’s scene memory, setup memory,

and time/date settings while the power is off. This

function makes it possible to check the condition of the

memory backup battery.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and one

of the following status messages will appear on the

parameter display:

Battery voltage OK.

Battery voltage low.

No battery present.

NOTE

The procedure described in step 4, above, is not necessary for

parameters that are used only for conﬁrmation (non-editable

parameters). Although some editable parameters only have a

single value while others have two or more editable values

spanning more than one display page, the basic procedure for all

is as described above (display pages are switched automatically).

You can press the [ENTER] or [CLEAR/EXIT] key a number of

times to step forward or backward to the value to be edited.

NOTE

For battery replacement, please contact your nearest qualiﬁed

Yamaha service center or personnel.

B A T T . C H E C K

Low Battery!

Battery!

Digital Control Section

Date/Time (Parameter No. U02)

This is the date and time maintained by the PM5000’s

internal clock. The date and time parameters are used to

time-stamp scene memory and other data saved to

external CompactFlash memory cards.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

the year, month, and day values will appear on the

parameter display while “DT” (date) ﬂashes. At this

point you could use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to

select “TM” (time) for editing rather than the date,

but the date parameters will appear ﬁrst since they

are usually edited ﬁrst.

2 Press the [ENTER] key and the year value will ﬂash.

The ﬂashing value can be edited by using the [INC]

and [DEC] keys. When a value has been edited as

required press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the entry and

move on to the next value.

3 Once the day (rightmost) value has been edited and

the [ENTER] key pressed, the date is conﬁrmed and

“DT” will ﬂash again. Press the [INC] or [DEC] key

and the display will change to the time parameters:

hour, minutes, and seconds. The leftmost “hours”

value will be ﬂashing and ready for editing. In the

same way as in the date display, edit each value as

necessary and press [ENTER] to move on to the next

value. When the ﬁnal “seconds” value has been

edited and the [ENTER] pressed the time entry is

conﬁrmed and complete.

CompactFlash Memory (Parameter No. U03)

This function allows internal scene and setup memory

data to be saved to and loaded from external

CompactFlash memory cards. A memory card

formatting function is also provided.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

one of the displays shown below will appear. Select

LOD (load), SAV (save), DEL (delete), or FMT

(format), as necessary, and press the [ENTER] key.

NOTE

If the backup battery runs out the date and time will be reset to

2001/1/1, 0:00:00, and will begin keeping time from that value.

DATE/TIME

D T 2 0 0 3 / 0 6 / 1 0

TM 15:45:32

NOTE

New CompactFlash memory cards must be formatted before use.

CompactFlash memory cards are formatted in accordance with

DOS (FAT16) format, and ﬁles are handled in CSV format. Data

saved to memory cards can then be loaded into a personal

computer via a card reader or similar device, and the data can

then be edited in a standard spreadsheet application (ﬁle names

comply with the DOS standard: 8 characters plus the “.CSV”

extension).

NOTE

When the load or delete functions are selected the name of the

CSV ﬁle on the card will appear on the display (the “.CSV”

extension will not be shown).

NOTE

If a memory card is not inserted, the parameter display will not

change even when you press [ENTER].

CF MEMORY

LOD:YAMAHA01

SAV:ALL

DEL:YAMAHA01

FMT:FORMAT

Digital Control Section

● Format

2 If you selected FMT and pressed [ENTER] in step 1,

above, the following conﬁrmation message should

appear.

3 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to begin formatting

the card, or [3] to abort the operation. Never remove

a memory card from the card slot during a format

operation. The following display will appear while

the card is being formatted.

● Data Save

2 After selecting SAV and pressing [ENTER] in step 1,

above, you will need to select the type of data to be

saved (below) and then press [ENTER] to conﬁrm.

• ALL: All PM5000 data (scene memory, setup

memory, program change table).

• SCENE: Scene memory data (scenes 010 ~ 999).

• SETUP: setup memory data (page 57).

• TABLE: The program change table data set up via

utility function parameter number U28.

3 Whatever data type you select you will need to enter

a name of up to 8 characters for the ﬁle to be saved.

Enter a name so you can easily identify the data later.

4 When the ﬁle name has been entered press the

[ENTER] key. The following conﬁrmation message

will appear on the display.

5 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to begin saving to

the card, or [3] to abort the operation. Never remove

a memory card from the card slot during a save

operation. The following display will appear while

the data is being saved.

● Data Load

2 After selecting LOD and pressing [ENTER] in step

1, above, you will need to select the data ﬁle you

want to load from the memory card.

3 When you have selected the ﬁle to be loaded press

the [ENTER] key. The following conﬁrmation

message will appear.

NOTE

CompactFlash memory cards can also be formatted using a

computer, but we recommend that you format cards using the

PM5000 format function to minimize the possibility of load

errors.

NOTE

File names are entered using capital letters only. The character set

available for ﬁle names is somewhat different from the set

available for scene titles (refer to the chart below). Spaces cannot

be used in ﬁle names.

SURE?Y:1 N:3

Executing

SAV:NEW_DATA

Number

Key

Usable Filename Characters (selected in sequence by the number key)

1 ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) - @

2 A B C

3 D E F

4 G H I

5 J K L

6 M N O

7 P Q R S

8 T U V

9 W X Y Z

NOTE

If a ﬁle with the same name already exists the message will

conﬁrm that it is OK to overwrite the existing ﬁle – “SURE” in

the above will appear as “OVWR”.

SURE?Y:1 N:3

Executing

LOD:YAMAHA01

SURE?Y:1 N:3

Digital Control Section

4 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to begin loading the

ﬁle, or [3] to abort the operation. Never remove a

memory card from the card slot during a load

operation. The following display will appear while

the data is being loaded.

● Data Delete

2 After selecting DEL and pressing [ENTER] in step 1,

above, you will need to select the data ﬁle you want

to delete from the memory card.

3 When you have selected the ﬁle to be deleted press

the [ENTER] key. The following conﬁrmation

message will appear.

4 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to begin deleting the

ﬁle, or [3] to abort the operation. Never remove a

memory card from the card slot during a delete

operation. The following display will appear while

the data is being deleted.

Lock Mode (Parameter No. U04)

This function can be an assurance when you have to

leave the console unattended during breaks, for example.

It locks the panel switch and channel fader settings so

they can’t be changed. Panel settings that are not savable

to the scene memory such as the channel rotary controls,

EQ [ON] switch, HPF [ON] switch, etc., cannot be

locked.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

one of the displays shown below will appear: either

ON or OFF with ﬂash on the parameter display

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select either ON or

OFF.

3 Press the [ENTER] key and the following

conﬁrmation message will appear. Press the alpha-

numeric [1] key to conﬁrm your selection, or [3] to

abort the operation.

When the lock mode is turned on, the [UTILITY] switch

will be disengaged and “LOCK” will appear on the

message display. In this state the system is locked and

the only operation that can be performed is to engage the

[UTLILITY] switch and repeat the above procedure to

turn the lock mode off and restore normal operation.

Executing

DEL:OLD_DATA

SURE?Y:1 N:3

Executing

NOTE

Even while the lock mode is active scene recall operations can be

carried out from an external device. If fader and other settings are

changed while the lock mode is active the pre-lock settings will

be restored as soon as the lock mode is disengaged.

LOCK

MODE

LOCK:ON

LOCK:OFF

SURE?1:Y

3:N

Digital Control Section

Memory Protect (Parameter No. U05)

This function can be used to temporarily protect the

scene memory from being overwritten (only the recall

operation is available).

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

one of the displays shown below will appear: either

ON or OFF with ﬂash on the parameter display

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select either ON

(memory protected) or OFF.

Scene Edit (Parameter No. U06)

Using this function you can change the order of stored

scenes (010 ~ 999) to match the ﬂow and sequence of a

music or theatrical production. By then using the

“theater mode” (described later) you can directly recall

scenes in sequence simply by using the [INC] and

[DEC] keys. This function also allows protection of

individual scenes.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

one of the following messages will appear on the

parameter display. Select MOV (move), CLR (clear),

CUT (cut), CPY (copy), INS (insert), or PRT

(protect), as necessary, and press the [ENTER] key.

Move scene:

The contents of the target (“trg”) scene memory are

moved to the destination (“dst”) scene number. This is

similar to a cut-and paste operation on a personal

computer.

Clear scene:

Clears the contents of the speciﬁed target (“trg”) scene

number, resulting in a “NO DATA” scene. You can also

select “ALL” to clear all scenes (except those that are

protected).

Cut scene:

Cuts the selected target (“trg”) scene. Since there is no

associated “paste” operation, this function effectively

clears the selected scene, but all subsequent scenes are

shifted back so the operation does not produce a “NO

DATA” scene.

NOTE

The scene edit function, described below, can be used to protect

individual scenes rather than the entire scene memory. Also,

when the memory protect function is active it is not possible to

use the scene edit function or load scenes from an external

CompactFlash memory card.

NOTE

If you attempt a scene save or delete operation while memory

protection is active “PROT” will appear on the parameter display

and the operation will be cancelled.

MEM.

PROTECT

PROTECT:

OFF

SCENE EDIT

MOV: trg> dst

CLR: trg

CUT: trg

Digital Control Section

Copy scene:

The contents of the target (“trg”) scene memory are

copied to the destination (“dst”) scene number. This is

similar to a copy-and paste operation on a personal

computer.

Insert Scene:

Inserts a “NO DATA” scene immediately before the

speciﬁed target (“trg”) scene number. All subsequent

scenes are shifted up one number to accommodate the

inserted scene.

Protect Scene:

Protects the speciﬁed target (“trg”) scene from being

changed by copy and clear operations.

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to specify the target

and destination scene numbers, and the [ENTER]

key to conﬁrm (scene protect ON or OFF is selected

in the same way). The following message will appear

on the parameter display.

3 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to execute the

selected operation, or [3] to abort.

Bus Mode

The PM5000’s G/A and stereo matrix buses can be set

up to suit a wide range of applications. These settings are

saved in the console’s setup memory, and are common to

all scenes.

G/A Bus Mode (Parameter No. U07)

Each pair G/A buses (odd and even) handled by the G/A

master modules can be used as dual mono group buses

(GROUP PRE PAN), a stereo group bus (GROUP POST

PAN), or dual mono aux buses (page 32). The main

difference between the aux and group mode is that in the

aux mode the input-module [PRE] switch can be used to

determine whether the signal is sent to the G/A bus pre-

or post-fader, while in the group mode the send is always

post-fader. The difference between the two group modes

is that in mono mode the send is pre-pan (i.e. before the

[PAN/BAL] control), while in the stereo mode the send

is post-pan.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

it will become possible to select the target G/A bus

via the parameter display: use the [INC] and [DEC]

or alpha-numeric keys to select ALL (all G/A buses)

or the desired pair (1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8), and then press

the [ENTER] key.

NOTE

Protected scenes cannot be cleared, cut, or speciﬁed as the

destination scene for a copy operation.

CPY: trg> dst

INS: trg

PRT: trg:OFF

SURE?Y:1 N:3

G/A

BUS MODE

ALL:********

1-2:GRP POST

Digital Control Section

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select GRP POST

(group stereo), GRP PRE (group mono) or AUX, and

the press the [ENTER] key. The following

conﬁrmation message will appear on the parameter

display.

3 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to execute the

selected operation, or [3] to abort.

4 Make changes to other G/A buses as necessary.

Stereo Matrix Mode (Parameter No. U08)

The L and R buses that make up the console’s four stereo

matrices can also be used as mono matrices, both buses

in each pair carrying the same L+R signal. When a

stereo matrix is set for mono operation the

corresponding MONO MODE indicator in the matrix

out section will light (page 37).

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

it will become possible to select the target stereo

matrix via the parameter display: use the [INC] and

[DEC] or alpha-numeric keys to select ALL (all

stereo matrices) or the desired pair (ST1, ST2, ST3,

ST4), and then press the [ENTER] key.

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ST (stereo)

or MONO.

3 Make changes to other stereo matrices as necessary.

NOTE

Asterisks in the “ALL” display, as shown above, indicate that the

G/A buses are set to different modes. If all buses are set to the

same mode “GRP POST”, “GRP PRE”, or “AUX” will appear.

NOTE

As soon as the mode change is conﬁrmed the mode indicators on

target G/A modules will change to reﬂect then new mode. All

[CUE] switches will automatically be disengaged.

3-4:GRP PRE

5-6:AUX

7-8:AUX

SURE?Y:1 N:3

NOTE

Asterisks in the “ALL” display, as shown above, indicate that the

stereo matrices are set to different modes. If all stereo matrices

are set to the same mode “ST” or “MONO” will appear.

MATRIX MODE

ALL:********

ST1:ST

ST2:MONO

ST3:ST

ST4:MONO

Digital Control Section

Safety and Protection Functions

This category includes a number of “recall safe”

functions that can be set to protect speciﬁc parameters

when a scene is recalled, thus maintaining the settings of

the protected parameters. There’s also a solo safe

function that can prevent improper operation of the solo

system from playing havoc with the console’s output by

either making it impossible to engage the solo mode, or

by preventing muting of speciﬁed input channels when

the solo mode is engaged. These settings are saved in the

console’s setup memory, and are common to all scenes.

Group Assign Safe (Parameter No. U09)

This function prevents changes to input-channel mute

and VCA group assignments due to scene recall

operations, maintaining the current settings. The group

assign safe function can be applied to all mute groups

and/or all assign groups.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

it will become possible to select the target group:

select MUTE or VCA and press the [ENTER] key.

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON

(protected – scene recall has no effect) or OFF (not

protected – scene recall will affect settings).

G/A Bus Assign Safe (Parameter No. U10)

This function prevents changes to the G/A master

module [TO ST] and [TO MONO] switch settings due to

scene recall operations, maintaining the current settings.

The G/A bus assign safe function applies to all G/A

master modules.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and use

the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (protected –

scene recall has no effect) or OFF (not protected – scene

recall will affect settings).

GRP ASN.SAFE

MUTE:OFF

VCA :ON

G/A ASN.SAFE

G/A SAFE:OFF

Digital Control Section

Recall Safe Select (Parameter No. U11)

Each input, VCA master, master out, and matrix out

channel on the PM5000 features [RECALL SAFE] and

[FADER SAFE] switches that can be used to protect all

of the corresponding channel’s settings or just the fader

setting from scene recall operations, allowing the

speciﬁed settings to be maintained while scene recall

operations only affect unprotected channels or settings.

This functions as the master ON/OFF switch for entire

recall safe system. There’s also a mute safe function for

all input channels which, when active, exempts the

channels on which the [RECALL SAFE] switch is

engaged from MUTE MASTER switch mute operation

when the channel is assigned to a mute group.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

it will become possible to select the target function:

select RCL SAFE (recall safe) or MUT SAFE (mute

safe) and press the [ENTER] key.

Recall Safe:

Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the recall safe function

for all [RECALL SAFE] switches.

Mute Safe:

Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the mute safe function

for all input-channel [RECALL SAFE] switches.

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn the selected

function ON or OFF.

Solo Enable (Parameter No. U12)

Enables or disables the console’s solo function. If

DISABLE is selected here the meter-bridge [SOLO

MODE] switch will have no effect. The setting of this

function cannot be changed while the solo mode is

engaged.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and use

the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ENABLE (solo

mode enabled) or DISABLE (solo mode disabled).

NOTE

Protecting input channels from mute operation using the

[RECALL SAFE] switch is not affected by the master recall safe

ON/OFF setting. Although the same [RECALL SAFE] switch is

used for both scene-recall and mute protection, the two functions

are essentially unrelated. If, for example, the recall safe master

setting is OFF but the mute safe function ON, engaging a

[RECALL SAFE] will protect the corresponding channel from

mute master operation but not from scene recalls.

RCL SAFE SEL

RCL SAFE:ON

MUT SAFE:OFF

NOTE

If the solo mode is engaged it will not be possible to change the

setting to “DISABLE”. If the solo mode is disengaged

“ENABLE” will begin ﬂashing on the display and it will be

possible to change the setting as required.

SOLO ENABLE

SOLO:DISABLE

Digital Control Section

Input Solo Safe (Parameter No. U13)

The PM5000 allows independent solo monitoring for the

input channel, VCA and master sections: when the solo

mode is active only channels on which the [CUE] switch

is engaged are output while all other channels are muted.

The input solo safe function can be applied to speciﬁed

input channels so that they are not muted when the solo

function is engaged.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

it will become possible to select the input channel to

which the solo safe function will be applied (the last

selected channel will initially be displayed).

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select an input

channel, then press the [ENTER] key.

3 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn the function

ON (the channel will be muted when solo is

engaged) or OFF (the channel will not be muted

when solo is engaged).

4 Set the solo safe function for other input channels as

required.

Monitor

These functions are used to set up the operator’s

monitoring environment and monitor output parameters.

The three monitor functions described in this section are

stored in the PM5000 setup memory and are common to

all scenes.

Monitor Mode (Parameter No. U14)

The console’s three monitor sources are the cue signal,

2-track inputs, and stereo master signal, with priority in

the order just listed. In other words, if the [CUE] and

[2TR IN1/2] switches are off the stereo master signal

will normally appear at the monitor outputs at all times.

In some situations, however, you might want to have no

signal at the monitor outputs during normal operation.

This function determines whether the stereo master

signal will or will not normally appear at the monitor

outputs.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a

display like the one shown below will appear. Use the

[INC] and [DEC] keys to select STEREO (the stereo

master signal will normally appear at the monitor

outputs) or MUTE (the stereo master signal will not

normally appear at the monitor outputs).

NOTE

Consecutive input-channel numbers are selected, with stereo

input channels counted as one channel.

IN SOLO SAFE

CH01:ON

MONITOR MODE

MONI:STEREO

Digital Control Section

Monitor Delay (Parameter No. U15)

When the monitor speakers are located a signiﬁcant

distance from the main house speakers the resulting

delay between the two sources can severely reduce the

intelligibility of the sound. In such situations the

PM5000’s internal digital delay system can be used to

delay the monitor output so that it becomes “time

aligned” with the main house sound for maximum

clarity.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

one of the monitor delay parameters will appear on

the parameter display: DELAY (the master delay

switch), UNIT (the delay units to be used:

milliseconds, feet, or meters), or TIME (the actual

delay value). Normally you will start by turning the

DELAY parameter ON, and then set the delay time

as required. Select a parameter and press the

[ENTER] key.

Master switch:

Turns the monitor delay ON or OFF. When ON the

MONITOR DELAY LED will light.

Delay units:

Determines whether the delay time will be set in

milliseconds (msec), meters (meter), or feet.

Delay value:

The actual delay value based on the selected UNIT

type. The maximum available delay is 1,800

milliseconds.

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to set the selected

parameter as required.

300/1000 (sec) x 1127.26 (feet/sec) = 338.178 (feet)

300/1000 (sec) x 343.59 (meter/sec) = 103.077 (meter)

MONI DELAY

DELAY:OFF

UNIT:msec

TIME: 300ms

NOTE

If the unit type is changed after the delay value is set, the delay

value will be recalculated and displayed according to the unit

type selected (sound travels at 343.59 meters per second, or

1,127.26 feet per second under normal conditions). This is just an

approximation, however, and for maximum accuracy it is

advisable to set the delay value after the unit type has been

speciﬁed.

UNIT:msec

TIME: 300ms

UNIT:feet

TIME: 338ft

UNIT:meter

TIME: 103m

Unit type changed.

Digital Control Section

Master Cue AFL Position (Parameter No. U16)

The cue signal from each master section can be switched

to pre- or –post-fader via the [MASTER PFL] switch in

the monitor control section (page 43). This function

determines whether the cue signal is taken from before

or after the master [ON] switch. If the cue signal is taken

from before the master [ON] switch it will appear at the

monitor outputs even if the main outputs are turned off.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a

display like the one shown below will appear. Use the

[INC] and [DEC] keys to select POST (normal

operation: post master [ON] switch) or PRE (pre master

[ON] switch).

Scene Recall

The following functions can provide maximum scene

recall efﬁciency in a wide range of applications. You can

also turn the scene memory function off altogether to

prevent accidental operation. These settings are stored in

the PM5000 setup memory.

Theater Mode (Parameter No. U17)

When the theater mode is engaged it is possible to

directly recall scenes in sequence using only the [INC]

and [DEC] keys. This only applies to scene numbers 010

through 999, and empty “NO DATA” scenes will

automatically be skipped.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a

display like the one shown below will appear. Use the

[INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (theater mode on) or

OFF (theater mode off).

CUE POSITION

POS:POST ON

NOTE

When using the theater mode it can be handy to specify a

“temporary scene.” This can be done simply by entering a scene

number via the alpha-numeric keys and pressing [ENTER] (don’t

press [RECALL]). Then, regardless of the currently active scene,

the [INC] and [DEC] keys will increment or decrement and

directly select scenes starting from the speciﬁed temporary scene

number. This ability to “pre load” a speciﬁc scene can make

critically-timed transitions much easier to execute.

NOTE

GPI input (page 72) and MIDI control change messages (page 77)

can also be used to effect scene changes.

NOTE

“THTR” will appear on the message display while the theater

mode is engaged.

THEATER MODE

THEATER:OFF

Digital Control Section

Fader Mode (Parameter No. U18)

Normally the console’s motor fader system will

physically move the faders to recalled settings when a

scene recall or preview operation occurs. This function

makes it possible to defeat the motor-drive system so

that the faders do not move when scenes are changed

(the faders levels do change internally).

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a

display like the one shown below will appear. Use the

[INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (motor faders ON)

or OFF (motor faders OFF).

Automation (Parameter No. U19)

This function can be used to turn the PM5000’s scene

memory off. When the scene memory function is turned

off all recall, preview, motor fader, safe switch, MIDI,

and GPI functions are also disabled so that the PM5000

functions like a tradition analog console.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a

display like the one shown below will appear. Use the

[INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (scene memory ON)

or OFF (scene memory OFF).

NOTE

When the motor faders are turned off level changes will result in a

mismatch between the internal fader levels and the physical fader

positions. This situation is indicated by a ﬂashing [FADER

SAFE] switch. If you want to match the fader’s position with the

internal level either press the [FADER SAFE] switch or move the

fader slightly. In either case the motor drive for that fader will be

temporarily engaged and the fader’s position will be adjusted to

match the internal level (after this has been done the [FADER

SAFE] switch will stop ﬂashing and will either light or go out

according to the current fader-safe status).

NOTE

When the console is turned on the faders will initially move to

match the internally set levels even if the fader mode function is

OFF.

FADER MODE

MOTOR:ON

NOTE

“AUTOMODE OFF” will appear on the parameter display while

the scene memory is turned off. Even when the scene memory is

disabled the channel [RECALL SAFE] switches can be used for

mute safe operation (page 66).

AUTOMATION

AUTO:OFF

Digital Control Section

Direct Recall/ Mute Master (Parameter No. U20)

In addition to their normal function as mute master

switches, the console’s 8 MUTE MASTER switches can

also be used as DIRECT RECALL switches for scene

recall. In this case the scene numbers to be recalled by

each direct recall switch must be assigned as described

below.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a

display like the one shown below will appear. Use the

[INC] and [DEC] keys to select MUTE MASTER (mute

master operation) or DIR RECALL (direct scene recall

operation).

● Scene Assignment

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting “DIR RECALL” to

move on to scene assignment. The parameter display

should look like this.

“DIR1” through “DIR8” on the display corresponds

to MUTE MASTER switches [1] through [8].

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the switch

for which a scene assignment is to be made and press

the [ENTER] key. When the scene number parameter

(rightmost) parameter begins ﬂashing use the [INC]

and [DEC] keys or the alpha-numeric keypad to enter

the number of the scene to be recalled by that switch,

and press [ENTER] again. Unassigned status “---”

also can be selected.

3 Assign scene numbers to the remaining switches in

the same way.

NOTE

The mode cannot be switched to “DIR RECALL” while any of

the switches are engaged in mute master mode. Disengage all

mute masters prior to changing the setting.

D.RCL/M.MSTR

MUTE MASTER

DIR RECALL

Lights when “MUTE MASTER” selected.

Lights when “DIR RECALL” selected.

NOTE

Switches that you don’t intend to use can be left unassigned (“---”

on the display). Unassigned status will also automatically be set if

an assigned scene is cleared to “NO DATA” status using the U06

utility function. Also, if the scenes are re-ordered the switch

assignments will be automatically changed accordingly.

NOTE

When the MUTE MASTER switches are set for direct recall

operation, the only master mute function that will apply to the

input channels is VCA muting (page 24). Unassigned switches

cannot be used for group muting. Mute master control via MIDI

control change messages is also disabled.

DIR1:---

DIR1:128

Digital Control Section

GPI

The PM5000’s rear-panel GPI port provides 3 input and

8 output channels for GPI pulse communication with

external equipment. One of the input channels controls

talkback on/off (same function as the TB [ON] switch).

One of the functions in this section determines whether

or not the remaining two input channels are active for

scene increment and decrement control. The second

function determines which of the 8 output channels are

used for fader start signal transmission and scene

linking.

Scene Inc/Dec (GPI In) (Parameter No. U21)

The GPI inputs can be used for sequential incrementing

or decrementing of the PM5000 scene memory from

external equipment. Scenes 010 through 999 can be

recalled using this capability, and empty “NO DATA”

scenes are automatically skipped. These settings are

maintained in the PM5000 setup memory.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a

display like the one shown below will appear. Use the

[INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (GPI scene recall

enabled) or OFF (GPI scene recall disabled).

GPI Out (Parameter No. U22)

This function makes it possible to specify the GPI

outputs to be used for fader start control (a signal is sent

when a fader is raised above –60 dB or lowered to -∞)

and for scene linking. Although 8 GPI outputs are

provided so that these operations can be separated, it is

possible to assign control to the same GPI outputs. Fader

start settings are maintained in the console’s setup

memory and are common to all scenes, while scene link

settings apply to the current scene and are stored in the

scene memory via a scene store operation.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a

display like the one shown below will appear. Use the

[INC] and [DEC] keys to select either the FADER

START or SCENE LINK function for setup.

NOTE

Scene incrementing and decrementing via the GPI port is slightly

different from the way the panel [INC] and [DEC] keys function

in that incrementing and decrementing will always occur from the

current scene – the “temporary scene” that can be used with the

[INC] and [DEC] keys (page 69) cannot be used with GPI port

control. If the preview function is active and a GPI scene change

command is received, the preview function will be disengaged.

GPI INC/DEC

INC/DEC:ON

GPI OUT

FADER START

SCENE LINK

Digital Control Section

● Fader Start

1 After selecting FADER START and pressing the

[ENTER] key a display like the one shown below

will appear. The example display indicates that the

input channel 34 fader (“CH34”) will produce a

signal at GPI output number 3 (“GP3”) when fader is

raised above –60 dB (“STR”).

2 Using the [INC] and [DEC] keys to set each

parameter and the [ENTER] key to move on to the

next parameter, set the fader start parameters in

sequence as required: channel, fade type (STR or

END), and the GPI output number. To prevent

operational errors select “---” for GPI outputs you do

not intend to use. The ﬁrst of the two example

displays below shows the channel 21 fader set to

produce a signal at GPI output number 5 when the

fader is lowered to -∞, while the second example

shows the channel 21 fader set to produce no GPI

output.

3 Set other channels in the same way, as required.

● Scene Linking

1 After selecting SCENE LINK and pressing the

[ENTER] key a display like the one shown below

will appear.

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys or the alpha-numeric

keypad to select the GPI output to be used for scene

linking of the current scene, and then press

[ENTER]. If you do not want GPI output to be

produced when the current scene is recalled set this

parameter to “---” to prevent operation errors.

3 Perform a scene store operation to store the settings

you have just made to the scene memory (page 53).

Note that your scene link settings will be lost if you

recall a different scene before storing the settings.

NOTE

Fader start signal output occurs with both manual and motor-

driven fader operation (and is enabled even when the console’s

motor drive system is disabled). For this reason it is important to

consider whether you want GPI output triggered by both manual

fader and automatic scene recall operations when making GPI

output settings. Remember that if you set a fader to produce GPI

output when it is moved manually, a scene recall that moves the

fader in the same range will also produce GPI output.

CH34:STR:GP3

CH21:END:GP5

CH21:END:---

NOTE

The settings cannot be store to a protected scene. Be sure to

disable scene protection before storing the settings (page 62).

OUT PORT:GP3

OUT PORT:GP8

OUT PORT:---

Digital Control Section

Cascade

The PM5000 allows cascade connection to other consoles for master-slave operation. Two types of cascade connection

are possible: type “A” for cascade connection of two PM5000 consoles, and type “B” for connection to PM4000/3500

series consoles (in the latter case the PM5000 is the master console).

A standard 9-pin RS-422 cross cable can be used for type A connection. A dedicated straight cable must be used for type

B connection. Refer to the appendix of this manual for connector pin assignments.

Please observe the following points when making cascade connections:

• Make sure the power to both consoles is off when connecting the cascade cable.

• After making the cascade connection, turn both consoles on and wait for all start-up processing to ﬁnish

before operating the consoles. Also, do not operate one console while the other is turned off.

NOTE

The two cascade connection types cannot be used simultaneously. If both types of connection are made the type A connection will take priority.

By connecting the master outs and matrix outs of the slave console to the master out and matrix out SUB IN connectors of the master PM5000

console the slave console can be used as an “expansion” console, increasing the number of available channels.

NOTE

On the salve PM5000 cascade-connected by TYPE A connector, setup memory data cannot be loaded from a memory card.

RS232C

RS422

MASTER

SLAVE

RS232C

RS422

MASTER

SLAVE

RS232C

RS422

MASTER

SLAVE

OUT

THRU

MIDI

MASTER

SLAVE

VCA CTRL

CUE CTRL

VCA 1-8

CUE SOLO

PM 3000

PM 3500

PM 4000

MUTE

OFF

1~4

SLAVE

MSTR

FAN

OFF

5~8

HIGH

LOW

SLAVE

MSTR

VCA

OFF

1~4

SLAVE

MSTR

CUE/SOLO

VCA/MUTE

CONTROL

DISCON. CONNECT

OFF

CONNECT

OFF

5~8

SLAVE

MSTR

PHANTOM

MASTER

(+48V)

OFF

PM4000 PM3500

MASTER

RS422

MASTER

SLAVE

RS422

SLAVE

CONNECT

PM5000 (Master) PM5000 (Slave)

PM5000 (Master) PM4000 or PM35000 (Slave)

RS422 Cross Cable (Type A)

Dedicated Straight Cable (Type B)

Digital Control Section

Linked Functions

When two PM5000 consoles are cascaded for channel expansion complete functional linking can be achieved as well

(you can specify which functions are to be linked as described below). It is advisable only to link the functions you

intend to use, however, to prevent confusion. The CUE function, in particular, can be bi-directionally linked between the

consoles so that, for example, if an input channel on the slave console is cued channels in the same CUE group on the

master console will also be engaged.

O: Linked, X: Not linked

Since the functions provided by the PM5000 and other consoles differ, the functions that can be cascade-linked differ as well.

*1 PM3500 series consoles have no mute group function.

*2 The PM4000M (monitor version) has no solo function.

Linked Functions (Type A) Master → Slave Exceptions (Not Linked) Slave Operation

VCA Group 1~12

Fader & Level O - X

Mute O - X

Mute Group 1~8 Mute Master ON/OFF O - X

Cue/Solo

Cue Group Select

(Bi-directional link possible)

-O

Last Cue

(ON/OFF: MIX CUE switching)

O-X

Cue Stack O - X

Solo Mode (ON/OFF) O - X

Master Solo Select - Not linked O: Independent operation

Scene Recall Same Scene Number O -

O: Linked VCA groups

conform to master settings

Scene Store Same Scene Number O - X

NOTE

Please note that the various utility settings remain active for linked functions. For this reason unexpected problems such as faders not moving,

inability to save a scene because the scene is protected, master mute not functioning because the MUTE MASTER switches are assigned to direct

scene recall, and others can occur. Plan your cascade setup carefully to avoid confusion.

Linked Functions (Type B) Master → Slave Exceptions (Not Linked) Slave Operation

VCA Group 1~8

Level (VCA level only. Faders

do not move.)

O-X

Mute (Slave VCA level set to -∞) O-X

Mute Group 1~8 Mute Master ON/OFF *1 O - X

Cue/Solo

Cue Group Select (Input

channels only)

(Bi-directional link possible)

O: Master cue group not

updated when slave cue

engaged

Solo Mode (ON/OFF) *2

(Bi-directional link possible)

O: Slave solo mode cannot be

disengaged from master

Master Solo Select - Not linked O: Independent operation

NOTE

If cue is engaged on the slave PM4000/3500 the PM5000 cue groups are input channel only. Further, since the number of VCA groups is different

VCA group 9~12 operations on the PM5000 have no effect on the slave PM4000/3500.

NOTE

Be sure to set the slave PM4000/3500 console cascade mode to “SLAVE”.

Digital Control Section

Cascade (Parameter No. U23)

To allow fuss-free type A connection of PM5000

consoles, the PM5000 is shipped from the factory with

all of the function links listed in the above chart ON. If

you want to turn some of these off, use the following

parameter on the slave PM5000. In a type B connection,

turn the master PM5000 console CUE/SOLO function

link ON if you want to enable cue/solo control from the

slave console.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

a display like the one shown below will appear. Use

the [INC] and [DEC] keys or the alpha-numeric

keypad to select VCA1 ~ VCA12 (VCA groups 1 ~

12), MUTE1 ~ MUTE8 (mute groups 1 ~ 8), CUE/

SOL (the cue/solo function), SCN RCL (scene

recall), or SCN STR (scene store), and then press the

[ENTER] key.

VCA Group 1 (~ 12)

Mute Group 1 (~ 8)

Cue Solo Function

Scene Recall

Scene Store

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn linking of the

selected function ON or OFF.

3 Set the links for other functions in the same way, as

required.

NOTE

If the physical cascade connection and hardware MASTER/

SLAVE selection has been completed, the following parameters

turn function linking on or off the instant they are set. If a link is

turned OFF it may be impossible to reproduce the previous slave

settings. To avoid confusion it is advisable to make the hardware

connections and settings after setting the software parameters.

CASCADE

VCA01:ON

MUTE1:ON

CUE/SOL:ON

SCN RCL:ON

SCN STR:ON

SCN STR:OFF

Digital Control Section

MIDI

The MIDI IN, OUT, and THRU connectors provided on

the rear panel allow PM5000 operation to be linked to

external MIDI devices. If the PM5000 MIDI OUT

connector is connected to the MIDI IN connector of an

external device, the external device can be controlled by

operations performed on the PM5000. On the other hand

if the MIDI OUT of the external device is connected to

the MIDI IN of the PM5000, the external device can

remotely control the PM5000. The connections can also

be made both ways, allowing bi-directional control. The

MIDI THRU connector can be used to retransmit MIDI

commands received at the MIDI IN connector to another

MIDI device.

If the MIDI Echo Back function is turned on (page 82),

MIDI commands received at the PM5000 MIDI IN

connector are mixed with internally generated MIDI

commands and transmitted via the MIDI OUT

connector.

MIDI commands that can be used with the PM5000 can

be largely divided into Program Change and Control

Change commands. The former apply to scene recall

operations, while the latter apply directly to fader and

switch operation. In other words, program change

commands received from an external MIDI controller

can be used to recall PM5000 scenes, while control

change commands can be used to directly control the

faders and switches.

MIDI provides a greater range and degree of control than

the GPI interface. You could, for example, use MIDI to

continuously vary a stage lighting effect in response to a

PM5000 fader operation.

In order to effectively use the PM5000’s MIDI

capabilities it is necessary to have a good grasp not only

of the MIDI standard itself, but of the MIDI functions

provided by both the PM5000 and the external MIDI

devices used as well. For example, although the standard

MIDI program change numbers only allow selection of

128 program numbers, the PM5000 has 1000 scene

memories that need to be accessible. In the same way,

the basic MIDI standard provides control change

capability for up to 128 different parameters – a ﬁgure

that is exceeded by the PM5000’s controllable faders and

switches by a wide margin.

PM5000

THRU

OUT

MIDI

GPI

RS232C

RS422

MASTER

SLAVE

Control from external device A

Control to external device B.

Commands from external device A

retransmitted to external device C.

PM5000

Lighting Console

THRU

OUT

MIDI

GPI

RS232C

RS422

MASTER

SLAVE

THRU

OUT

MIDI

Digital Control Section

Program Change

The PM5000 employs a number of “strategies” to ensure

full functionality with the standard MIDI

implementation. For example, in order to be able to

handle recall of all 1,000 PM5000 scenes via MIDI

program change commands, bank select commands (a

type of control change command) are used in

conjunction with the program change messages in the

same way that they are used in many synthesizers and

tone modules. The parameters described below can be

used to create a “program change table” that speciﬁes

which scene numbers will be recalled by which MIDI

bank and program change numbers. The reverse is true,

too: when a scene is recalled via the PM5000 controls

the corresponding bank and program change numbers

can be transmitted to an external MIDI device.

In order to provide the most ﬂexible operation with

external MIDI devices, the PM5000 provides two MIDI

program change modes: SINGLE and MULTI. Sixteen

MIDI channels (1 through 16) are available for

transmission and reception of MIDI commands, and in

large MIDI setups it is common to assign a different

channel number to each MIDI device so that programs

can be recalled independently on each device.

Also part of the standard MIDI implementation is an

“OMNI” mode which, when enabled, allows commands

to be received on any or all 16 MIDI channels. When the

OMNI mode is disable MIDI commands can only be

received via the device’s speciﬁed MIDI channel(s). The

PM5000 takes advantage of this situation in the SINGLE

mode, using four combinations of bank select number,

OMNI ON/OFF status, and a separately speciﬁable

MIDI receive channel to specify how the program

change table will be used for scene recall.

MIDI Channel/

Bank No.

Program No. Scene No.

1110

1211

1312

1413

:::

1 128 137

21138

22139

:::

2 128 265

31266

:::

3 128 393

:::

894999

895NO ASSIGN

:::

16 1 NO ASSIGN

:::

16 128 NO ASSIGN

03: 123: 393

MIDI MODE OMNI BANK

Receive Transmit Transmit/Receive Messages

MIDI

Channel

Bank number

referred to in

table

Maximum

Selectable

Scenes

MIDI

Channel

Bank number

referred to in

table

Bank Select

Program

Change

SINGLE

OFF OFF RX CH

Same number

as RX CH

128 TX CH 1 - 1~128

ON OFF 1~16

Same number

as RX CH

128 TX CH 1 - 1~128

OFF ON RX CH

Received bank

number

1000 TX CH

Bank number

corresponding

to selected

scene

1~16 1~128

ON ON 1~16

Received bank

number

1000 TX CH

Bank number

corresponding

to selected

scene

1~16 1~128

MULTI - - 1~16

Same as

received MIDI

channel

1000

Smallest bank

number

corresponding

to selected

scene

1~128

(Smallest

program

number

corresponding

to selected

scene)

Digital Control Section

Note that the PM5000 uses the same number of bank and MIDI channel numbers (1 ~ 16). If the bank number referred to

in the program change table is limited to the same number as the receive channel, then a maximum of 128 scenes can be

recalled from an external device. But if bank select numbers are used, and if the MIDI channel numbers embedded in

received program change commands are converted to bank numbers, all 1,000 scenes can be recalled directly from an

external device. In the same way scene recall operations performed on the PM5000 the corresponding program change

commands can be transmitted according to the above conversion table.

Control Change

Control change command reception and transmission are relatively simple compared to program change commands.

Each PM5000 fader and switch is pre-assigned a number that is used for both reception and transmission.

* The number of input channels refers to the number of input modules. There is no differentiation between mono and stereo modules.

For example, to control the fader levels of input channels 1 ~ 30 from an external device, set the MIDI channel to “1” and

specify the control numbers (01 ~ 05, 07 ~ 31) and the control value as required. Normally the control value is a number

from 0 to 127 (7 bits), but higher resolution is required for fader control. For this reason the PM5000 uses two values –

MSB and LSB – to provide 1,024-step control (the MSB and LSB are both 7-bit values providing a total of 14 bits, but

only the highest 10 bits are actually used).

NOTE

The above explanation may seem a little confusing, but this system has been implemented to allow effective connection with the widest possible

range of external MIDI devices. For example the SINGLE mode (OMNI OFF, BANK OFF) allows some control even with external MIDI devices

that have limited capabilities. If an external MIDI device is capable of bank number transmission it can be used to recall scenes on the PM5000. If

the PM5000 OMNI mode is enabled scene recall can be effected from multiple external MIDI devices. You could also organize your scenes in the

PM5000 scene memory into banks, transmitting the appropriate bank numbers from the controlling MIDI device to access your scenes.

NOTE

Bank select messages should be transmitted as a pair of MSB (CC#10) and LSB (CC#32), and the MSB value should be always set to “0”. The

bank numbers can be speciﬁed by LSB value (0 ~ 15).

Parameter Control Change NRPN

Value (hex)

Category Name Total (max.)

MIDI

Channel

Control Number

(CC#)

MSB

(CC#99)

LSB

(CC#99)

Level (Fader)

Input channel

1~30 (MSB)

30 1 1-5, 7-31

0 1-5, 7-31

0x0000(-∞)

0x3FFF(+10dB)

Input channel

1~30 (LSB)

30 1 33-37, 39-63

Input channel

31~52 (MSB)

22 2 1-5, 7-23

1 1-5, 7-23

Input channel

31~52 (LSB)

22 2 33-37, 39-55

VCA(MSB) 12 3 1-5, 7-13

2 1-5, 7-13

VCA(LSB) 12 3 33-37, 39-45

ON Switch

Input channel 52 4 1-5, 7-23, 33-37, 39-55 3 1-5, 7-23, 33-37, 39-55

Transmit (MSB is NRPN)

OFF: 0x00

ON: 0x7F

Receive (MSB is NRPN)

0x00~0x3F: OFF

0x40~0x7F: ON

ST AUX 12 4 64-75 3 64-75

GROUP/AUX 8 4 76-83 3 76-83

ST MATRIX 4 4 84-87 3 84-87

MATRIX 8 4 88-95 3 88-95

ST MASTER 2 4 102, 103 3 102, 103

MONO 1 4 104 3 104

Group Mute

VCA MUTE 12 5 1-5, 7-13 4 1-5, 7-13

MUTE MASTER 8 5 14-21 4 14-21

Digital Control Section

● NRPN Control

In the PM5000 NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter

number) data can be used for the same control functions

as control change commands. NRPN is actually a subset

of the MIDI control change numbers (CC#99, 98), and is

commonly employed to allow system exclusive data

transfer between different devices. Because of their

special status, NRPN commands are omitted from the

control change commands (refer to the above chart).

The PM5000 panel controls can be controlled using

either control change or NRPN commands. The

parameters described below allow control change and

NRPN control to be independently enabled and disabled

as required. If both are enable control change commands

take priority.

MIDI Program Change (Parameter No. U24)

Determines whether the PM5000 will transmit and

receive program change commands. The program

change table to be used is also speciﬁed here.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

a display like the one shown below will appear. Use

the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the required

setting, then press the [ENTER] key.

OFF:

Program change commands will not be transmitted or

received.

ON:

The corresponding program change command will be

transmitted when a successful scene recall operation

has been executed, but no data will be transmitted

when an empty “NO DATA” scene is recalled.

LOCAL:

The corresponding program change command will be

transmitted whenever a scene recall operation is

performed, regardless of the results.

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the program

change table to be used: either the pre-programmed

DEFAULT program change table, or the user-

programmable USER table.

DEFAULT:

The pre-programmed program change table.

USER:

A user-deﬁned program change table conﬁgured via

the function described on page 83.

NOTE

As with program change commands, control change commands

are transmitted and received via speciﬁc MIDI channels. The

transmit and receive MIDI channels speciﬁed by the following

parameters (TX CH, RX CH), however, do not directly affect

control change operation (they do affect NRPN and scene number

increment/decrement control which has independently

programmable transmission and reception).

NOTE

If the MUTE MASTER switches are assigned to direct scene

recall (page 71), MUTE MASTER control via control change

commands will be ignored. If the preview mode is active any

received control change or NRPN commands will affect the

currently active scene rather than the scene being previewed.

Also, continuous level variations produced by fade time

variations between scene changes will not be transmitted.

MIDI PGM CHG

PC:OFF

PC:ON

PC:LOCAL

DEFAULT

USER

Digital Control Section

MIDI Control Change (Program No. U25)

The functions in this section determine whether the

PM5000 sends and receives control change commands,

as well as whether NRPN will be enabled.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

a display like the one shown below will appear. Use

the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the required

setting, then press the [ENTER] key.

Control Change

NRPN

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn the selected

parameter ON (reception and transmission enabled)

or OFF (reception and transmission disabled).

3 Set the other functions as required.

MIDI Setting (Parameter No. U26)

This is the basic PM5000 setting for MIDI transmission

and reception, including selection of the SINGLE or

MULTI mode for program change transmission and

reception.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

a display like the one shown below will appear. Use

the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the required

setting, then press the [ENTER] key.

RX CH (Receive Channel):

Program change commands will be received on the

speciﬁed channel.

TX CH (Transmit Channel):

Program change commands will be transmitted on the

speciﬁed channel.

OMNI:

When ON program change commands can be received

on all 16 MIDI channels. When OFF reception occurs

only on the speciﬁed RX CH.

MODE:

When set to SINGLE operation is determined by the

RX CH, BANK, and OMNI parameters. When set to

MULTI the OMNI and BANK settings are ignored and

both parameters are forced ON.

BANK:

Bank select numbers will be received when this

parameter is ON.

MIDI CTL CHG

CTL:OFF

NRPN:ON

CTL:ON

MIDI SETTING

RX CH:10

TX CH:10

OMNI:OFF

MODE:MULTI

BANK:ON

Digital Control Section

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to set the selected

parameter as required.

3 Set the other functions as required.

MIDI Echo Back (Parameter No. 27)

Independently determines whether program change and

control change commands internally generated by the

PM5000 will be mixed with program change and control

change messages received at the MIDI IN connector and

transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector.

1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and

a display like the one shown below will appear. Use

the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the required

setting, then press the [ENTER] key.

Program Change Echo

Control Change Echo

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn the selected

parameter ON (echo enabled) or OFF (echo

disabled).

3 Set other MIDI functions as required.

NOTE

The transmit and receive channels are not used for control change

transmission and reception (page 79). Since they are used for

NRPN and scene number INC/DEC transmission and reception,

it is necessary to set the transmit and receive channels of the

external MIDI device to match those of the PM5000.

MIDI ECHO

PGM ECHO:OFF

CTL ECHO:OFF

PGM ECHO:ON

Digital Control Section

MIDI Program Change Table (Parameter No. 28)

The program change table determines the

correspondence between the PM5000 scene numbers

and the program change numbers that will be received

and transmitted. The table itself is a simple combination

of MIDI channel/bank number, program number, and

scene number parameters, but the way it operates will

depend on the MIDI mode setting (page 78). The table

can be initialed to return it to the initial factory-preset

state when you want to start a new table from scratch.

Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a

display like the one shown below will appear. Use the

[INC] and [DEC] keys to select SETTING (edit the user

program change table) or INITIALIZE (initialize the

table to its initial factory settings).

● Editing the User Table

1 After selecting SETTING and pressing the [ENTER]

key a display like the one shown below will appear.

From left to right the parameters on the display are:

MIDI channel/bank number (1 ~ 16) : Program

number (1 ~ 128) : Scene Number (000 ~ 999).

2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys or the alpha-numeric

keypad to set each parameters and then press the

[ENTER] key to move ahead.

3 Repeat step 2 until the program change table is

complete.

● Initialize User Table

1 After selecting INITALIZE and pressing the

[ENTER] key a display like the one shown below

will appear.

2 Press the alpha-numeric keypad [1] key to execute

the initialization operation, or the [3] key to abort.

After initialization the contents of the user table will

be the same as the default table.

MIDI PGM TBL

SETTING

INITIALIZE

NOTE

In this table one scene number is assigned to each combination of

MIDI channel/bank number and program number. Any scene

number (000 ~ 999) can be assigned to each program change

combination, so it is possible to assign the same scene to different

external program change commands. The program change

command transmitted by a PM5000 scene recall operation,

however, will always be unique. The program change data

transmitted (MIDI channel/bank number and program change

number) will depend on the selected MIDI mode and other

settings. Refer to “Program Change” on page 78 for more details.

15: 128: 999

SURE?Y:1 N:3

Appendix

Installing Options And Changing Internal Switch Settings

Please refer module installation and internal setting

changes to your Yamaha dealer or one of the Yamaha

service centers.

The following optional (sold separately) modules and

transformer are available:

● Input Section Modules

•MNM5000: Monaural input module.

•MNR5000: Rear panel for monaural input module

(includes wiring).

• STM5000: Stereo input module.

• STR5000: Rear panel for stereo input module

(includes wiring).

● Master Section Options

• SAM5000: Stereo Aux master module.

• GAM5000: Group/Aux master module.

•SMM5000: Stereo/Mono master module.

•MON5000: Monitor module.

● Other Options

• BLM5000: Blank module (includes rear panel).

• ITR5000: Input transformer.

The process of replacing faulty modules or changing

internal switch settings requires removal and

replacement of the modules. A Philips-head (“+”)

screwdriver will be required.

Before performing any of the operations described

below be sure that the power supply is turned OFF.

Module Removal and Replacement

The procedure for removal of top-panel modules is the

same for the input and master section.

● Top-panel Module Removal

1 Turn the console’s power supply OFF.

2 Loosen the screws at the top and bottom of the

module.

The screws are ﬁtted with stop-washers that prevent

them from being removed entirely.

3 Once loosened, grasp both screws ﬁrmly and pull

straight upward to remove the module. This

completes removal of master modules.

The mono and stereo input modules are wired to the

rear panel. Exercise caution when removing the

modules so as not to damage the wiring. Once the

module being removed is free of the top panel, gently

lay it on its side on the top panel, without placing

undue strain on the wiring.

Appendix

4 Unplug the wiring connectors at the top (rear) end of

the module that connect the module to the rear panel.

There are two connectors on both mono and stereo

modules, but their locations are slightly different.

5 Press the snap button on the wiring harness to release

the wire bundle, then remove the wiring from the

module. When removing the wiring, be careful that

the connectors don’t get caught on the module frame.

This completes removal of the input module.

● Removing Rear Panel Input Units

When removing rear-panel input units that correspond to

each mono and stereo input channel (these are available

as options), it is necessary to ﬁrst remove the

corresponding input channel and all connected wiring, as

described above.

1 Make sure that the rear-panel unit you are about to

remove corresponds to the input channel you have

removed, then unscrew the upper and lower screws

and remove the input unit.

2 Press the snap button on the wiring harness to release

the wire bundle, then remove the wiring from the

console frame. Carefully pull the wiring and

connectors through the rear-panel opening, making

sure that the connectors don’t catch on any part of the

console frame.

This completes removal of the rear-panel unit.

Module

Unplug these connectors

Wiring bundle

Press the snap button

Module

frame

PM5000 rear panel

rear-panel unit

Rear panel

View from above the console

Removal direction

Meter bridge

rear-panel unit

Faders

Take care that the connectors

don’t get caught here

Appendix

● Module Installation

The module installation procedure is the reverse of the

removal procedure described above.

Rear Panel Input Units

First pass the wiring through the opening in the rear

panel and pull it through to the open module area. Then

attach the rear-panel unit with two screws.

Top-panel Modules

When an input module is being installed it is ﬁrst

necessary to connect the wiring from the corresponding

rear-panel input unit to the connectors on the module and

secure the wire bundle in the wiring harness.

When inserting the module into the console make sure

that the connectors on the bottom of the module are

aligned with the corresponding connectors on console

frame. Input modules have two connectors (see the

illustration below), while master modules have three.

Guide pins are provided to make alignment easy – as

long as the guide pins are properly inserted into the

corresponding holes on the bottom of the module frame

alignment should be almost automatic. Insert the module

ﬁrmly until its panel is ﬂush with the console top, but

avoid using excessive force.

Finally, secure the module with the two screws.

Input Transformer Installation

The PM5000 input modules feature electronically

balanced inputs that do not normally require any

additional isolation. If you would rather have

conventional transformer-isolated balanced inputs,

optional ITR5000 input transformers can be installed.

The number and location of input transformers is

different for mono and stereo input modules. The

installation procedure is outlined below.

● Transformer Installation On Input modules

1 Turn the console’s power supply OFF.

2 Remove the mono or stereo console on which the

transformer(s) is to be installed as per the module-

removal instructions above.

3 Attach the transformer to the mounting bracket

supplied with the ITR5000 transformer kit with the

nut as shown in the illustration. Make sure that the

transformer leads are positioned in relation to the

mounting bracket as shown in the illustration (the

transformer leads must not be clamped between the

transformer and mounting bracket).

4 Attach the transformer to the bottom stay of the

module. Align the screw holes in the transformer

mounting bracket with the screw holes just in front of

(toward the fader end of the module) the square hole

through provided for the transformer leads as shown

in the illustration below, and secure with the two

small M3 screws. On mono modules the transformer

should face toward the front (fader) end of the

module, and on stereo modules the second

transformer should be mounted on the other side of

the square lead hole, facing in the other direction so

that the lead hole is not obstructed.

NOTE

When a module and/or rear-panel unit has been sent out for repair

and the module slot is likely to be empty for a while, it is a good

idea to install the blank module panels (BLM5000) to prevent

objects from falling into the console and potentially causing

damage. The BLM5000 blank module option includes blank

panels for both the top-panel and rear-panel.

Guide pins

NOTE

The input impedance will change when the transformers are

installed: electronically balanced input impedance = 3 kΩ,

transformer input impedance = 1 kΩ.

Do not clamp the transformer leads when mounting

Transformer Transformer mounting bracket

Appendix

Mono Input Module

Stereo Input Module

Pass the transformer leads through the square lead hole.

Mono Input Module

Stereo Input Module

6 The transformer leads must now be soldered to the

small circuit board included in the ITR5000 package.

One circuit board is used for each transformer on

stereo modules. The leads must be soldered to the

circuit board as shown in the illustration below.

7 Remove (unplug) the existing small circuit board

from the module, and replace it with the circuit board

now soldered to the transformer leads. Next, neatly

tie the transformer leads using the supplied cable tie,

and cut off the excess tie.

Mono input module

Stereo input module

8 Make sure the transformer leads are completely

contained within the module.

That completes transformer installation.

Be careful that the leads don’t get caught on any part of

the console when installing or later removing the

module.

Transformer

Bottom stay

Transformer Transformer

Bottom stay

Lead hole

CN201

CN202

IN5

YAMAHA

R119

R260

C183

R119

C114

C113

XK367

R106

R104

R105

Red

White

Shield

Transformer leads

Brown

Red

Replace this

circuit board

Tie the transformer

leads with the cable tie

Tie through the holes

Cut

Replace these

two circuit

boards

Tie the leads in

the same way

as shown above

Appendix

Internal Switch Settings For Each module

As you tell from the PM5000 block diagram, each module has a number of internal switch settings. These settings can be

changed to “customize” the PM5000 signal ﬂow to most ideally suit your mixing requirements.

The chart below lists the switches and their functions. In some cases two switches must be set appropriately to specify a

function. When changing internal switch settings make only the necessary changes while referring to the block diagram.

= initial factory settings.

Module Target

Switch No./

Setting

Switch No./

Setting

Selectable function Module Target

Switch No./

Setting

Switch No./Setting

MONO

Input

DIRECT

OUT

SW105 SW106

PRE n/a The direct out signal is pre-EQ (SW106 has

no effect).

POST PRE The direct out signal is post-EQ, pre-fader.

POST POST The direct out signal is post-fader, post-on

switch.

AUX PRE

FADER

SW107

PRE The pre-fader aux signal is sent to the bus

pre-EQ (PRE) or post-EQ (POST).

POST

STEREO

Input

AUX PRE

FADER

SW106

PRE The pre-fader aux signal is sent to the bus

pre-EQ (PRE) or post-EQ (POST).

POST

Ø SW

MODE

(Phase SW

Mode)

SW105

L&R Input signal phase inversion is applied to

both stereo channels (L&R) or only the left

channel (L ONLY).

L ONLY

STEREO

AUX

MASTER

Odd-

channel

ST AUX

MATRIX

SW102 SW103 Even-

channel

ST AUX

MATRIX

SW105 SW106

PRE PRE The odd-numbered channel ST AUX TO

MATRIX signal is pre-fader, pre-on switch.

PRE PRE The even-numbered channel ST AUX TO

MATRIX signal is pre-fader, pre-on switch.

POST PRE The odd-numbered channel ST AUX TO

MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch.

POST PRE The even-numbered channel ST AUX TO

MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch.

PRE POST The odd-numbered channel ST AUX TO

MATRIX signal is pre-fader, post-on switch.

PRE POST The even-numbered channel ST AUX TO

MATRIX signal is pre-fader, post-on switch.

POST POST The odd-numbered channel ST AUX TO

MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on

switch.

POST POST The even-numbered channel ST AUX TO

MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on

switch.

G/A

MASTER

Odd-

channel

G/A TO

MATRIX

SW102 SW103 SW105 SW106

PRE PRE The odd-numbered channel G/A TO

MATRIX signal is pre-fader, pre-on switch.

PRE PRE The even-numbered channel G/A TO

MATRIX signal is pre-fader, pre-on switch.

POST PRE The odd-numbered channel G/A TO

MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch.

POST PRE The even-numbered channel G/A TO

MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch.

PRE POST The odd-numbered channel G/A TO

MATRIX signal is pre-fader, post-on switch.

PRE POST The even-numbered channel G/A TO

MATRIX signal is pre-fader, post-on switch.

POST POST The odd-numbered channel G/A TO

MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on

switch.

POST POST The even-numbered channel G/A TO

MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on

switch.

Odd-

channel

G/A TO

STEREO

SW101 Even-

channel

G/A TO

STEREO

PRE The odd-numbered channel G/A TO

STEREO signal is pre-on switch (PRE) or

post-on switch (POST).

PRE The even-numbered channel G/A TO

STEREO signal is pre-on switch (PRE) or

post-on switch (POST).

POST POST

MONO

MASTER

L TO

MATRIX

SW102 SW103 R TO

MATRIX

SW105 SW106

PRE PRE The left-channel TO MATRIX signal is pre-

fader, pre-on switch.

PRE PRE The right-channel TO MATRIX signal is

pre-fader, pre-on switch.

POST PRE The left-channel TO MATRIX signal is

post-fader, pre-on switch.

POST PRE The right-channel TO MATRIX signal is

post-fader, pre-on switch.

PRE POST The left-channel TO MATRIX signal is pre-

fader, post-on switch.

PRE POST The right-channel TO MATRIX signal is

pre-fader, post-on switch.

POST POST The left-channel TO MATRIX signal is

post-fader, post-on switch.

POST POST The right-channel TO MATRIX signal is

post-fader, post-on switch.

Appendix

Internal Switch Locations On Each module

Mono Input Module

Stereo Input Module

PRE

PRE PRE

POST

SW107

SW106

SW105

AUX PRE

POST/PRE EQ

DIRECT OUT

PRE FADER /

POST FADER,

POST ON SW

DIRECT OUT

PRE EQ / POST EQ

J18

Remove these screws and the

bracket. Replace after making

the required switch settings.

L&R L-ONLY

Ø SW MODE

SW105

PREPOST

SW106

Remove these screws and

the bracket. Replace after

making the required switch

settings.

Appendix

Stereo/Aux Master Module

G/A Master Module

STAUX.GA (ODD) STAUX.GA (EVEN)

FADER

ON SW

MATRIX

PRE POST

FADER

ON SW

Printing

Switches

SW106SW105SW103SW102

GA (ODD)

STAUX.GA (ODD) STAUX.GA (EVEN)

TO ST

MATRIX

GA (EVEN)

ON SW

POST PRE

FADER

PRE POST

ON SW

PRE POST

FADER

PRE POST

ON SW

POST PRE

SW101

SW102 SW103

SW101 SW104

SW102 SW103 SW105 SW106

SW104

SW105 SW106

Printing

Switches

Appendix

Stereo/Mono Master Module

FADER

ON SW

MONO

MASTER

TO MATRIX

PRE POST

FADER

ON SW

SW102 SW103 SW105 SW106

Printing

Switches

Appendix

Connector Pin Assignments

The connector diagrams refer to the console connectors.

Cascade Connector

These are the cascade connector pin assignments for the

PM5000 as well as the PM4000/3500 series consoles

that can be cascade-connected to the PM5000.

PM5000

CASCADE TYPE B Pin Assignments

(D-sub 25-pin Connector)

PM4000/4000M

VCA/MUTE CONTROL Pin Assignments

*= SOLO EXT on the PM4000, NC on the PM4000M

• Compatible plug: JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited)

#SRCN6A25-24P

PM3500/3500M

Rear Panel

VCA1~8

(D-sub 9-pin Connector)

CUE/SOLO Jack

GPI Connector

(D-sub 25-pin Connector)

Pin # Function Pin # Function

1 VCA EXT 1 14 VCA EXT 2

2 VCA EXT 3 15 VCA EXT 4

3 VCA EXT 5 16 VCA EXT 6

4 VCA EXT 7 17 VCA EXT 8

5 GND 18 MUTE EXT 1

6 MUTE EXT 2 19 MUTE EXT 3

7 MUTE EXT 4 20 MUTE EXT 5

8 MUTE EXT 6 21 MUTE EXT 7

9 MUTE EXT 8 22 GND

10 INPUT CUE EXT 23 SOLO EXT

11 GND 24 NC

12 NC 25 NC

13 NC

Pin # Function Pin # Function

1 VCA EXT 1 13 MUTE EXT 3

2 VCA EXT 2 14 MUTE EXT 4

3 VCA EXT 3 15 MUTE EXT 5

4 VCA EXT 4 16 MUTE EXT 6

5 VCA EXT 5 17 MUTE EXT 7

6 VCA EXT 6 18 MUTE EXT 8

7 VCA EXT 7 19 GND

8 VCA EXT 8 20 GND

9 GND 21 GND

10 NC 22 INPUT CUE EXT

11 MUTE EXT 1 23 SOLO EXT / NC (*)

12 MUTE EXT 2 24 NC

13 12 11 10 987654321

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

4321

15 14 13 12 11 10

20 19

18 17

24 23 22 21

Pin # Function

1 VCA EXT 1

2 VCA EXT 2

3 VCA EXT 3

4 VCA EXT 4

5 VCA EXT 5

6 VCA EXT 6

7 VCA EXT 7

8 VCA EXT 8

9 GND

TipINPUT CUE EXT

Ring SOLO EXT

Shield GND

Pin # Function Pin # Function

1 GPO 1 14 GPO 2

2 GPO 3 15 GPO 4

3 GPO 5 16 GPO 6

4 GPO 7 17 GPO 8

5 GND 18 GND

6 GND 19 GND

7 GND 20 GND

8 GND 21 NC

9NC 22INC

10 DEC 23 GND

11 GND 24 TB REMOTE

12 NC 25 TB REMOTE GND

13 NC

OUT

THRU

MIDI

MASTER

SLAVE

VCA CTRL

CUE CTRL

VCA 1-8

CUE SOLO

PM 3000

PM 3500

PM 4000

12345

6789

13 12 11 10 987654321

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

Appendix

PM5000 Self-diagnostic Function

The PM5000 automatically performs a battery of

internal tests when the power is turned on. If no

problems are encountered the scene number will appear

on the display and normal operation will be possible.

If a system or other internal error is found console

operation will be suspended and/or an error message will

appear on the display.

If an error message appears, refer to the Error Messages

on page 94.

Initializing the Internal Memory

If an error occurs during the self-diagnostic memory

check (above), normal operation can sometimes be

restored by initializing the internal memory (initial

factory setup).

The memory initialization procedure described below

can also be used to return the memory to a blank state

prior to re-programming for the next show or tour.

1 Turn the console power ON while holding the

[STORE] key to start the initialization procedure.

2 Press the alpha-numeric keypad [1] key to initialize

the memory.

Press the [3] key to abort the initialization operation.

3 Normal operation resumes once the memory has

been initialized.

NOTE

The scene memory, setup memory, and MIDI program change

table are all initialized by this operation. If you want to keep any

of the data be sure to save it to an external memory card before

initializing the memory.

INIT

SURE?Y:1 N:3

Executing

INIT. CANCEL

Appendix

Error Messages

Any of the following messages appearing on the 4-character message display indicate that an error has occurred. Refer to

the information listed below in combination with the “Troubleshooting” section on next page.

Error Message Meaning Action

Startup Error

[H.ER] Fatal hardware error.

The system cannot be started. Contact your Yamaha dealer or service

center.

[S.ER] Internal data error.

There is a problem with the internal data, but the system can be

started by pressing the [ENTER] key. Save all (ALL) data to a

memory card and contact your Yamaha dealer or service center.

[LoBT] Low backup battery.

If the battery voltage drops any further all data saved in the internal

memory will be lost. Contact your Yamaha dealer or service center as

soon as possible.

Error During

Normal

Operation

[CmER] Internal communication error. Contact your Yamaha dealer or service center.

[RxER]

MIDI transmit/receive error.

Make sure that all external MIDI equipment is properly connected.

This error can also be caused by attempting to send a large amount of

data to the PM5000 at once.

[BfER]

[CsER] Cascade connection error.

Check that both of the cascaded consoles are connected properly, that

the correct cascade cable is being used, and that the [MASTER/

SLAVE] switch settings have been made properly.

[CfER] Memory card access error.

Check that the memory card has been properly inserted into the

console’s card slot, that the card has sufﬁcient remaining capacity,

and that it is properly formatted.

Operation

Error

[PROT]

You attempted to store to a protected

scene.

Use the utility mode to turn memory protection off. If the entire

memory is protected use the MEMORY PROTECT function. If a

speciﬁc scene memory is protected use the SCENE EDIT function

(page 62).

[NoDT]

You attempted to recall a NO DATA

scene.

If the left dot on the scene display is lit, that scene is empty and

cannot be recalled. Make sure scene data is stored in the scene

number to be recalled.

[FULL]

You attempted to insert a scene when

scene number 999 exists.

Move or delete the data in scene number 999.

[SPC!]

There is a space in the name of the ﬁle you

attempted to save.

Save the ﬁle after deleting the space.

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Symptom Possible Cause & Solution

Power won’t turn on.

Panel displays and illumination won’t light.

• Is the dedicated PW5000 properly connected via the supplied power cable?

• Is the PW5000 [POWER ON/OFF] switch in the ON position?

• Is the [PANEL LED DIMMER] control on the meter bridge turned all the way down?

• If all of the above check out OK and the power still won’t turn on, contact your

Yamaha dealer or service center.

A cascade-connected slave PM5000 or PM4000/3500

doesn’t respond.

•Are you connected to the right connector? The TYPE A connector is for connection

between two PM5000 consoles, while the TYPE B connector is for connection to a

PM4000/3500 console.

• If you’re using the TYPE A connector is the [MASTER/SLAVE] switch set properly

(page 74)?

• If you’re using the TYPE B connector is the PM4000/3500 set to SLAVE mode?

(Refer to the PM4000/3500 manual).

•Are both the TYPE A and TYPE B connectors connected? If both are connected the

TYPE A connector will take priority.

An external device connected to the GPI connector

doesn’t respond.

•Are the GPI OUT scene link and fader start functions accessible via the utility mode

set appropriately (page 72)?

•Have you selected the same port number for scene link and fader start control (page

73)?

The PM5000 doesn’t response to control from an

external GPI device.

• If you intend to use the scene increment/decrement function, is SCENE INC/DEC

turned ON (page 72)? Also are scenes actually stored in scene numbers 010 ~ 999?

No sound input. • Is the input channel [ON] switch engaged?

• Is the input channel fader set to an appropriate level?

•Have you engaged the [CUE] switch of a channel that is receiving no input while the

SOLO mode is engaged?

• Is the VCA fader assigned to the input channel set to an appropriate level? Is a [VCA

MUTE] or [MUTE MASTER] switch assigned to the channel engaged?

No sound output. •Are the appropriate master module [ON] switches engaged?

• Is the [LCR] switch engaged and the [CSR] control turned all the way to the right

(CSR) (page 19)?

No sound from the headphone or monitor outputs. • Is the “MUTE” monitor mode selected (page 67)? In this case monitor output will be

muted when the CEU/SOLO function is OFF.

Sound from the headphone and monitor outputs is

delayed.

•Has a monitor delay been programmed (page 68)?

Only certain channels can be heard via the headphone

and monitor outputs.

• Is a [CUE] switch engaged?

Sound level is too low. •Are the [PAD] switch and [GAIN] controls in the head ampliﬁer blocks set

appropriately?

•Are the input channel faders set to appropriate levels?

•Are the master module faders set to appropriate levels?

•Are VCA faders assigned to the channels set to appropriate levels?

Distorted sound. •Are the [PAD] switch and [GAIN] controls in the head ampliﬁer blocks set

appropriately?

•Are the input channel faders set too high?

•Are the master module faders set too high?

•Are one or more EQ gain controls set too high?

The sound does not change when console settings are

changed.

• Is the [PREVIEW] switch engaged (page 55)?

• Is the LOCK mode engaged (page 61)?

• Is the cascade [MASTER/SLAVE] switch set to the SLAVE position?

Can’t store a scene. •Are you attempting to save to a read-only scene number (000~009)?

• Is the memory protect function turned ON (page 62)?

•Has the scene been protection via the SCENE EDIT settings (page 62)?

• Is console automation turned OFF (page 70)?

Can’t recall a scene. •Are any [RECALL SAFE] or [FADER SAFE] switches engaged?

• Is console automation turned OFF (page 70)?

Can’t save data to a memory card. •Has the memory card been properly formatted to DOS format (page 59)?

•Does the memory card have enough remaining capacity to store the data?

Can’t load data from a memory card. •Has the memory card been properly formatted to DOS format (page 59)?

• Is the ﬁle to be loaded in CSV format?

•Have more than 128 ﬁles been saved to the memory card? The PM5000 will

recognize up to 128 ﬁles on one memory card. Files exceeding this number cannot be

display by the PM5000.

Some channels are always active even when the SOLO

mode is engaged.

• Is INPUT SOLO SAFE engaged for those channels (page 67)?

It takes a while for the faders to stop moving when a

scene is recalled.

•Has a fade time been speciﬁed (page 52)?

Appendix

Speciﬁcations

1. General Speciﬁcations

0dBu is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.

Total Harmonic Distortion

(Master Output)

Less than 0.1%

(THD+N)

20Hz-20kHz @ +14dBu 600Ω

(Input Gain Control at Maximum)

Frequency Response

(Master Output)

0+1,-3dB 20Hz-20kHz @ +4dBu 600Ω

(Input Gain Control at Maximum)

Hum & Noise (20Hz-20kHz) *1 -128dBu Equivalent Input Noise.

Rs=150Ω -100dBu Residual Output Noise.

Input Gain=Maximum -92dBu (96dB S/N) STEREO AUX Master fader at nominal level and all assign SW's off.

Input Pad =OFF -87dBu (91dB S/N) GROUP/AUX Master fader at nominal level and all assign SW's off.

Input sensitivity=-60dBu -92dBu (96dB S/N) STEREO, MONO (C) Master fader at nominal level and all assign SW's off.

-64dBu (68dB S/N)

STEREO AUX, GROUP/AUX, STEREO, MONO (C) Master fader and one input fader at nominal level.

-89dBu(93dB S/N) MATRIX Master at nominal level and all Matrix mix controls at minimum level.

Maximum Voltage Gain *2 64dB MONO IN to MONO IN INSERT OUT,DIRECT OUT (pre fader)

80dB MONO IN to STEREO AUX OUT (PRE),GROUP/AUX OUT (AUX mode & PRE)

90dB MONO IN to STEREO AUX OUT (POST),GROUP/AUX OUT (AUX mode & POST)

84dB MONO IN to GROUP/AUX OUT (GROUP mode), STEREO OUT(INPUT to ST),

MONO (C) OUT (INPUT to MONO)

90dB MONO IN to MATRIX OUT (GROUP/AUX MASTER GROUP mode to MATRIX)

64dB ST IN to ST INSERT OUT

80dB ST IN to STEREO AUX OUT (PRE)

90dB ST IN to STEREO AUX OUT (POST)

84dB ST IN to GROUP/AUX OUT (GROUP mode), STEREO OUT (INPUT to ST)

81dB ST IN to MONO (C) OUT (INPUT to MONO)

77dB ST IN to GROUP/AUX OUT (AUX mode & PRE)

87dB ST IN to GROUP/AUX OUT (AUX mode & POST)

10dB SUB IN to Master OUT

6dB 2TR IN to MONITOR OUT

Crosstalk -80dB @ 1kHz, -70dB @ 10kHz Adjacent inputs.

-80dB @ 1kHz, -70dB @ 10kHz input to output.(except between L and R)

MONO & ST INPUT PAD 26dB

MONO & ST INPUT GAIN 50dB Variable

INPUT High Pass Filter 12dB/octave roll off below 20-400Hz at -3dB points.

INPUT Equalization *3 +15, -15dB maximum

HIGH 1k-20kHz (peaking/shelving, Q=0.5-3)

HI-MID 0.4k-8kHz (peaking, Q=0.5-3)

LO-MID 80-1.6kHz (peaking, Q=0.5-3)

LOW 30-600Hz (peaking/shelving, Q=0.5-3)

Sweep sine wave oscillator/Pink noise with burst 4 mode selectable (100Hz/1kHz/10kHz/PINK)

Selectable FIX or SWEEP for 100Hz/1kHz/10kHz by SWEEP/BURST ON/OFF switch, sweep

range: x0.2-x2, Less than 1% T.H.D. @ +4dBu

Selectable continue or BURST for PINK noise by SWEEP/BURST ON/OFF switch.

PINK NOISE: ﬁxed 200msec, INTERVAL: variable 1sec-20sec

Phantom Power +48VDC is applied to balanced inputs for powering condenser microphones via 6.8kΩ current-

limiting/isolation resistors.

Input LED Meter 9-points (PEAK/+12/+6/+3/0/-3/-6/-12/-25dB) LED level meter built into each MONO-IN and ST-

IN module.

PEAK LED (red) turns on when pre-EQ level or post-EQ level or pre-Fader level reaches 3dB below

clipping.

+12/+6/+3/0 LED (yellow) turns on when pre-Fader level reaches +12/+6/+3/0dB.

-3/-6/-12/-25 LED (green) turns on when pre-Fader level reaches -3/-6/-12/-25dB.

Output LED Meter 20-points (PEAK, +15, <3dB step>, -39dB) LED level meter.

STEREO AUX 1 (L, R)-12 (L, R), STEREO MATRIX 1 (L, R)-4 (L, R)

(STEREO AUX/STEREO MATRIX selectable)

GROUP/AUX 1-8, MATRIX 1-8 (GROUP/AUX, MATRIX selectable)

STEREO (L, R), MONO (C)

CUE (L, R, C), TB/OSC (CUE C, TB/OSC automatic select)

PEAK LED (red) turns on when pre-LineAmp level reaches 3dB below clipping.

+15/··/0 LED (yellow) turns on when pre-LineAmp level reaches +15/<3dB step>/0dB.

-3/··/-39 LED (green) turns on when pre-LineAmp level reaches -3/<3dB step>/-39dB.

Appendix

*1 Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @ 12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Temperature condition @+10 - +25°C

*2 PAN/BAL: the left or the right turning around.

*3 Turn over /roll-off frequency of shelving: 3dB below maximum variable level.

2. Inputs/Outputs

2.1 Input Characteristics

*1 24ch, 32ch, 48ch

*2 All XLR connectors are balanced, Phone Jacks are balanced (T=+, R=-, S=GND).

*3 0dBu is referenced to 0.775Vrms.

*4 Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4dBu (1.23V), or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum level.

*5 Only 28ch version does not have STEREO AUX SUB IN and GROUP/AUX SUB IN.

Dimensions Width 28ch 1432 mm

36ch 1671 mm

52ch 2148 mm

Depth 1113 mm

Height 349 mm

Weight 28ch 153 kg

36ch 179 kg

52ch 228 kg

Connection PAD Gain Trim

Actual

Load

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Input Level *3

Connector In

Mixer *2

Sensitivity *4 Nominal Max. before Clip

MONO IN

1-n ch *1

ST IN 1-4ch

-60

3kΩ

50-600Ω Mics

600Ω Lines

-80dBu (0.078mV) -60dBu (0.775mV)

-40dBu (7.75mV)

XLR-3-31type

26 -54dBu (1.55mV) -34dBu (15.5mV) -14dBu (155mV)

-10

-30dBu (24.5mV) -10dBu (245mV) +10dBu (2.45V)

26 -4dBu (0.489V) +16dBu (4.89V) +30dBu (24.5V)

STEREO AUX SUB IN (1-12) [L, R] *5

GROUP/AUX SUB IN (1-8) *5

STEREO SUB IN [L, R]

MONO(C) SUB IN

MONITOR SUB IN [L, R, C]

MATRIX SUB IN [L, R]

10kΩ 600Ω Lines -6dBu (388mV) + 4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) XLR-3-31type

TALKBACK IN 3kΩ 50-600Ω Mics -66dBu (0.39mV) -50dBu (2.45mV) -30dBu (24.5mV) XLR-3-31type

MONO IN INSERT IN 1-n ch *1

ST IN INSERT IN 1-4ch

10kΩ 600Ω Lines

-16dBu (123mV)

+4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V)

Phones Jack

(TRS)

STEREO AUX INSERT IN (1-12) [L, R]

GROUP/AUX INSERT IN (1-8)

STEREO INSERT IN [L, R]

MONO (C) INSERT IN

STEREO MATRIX INSERT IN (1-4) [L, R]

MATRIX INSERT IN (1-8)

-6dBu (388mV)

2TR IN 1, 2 (L, R) 10kΩ 600Ω Lines -2dBu (616mV) +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) XLR-3-31type

Appendix

2.2 Output Characteristics

*1 24ch, 32ch, 48ch

*2 All XLR connectors are balanced, Phone Jacks (TRS) are balanced (T=+, R=-, S=GND). Phone Jacks (STEREO) are unbalanced.

*3 0dBu is referenced to 0.775Vrms.

2.3 Others

3. Others

3.1 Included Accessories

Power Supply Connection Cable (3.6m)

Gooseneck Lamps (4 for the PM5000-52C, 3 for the PM5000-36 and PM5000-28)

Console Cover

Owner's Manual

3.2 Optional Accessories

Option Modules

Input Transformer ITR5000

Power Supply Link Cable PSL5000

European models

Purchaser/User Information speciﬁed in EN55103-1 and

EN55103-2.

Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for

information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to

change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior

notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the

same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Connection

Actual Source

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Output Level *3

Connector In Mixer *2

Nominal Max. before Clip

STEREO AUX OUT (1-12) [L, R]

GROUP/AUX OUT (1-8)

STEREO OUT [L, R]

MONO(C) OUT

STEREO MATRIX OUT (1-4) [L, R]

MATRIX OUT (1-8)

MONITOR OUT (A,B) [L, R]

TB/OSC OUT

150Ω 600Ω Lines +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) XLR-3-32 type

MONO IN DIRECT OUT 1-n ch *1 150Ω 600Ω Lines +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) Phone Jack (TRS)

MONO IN INSERT OUT 1-n ch *1

ST IN INSERT OUT 1-4ch

150Ω 10kΩ Lines +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) Phone Jack (TRS)

STEREO AUX INSERT OUT (1-10) [L, R]

GROUP/AUX INSERT OUT (1-12)

STEREO INSERT OUT [L, R]

MONO(C) INSERT OUT

STEREO MATRIX INSERT OUT (1-4) [L, R]

MATRIX INSERT OUT (1-8)

PHONES OUT x3 10Ω

8Ω Phones 100mW 150mW

Phones Jack (STEREO)

40Ω Phones 75mW 150mW

CASCADE TYPE A / PC (for PM5000 or PC) Dsub-9P (male) RS232C/RS422 digital

CASCADE TYPE B (for PM4000/PM3500 series)

VCA GROUP 1-8,

MUTE GROUP 1-8,

CUE SOLO

Dsub-25P (female) - analog

GPI (General Purpose Interface) Dsub-25P (female) - digital

MIDI

OUT

THRU

DIN 5P (female) - digital

DC POWER IN +16V, -16V, +12V, +48V -

Appendix

MIDI Data Format

1. TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA

1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE

1.1.1 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) BANK SELECT

In SINGLE mode when BANK is ON, this message can be

received if the Rx CH matches. This will specify the bank for a

subsequently received program change.

In SINGLE mode when BANK is ON and you recall a scene

memory, a bank select message will be transmitted on the

speciﬁed Tx CH.

1.1.2 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) ASSIGN

If CONTROL CHANGE is ON and this message is received,

the parameter that is assigned to the MIDI channel will be

changed.

If CONTROL CHANGE is ON and an assigned parameter has

been modiﬁed, this message will be transmitted from the

selected MIDI channel.

The values of channel or VCA faders are transmitted in 14-bit

form using MSB and LSB bytes.

In the ON switch, 00H through 3fH is assigned to OFF and

40H through 7fH is assigned to ON.

1.1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) NRPN

If NRPN is ON and the Rx CH matches, this message will be

received. This message will change the parameter

corresponding to the received NRPN number. The CONTROL

CHANGE ASSIGN numbers are the same as the LSB of the

NRPN numbers.

If NRPN is ON and an assigned parameter is modiﬁed, this

message will be transmitted on the Tx CH.

If both CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN are simultaneously

ON, an assigned parameter will be transmitted as a control

change assign message.

60 h (INC) and 61 h (DEC) are not supported.

1.1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

In the SINGLE mode this message can be received if Program

Change Rx is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. If OMNI is ON,

however, this message will be received regardless of the

channel. A scene memory will be recalled according to the

settings of the Program Change Table.

In the case of the MULTI mode, if Program Change Rx is ON

this message will be received on all MIDI channels, and will be

divided into banks according to the channel.

If Program Change ECHO is ON, this message will be echoed.

In the case of the SINGLE mode, if Program Change Tx is ON

this message will be transmitted on the Tx CH channel when a

scene is recalled. This will be transmitted according to the

settings of the Program Change Table.

In the case of the MULTI mode, this will be transmitted on the

MIDI channel according to the bank. If the recalled memory

number is assigned to more than one program number, the

program number for the lowest-numbered channel of the

lowest-numbered bank will be transmitted.

1.2 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)

Once this message has been received, and there is an interval of

300 ms during which nothing is received, Running Status will

be cleared, and MIDI communication will be initialized.

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change

00000000 00 Bank Select MSB

0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value

00100000 20 Bank Select LSB

0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change

0ccccccc cc Control No.(1-5,

7-31,33-37,39-95,

102-104)

0vvvvvvv vv Value

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change

01100010 62 NRPN LSB

0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value

01100011 63 NRPN MSB

0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value

00000110 06 DATA ENTRY MSB

0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value

00110110 26 DATA ENTRY LSB

0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Program No.(0-127)

STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing

100

Appendix

2. TRANSMISSION CONDITION

3. RECEIVE CONDITION

MIDI Tx CH?

CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT $BnH

CONTROL CHANGE

$BnH

CONTROL CHANGE

NRPN $BnH

MIDI IN

BANK ON

NRPN ON

ASSIGN ON

ECHO ON

MIDI OUT

PROGRAM CHANGE

$CnH

PGM ON

MIDI Tx CH?

MULTI ON

MIDI Rx CH?

CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT $BnH

CONTROL CHANGE

$BnH

CONTROL CHANGE

NRPN $BnH

MIDI IN

BANK ON

NRPN ON

ASSIGN ON

ECHO ON

MIDI OUT

PROGRAM CHANGE

$CnH

PGM ON

MIDI Rx CH?

or OMNI ON

or MULTI ON

Appendix

101

TransmitFunction Receive Remarks

Basic Channel

Note Number

Velocity

After Touch

Pitch Bend

Control Change

Program Change

System Exclusive

System

Common

System 

Real Time

Aux 

Messages

Notes

Mode

Default

Changed

Note ON

Note OFF

Key’s

Ch’s

Clock

Commands

Local ON/OFF

All Notes OFF

Active Sense

Reset

Song Position

Song Select

Tune



True#

Default

Messages

Altered

0, 32

1-5, 7-31, 33-37

39-95, 102-104

98, 99



6, 38



True Voice

1-16



1-16

X

O



O



0-127

*******************

X

*1 See Control Change parameter assign chart.

X

*******************

X

*******************

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

1-16

1-16

Memorized

X

O



O



0-127

0-999

Assignable

X

O

OMNI off / OMNI on

X

Memorized

X

Bank Select



*1



NRPN (Non-Registered 

Parameter Number)

Data Entry (for NRPN)

O : YES

X : NO

Date: May, 01, 2003

Version: 1.00

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA [Mixing Console] / Model: PM5000

102

Index

Symbols

[+48V] Switch ...................................................................... 15

+48V Master Switch

............................................................. 13

∑·PEAK Indicators

............................................................... 29

[ø] (Phase) Switch

................................................................ 16

AFL ...................................................................................... 42

[ALPHABET] Switch

.......................................................... 50

Alpha-numeric Keypad

........................................................ 50

[ASSIGN MODE] Switches

................................................. 50

Assigning VCA and Mute Groups

....................................... 21

Automation

........................................................................... 70

backup battery ...................................................................... 58

[BAL] Control

...................................................................... 18

bank select

............................................................................ 78

Battery Check

....................................................................... 58

blocks

.................................................................................... 10

burst

...................................................................................... 39

Bus Mode

............................................................................. 63

Cascade .................................................................... 14, 74, 76

Cascade Connector

............................................................... 92

CC#

....................................................................................... 79

Channel Fader

....................................................................... 20

Channel Fader Block

............................................................ 20

Channel Grouping

................................................................ 21

Channel [ON] Switch

........................................................... 19

[CLEAR/EXIT] Keys

........................................................... 50

Common Operations

............................................................. 57

CompactFlash Memory

........................................................ 59

Connector Pin Assignments

................................................. 92

Control Change

...............................................................77, 79

Cue

........................................................................................ 44

Cue Signal

............................................................................ 41

Cue Stack Function

.............................................................. 43

cue/solo function

.................................................................. 44

[CUE] Switch

.................................................................20, 29

current scene

......................................................................... 72

Data Delete ........................................................................... 61

Data Load

............................................................................. 60

Data Save

.............................................................................. 60

Date/Time

............................................................................. 59

[DEC] Key

............................................................................ 50

Digital Control Section

...................................................12, 49

Direct Recall

......................................................................... 71

[ENTER] Key ....................................................................... 50

EQ Block

.............................................................................. 16

EQ Controls

.......................................................................... 16

[EQ] Switch

.......................................................................... 16

Error Messages

..................................................................... 94

Expansion: Connecting to External Equipment

................... 14

External Expansion Connectors

........................................... 13

Fade Time .............................................................................52

Fader Mode

...........................................................................70

[FADER SAFE] Switch

........................................................ 20

Fader Start

............................................................................. 73

Fan Switch

............................................................................13

Fan Vents

..............................................................................13

Format

...................................................................................60

G/A (Group/Aux) Master Module ........................................31

G/A (Group/Aux) Master Out

...............................................13

G/A (Group/Aux) Send 1~8 Block

.......................................18

G/A Bus Assign Safe

............................................................65

G/A Bus Mode

............................................................... 33, 63

G/A Bus Mode Indicators

.....................................................31

[GAIN] Control

.....................................................................16

gooseneck lamps

...................................................................48

GPI

...........................................................................14, 72, 92

GPI Out

.................................................................................72

Group Assign Safe

................................................................65

Group/Aux Switching

...........................................................32

Grouping

...............................................................................21

Head Amp Block ...................................................................15

HPF Block

.............................................................................16

[HPF] Switch and Control

....................................................16

[INC] Key .............................................................................50

Initializing the Internal Memory

...........................................93

Input Channel Section

.................................................... 11, 15

Input Solo Safe

......................................................................67

Insert Block

........................................................................... 17

Insert Inputs

..........................................................................13

Insert Outputs

........................................................................13

Insert [ON] Switch

................................................................17

[INSERT] Switch

..................................................................29

Internal Switch Settings For Each module

............................88

[L+R] Switch ................................................................. 16, 30

Lamp Connectors

..................................................................13

LAST CUE mode

..................................................................43

LCR vs. Stereo + Mono Operation

.......................................19

Level Meter

...........................................................................19

Lock Mode

............................................................................61

Main Out Block .....................................................................18

Main Out Switches

................................................................19

Master Cue AFL Position

.....................................................69

Master Fader

.........................................................................29

Master Out Section

........................................................ 11, 26

Master Solo Select

................................................................46

Master [ON] Switch

..............................................................29

Matrix Master Out Section

....................................................37

Matrix Out

.............................................................................13

Matrix Send and Master Out Section

............................. 11, 35

Matrix Send Section

..............................................................35

Memory Card Slot

.................................................................12

Memory Protect

....................................................................62

Message Display

...................................................................50

Meter Bridge

.................................................................. 12, 47

103

Index

MIDI ...............................................................................14, 77

MIDI channel

....................................................................... 78

MIDI Control Change

.......................................................... 81

MIDI Echo Back

............................................................77, 82

MIDI Program Change

......................................................... 80

MIDI Program Change Table

............................................... 83

MIDI Setting

......................................................................... 81

MIX CUE mode

................................................................... 43

Module Removal and Replacement

..................................... 84

modules

................................................................................ 10

Monitor Control Section

.................................................11, 40

Monitor Delay

...................................................................... 68

MONITOR DELAY Indicator

............................................. 50

Monitor Mode

....................................................................... 67

Monitor Out

.......................................................................... 13

Monitor Outputs

................................................................... 41

Monitor Source

..................................................................... 40

Mono Input Module

.............................................................. 15

Mono Inputs

......................................................................... 13

Mono Output

........................................................................ 13

motor faders

.......................................................................... 70

MULTI

................................................................................. 78

Mute Group

.......................................................................... 23

MUTE Indicators 1~8

.......................................................... 20

Mute Master

......................................................................... 71

Mute Master Section

............................................................ 12

[Mute Master] Switches

....................................................... 25

NoDT .................................................................................... 53

NRPN

................................................................................... 80

OMNI mode ......................................................................... 78

Oscillator and Talkback Section

.....................................11, 38

Oscillator/Talkback Signal Output

....................................... 39

[PAD] Switch ....................................................................... 15

[PAN] Control

...................................................................... 31

[PAN]/[CSR] Control

........................................................... 18

Panel Layout

......................................................................... 10

Parameter Display

................................................................ 50

PFL

....................................................................................... 42

pink noise

.......................................................................38, 39

Power Supply Connector

...................................................... 13

preset data

............................................................................. 51

[PRE] Switch

..................................................................17, 18

Preview Function

.................................................................. 55

[PREVIEW] Switch

............................................................. 50

Program Change

................................................................... 78

program change table

........................................................... 78

Rear Panel ............................................................................. 12

Recall Safe

............................................................................ 66

Recall Safe Select

................................................................. 66

[RECALL SAFE] Switch

...............................................20, 29

Recall Undo

.......................................................................... 54

[RECALL UNDO] Switch

................................................... 50

[RECALL] Switch

................................................................ 50

RX CH

............................................................................78, 81

Safety and Protection ............................................................65

Scene Display

........................................................................50

Scene Edit

.............................................................................62

Scene Inc/Dec (GPI In)

.........................................................72

SCENE LINK

.......................................................................72

Scene Linking

.......................................................................73

Scene Memory

......................................................................51

Scene Recall

................................................................... 53, 69

Scene Store

............................................................................53

Send Level and Balance Controls

.........................................17

Send Level and Pan Controls

................................................17

Send Level Controls

..............................................................18

Signal Routing

......................................................................27

SINGLE

................................................................................78

Solo

.......................................................................................44

Solo Enable

...........................................................................66

Solo Mode

.............................................................................44

solo safe

......................................................................... 65, 67

Stereo and Mono Master Modules

........................................34

Stereo Aux Master Module

...................................................30

Stereo Aux Master Out

.........................................................13

Stereo Aux Send 1~12 Block

................................................17

Stereo Input Module

.............................................................15

Stereo Inputs

.........................................................................13

Stereo Matrix Mode

..............................................................64

Stereo Output

........................................................................13

[STORE] Switch

...................................................................50

Sub Inputs

.............................................................................13

[SUM GAIN] Control

...........................................................29

[SUM GAIN] Indicator

.........................................................29

talkback mic ..........................................................................38

Talkback/Oscillator Out

........................................................13

[TB/OSC] Switch

..................................................................29

temporary scene

....................................................................69

Theater Mode

........................................................................69

Title Edit

...............................................................................54

[TITLE] Switch

.....................................................................50

[TO MATRIX] Switch

..........................................................29

[TO MONO] Switch

.............................................................31

[TO ST] Switch

.....................................................................31

Top Panel

..............................................................................10

TX CH

............................................................................ 78, 81

Type A

..................................................................................14

Type B

............................................................................ 14, 92

User Table ............................................................................. 83

Utility Function

.....................................................................56

[UTILITY] Switch

................................................................50

VCA Group ...........................................................................22

VCA Grouping

......................................................................21

VCA Indicators 1~12

............................................................20

VCA Master and Master Mute Switch Group Control

.........24

VCA Master Section

.............................................................11

VCA Section

.........................................................................24

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400

Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil

Tel: 011-3085-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Central Europe,

Branch Nederland

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Belgium

Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,

Belgium

Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Combo Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0660

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2441

PA10

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WA 22580 403MWAP1.2-03C0 Printed in Japan

Documenttranscriptie

Owner's Manual E Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The above warning is located on the rear of the unit. The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 Read these instructions. 2 Keep these instructions. 3 Heed all warnings. 4 Follow all instructions. 5 Do not use this apparatus near water. 6 Clean only with dry cloth. 7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the PW5000. • Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Use only the specified power supply PW5000. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If this device or the power supply should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • When transporting or moving the device, always use six or more people. • When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Always remove the memory card before moving the console. Accidental impact or shock during transport can damage the memory card and/or the card reader unit. • Turn the unit ON or OFF using only the POWER switch on the power supply PW5000. Turning the unit ON or OFF by plugging or unplugging the power cord, using a switch on a power tap, a breaker switch, or similar external means can result in damage. • Do not turn the PW5000 POWER switch OFF and ON in rapid succession. Doing so can result in excessive current flow that can cause damage. Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the POWER switch ON after it has been turned OFF. • Before moving the device, remove all connected cables. • Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum. Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause feedback and may damage the speakers. • Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top/front/ rear to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high. In particular, do not place the device on its side or upside down, or place it in any poorly-ventilated location, such as a bookcase or closet. • Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the device, TV, or radio may generate noise. (5)-1 1/3 Connections Backup battery • Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to minimum. • This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, the internal data is retained. However, if the backup battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. When the backup battery is running low, the display indicates “LoBT(Low Battery).” In this case, immediately save the data to a Memory Card (CompactFlash), then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery. Handling caution • Do not insert your fingers or hand in any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.). • Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not use the device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-). Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the device is not in use. The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, connectors, and fans, deteriorates over time. Consult qualifi ed Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components. (5)-1 2/3 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) ADVARSEL! NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. • Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up. • This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (lithium caution) • Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel. 030-2828425 • For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel : 030-2828425 • Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA. • Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical waste. (lithium disposal) (5)-1 3/3 Foreword Foreword Thank you for choosing a Yamaha PM5000 Mixing Console. The PM5000 is the proud successor to the highly acclaimed Yamaha PM4000, which became the deﬁnitive sound reinforcement console of the preceding decade in terms of both performance and features. The PM5000 carries on the PM-series pedigree with unprecedented sound and operability, while inheriting new digital control features from Yamaha’s top-line PM1D digital console. In an era in which digital consoles are becoming the mainstream, the PM5000 represents the peak of reﬁnement in analog sound technology, with the added beneﬁts of digital control. Please read this manual carefully before use to ensure that you beneﬁt from the maximum performance and control capabilities that your PM5000 can deliver. Also keep the manual safe but handy so you can refer to later. Copying of the commercially available music data and/or digital audio ﬁles is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. * The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your device. * The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. * CompactFlash is a registered trademark of SanDisk Corporation. 6 About This Manual About This Manual General Approach Most of this manual is devoted to describing the features and functions of the various PM5000 modules. Since the operational design of the PM5000 is based on familiar analog console principles, anyone who is familiar with the PM4000 or similar consoles should be able to begin operating the PM5000 without hesitation. New features and multi-module control operations will be described in column form. The names of physical controls such as buttons and knobs will be shown in square brackets. The manual is organized as follows: ■ PM5000 Overview (page 10) The names and functions of the various sections of the console are broadly described in the context of the console as a whole. Please read this section before continuing on to the details. This section explains the console’s overall internal signal ﬂow and how it relates to external equipment. ■ The Sections and Modules (page 15) Following the signal ﬂow from input to output, the individual features and functions of each section and module are described individually. ■ Scene Memory Functions (page 51) Operation of the PM5000 scene memory functions, including storage of panel settings and motor fader operations, is described here. ■ Utility Functions (page 56) This section describes operation of the utility functions relating to overall system setup and communication with external equipment. ■ Appendix (page 84) Options, plugs and connectors, and other information for general operation and maintenance. References, hints, and additional information will be provided throughout the text where appropriate. The PM5000 Models The PM5000 series includes three basic models, as described below: ■ PM5000-52C (52 input channels/center master) ■ PM5000-36 (36 input channels/right master) ■ PM5000-28 (28 input channels/right master) For each model the number following “PM5000” refers to the total number of mono and stereo input channels. The only actual difference between models is the number of mono input modules. All other modules and conﬁguration are the same. This manual applies to all three models. 7 Contents Foreword 6 About This Manual 7 General Approach ....................................... 7 The PM5000 Models .................................... 7 PM5000 Overview 10 Panel Layout .............................................. 10 Top Panel ................................................... 10 Rear Panel .................................................. 12 Expansion: Connecting to External Equipment .............. 14 Cascade ........................................................ 14 MIDI................................................................ 14 GPI (General Purpose Interface)................. 14 Input Channel Section 15 Mono and Stereo Input Modules .............. 15 Head Amp Block........................................... 15 HPF Block ..................................................... 16 EQ Block ....................................................... 16 Insert Block................................................... 17 Stereo Aux Send 1~12 Block ...................... 17 G/A (Group/Aux) Send 1~8 Block ............... 18 Main Out Block ............................................. 18 Channel Fader Block ................................... 20 Channel Grouping ..................................... 21 VCA Grouping .............................................. 21 Assigning VCA and Mute Groups............... 21 VCA Master and Master Mute Switch Group Control ............ 24 Master Out Section 26 Multiple Masters In Single Modules .......................................... 26 Basic Signal Routing................................. 27 Controls Common To All Masters............ 28 Stereo Aux Master Module ....................... 30 G/A (Group/Aux) Master Module .............. 31 Group/Aux Switching................................... 32 Stereo and Mono Master Modules ........... 34 Matrix Send and Master Out Section 35 Matrix Send Section .................................. 35 Matrix Master Out Section ........................ 37 Oscillator and Talkback Section 38 Oscillator/Talkback Signal Output ........... 39 8 Monitor Control Section 40 Monitor Source........................................... 40 The Monitor Outputs.................................. 41 Cue Signal Monitoring............................... 41 Solo Mode................................................... 44 Cue and Solo .................................................44 Basic Operation ............................................45 Meter Bridge ............................................... 47 Digital Control Section 49 Control Functions ...................................... 49 Scene Memory Functions ......................... 51 Overview ........................................................51 Fade Time ......................................................52 Scene Store ...................................................53 Scene Recall..................................................53 Title Edit........................................................54 The Preview Function...................................55 Utility Functions......................................... 56 Overview ........................................................56 Common Operations ....................................57 Basic Functions ............................................58 Battery Check ............................................58 Date/Time ..................................................59 CompactFlash Memory..............................59 Lock Mode .................................................61 Memory Protect .........................................62 Scene Edit .................................................62 Bus Mode.......................................................63 G/A Bus Mode ...........................................63 Stereo Matrix Mode ...................................64 Safety and Protection Functions.................65 Group Assign Safe.....................................65 G/A Bus Assign Safe .................................65 Recall Safe Select .....................................66 Solo Enable ...............................................66 Input Solo Safe ..........................................67 Monitor .......................................................... 67 Monitor Mode ............................................ 67 Monitor Delay ............................................ 68 Master Cue AFL Position .......................... 69 Scene Recall ................................................. 69 Theater Mode............................................ 69 Fader Mode............................................... 70 Automation ................................................ 70 Direct Recall/ Mute Master........................ 71 GPI ................................................................. 72 Scene Inc/Dec (GPI In) ............................. 72 GPI Out ..................................................... 72 Cascade ........................................................ 74 Cascade .................................................... 76 MIDI................................................................ 77 MIDI Program Change .............................. 80 MIDI Control Change ................................ 81 MIDI Setting .............................................. 81 MIDI Echo Back ........................................ 82 MIDI Program Change Table .................... 83 Appendix 84 Installing Options And Changing Internal Switch Settings ...........84 Module Removal and Replacement............ 84 Input Transformer Installation .................... 86 Internal Switch Settings For Each module................................................. 88 Connector Pin Assignments .....................92 PM5000 Self-diagnostic Function .............93 Initializing the Internal Memory .................. 93 Error Messages...........................................94 Troubleshooting .........................................95 Specifications .............................................96 1. General Specifications ............................ 96 2. Inputs/Outputs.......................................... 97 3. Others........................................................ 98 MIDI Data Format ........................................99 Index 102 9 PM5000 Overview PM5000 Overview Panel Layout The layout of the PM5000’s functional sections in the basic conﬁguration is shown below. In the PM500052C the master output section is located in the center of the console, while in all other models it is located to the right of the console. N OT E In this manual the console’s main functional groups are referred to as “sections.” Each section further contains “blocks” of functions. The basic hardware divisions are “modules.” For example, all of the console’s input modules make up the “input channel section.” Each input channel is made up of an “EQ block,” a “fader block,” and others. In the PM5000 each input channel is made up of two separate hardware components: an “input channel module” and a “fader module.” Top Panel PM5000-52C PM5000-28 10 PM5000 Overview 1 Input Channel Section (page 15) 3 Matrix Send and Master Out Section (page 35) Two types of input channels are provided – mono and stereo – but the basic block structure of each is the same. After going through phantom power, input gain, phase reversal, and high-pass ﬁlter stages, the audio signal passes through a 4-band equalizer before it reaches the channel fader. External processing gear can be inserted into the channel signal path either before or after the EQ block. The post-EQ signal can be sent to any or all of 12 stereo aux buses and 8 G/A (group/aux) buses. The audio signal from the input channel can be assigned to the stereo L&R bus and/or mono bus. On mono input channels the signal can also be assigned to the stereo and mono (center) buses in LCR mode. Up to 12 VCA groups and 8 mute groups can be set for each channel’s fader block. Furthermore, the channel on/off status, master bus assign settings, grouping, and fader settings can be stored in the console’s scene memory for instant recall whenever required. The matrix section is made up of 4 stereo and 8 mono matrix mixes. The sends to the matrix mixes are all derived from the master output section. The matrix input section is located at the top of the master output section. The signal from each master can be sent to a matrix bus by turning the master’s [TO MATRIX] switch on and using the matrix level controls to apply the signal to the required matrix bus. The [SUB IN] control located next to the stereo/mono master [SEND LEVEL] control adjusts the level of the [MATRIX SUB IN L&R] signal sent to each matrix bus. The matrix output section is located to the right of the matrix input section, and it is here that the ﬁnal matrix bus output levels are set. The stereo matrix buses can be switched to function as mono sends via a utility mode function, in which case the summed L & R mono signal is delivered via the L and R outputs. The on/off status of the matrix outputs can be stored in the console’s scene memory. 2 Master Output Section (page 26) The master output section is further subdivided into stereo aux master, G/A (group/aux) master, and stereo/ mono master sections. Each stereo aux master module independently controls the signals from two adjacent stereo aux buses (a total of 12 stereo aux buses). Depending on the selected G/A bus mode, each G/A master module can handle the signals from two adjacent group/aux buses as up to 4 stereo pairs or 8 mono feeds. The stereo and mono masters are integrated into a single module, but are independent internally. The stereo and mono masters receive the signals from the stereo and mono buses, respectively, and send these signals to the stereo and mono main outputs. Each master features a SUB IN input and a [SUM GAIN] control for gain adjustment. The on/off status of each master, as well as bus assign and other settings can be stored in the console’s scene memory. 4 VCA Master Section (page 21) The VCA section can be used to independently control up to 12 VCA groups (VCA1 ~ VCA12) set up via the fader blocks of each input channel. The VCA master faders function as master faders for the corresponding VCA groups, while the [VCA MUTE] switches mute or un-mute the corresponding VCA groups. With this versatile system it is possible to assign a channel to multiple VCA groups set up for different purposes. 5 Oscillator/Talkback Section (page 38) From this section the oscillator and talkback signals can be sent to any of the console’s master and matrix sends. The [TB/OSC] switches in the master and matrix sections assign the oscillator and talkback signals to the corresponding output. 6 Monitor Control Section (page 40) With two monitor outputs (MONITOR A & B) and [CUE] switches on each module, any source or combination of sources can be monitored as required. Normally the same monitor signal is delivered via the two main monitor outputs as well as the console’s three headphone jacks (one at the top of the monitor module, and two on either side of the front panel). When the [LCR] switch is engaged the MONITOR A and B outputs can be used simultaneously for LCR monitoring. The [SOLO MODE] switches on the meter bridge allow the module [CUE] switches to be used as solo switches independently for the console’s input and output sections (CUE/SOLO function). 11 PM5000 Overview 7 Mute Master Section (page 21) 9 Meter Bridge (page 47) The 8 [MUTE MASTER] switches can be used to mute speciﬁed input channel groups, or as [DIRECT RECALL] switches for the scene memory. Whether these switches function in the MUTE MASTER or DIRECT RECALL mode is speciﬁed via a utility mode function. Used in conjunction with the monitor control section, the meter bridge’s LED bar-graph meters provide visual monitoring of ﬁnal output levels at the console’s rearpanel outputs. Indicators are also provided to display the status of the PW5000 Power Supply unit as well as the console’s internal fan unit and phantom power supplies. Brightness controls for the console’s illuminated controls and gooseneck lamps are also provided. Other controls provided on the meter bridge are scene memory preview on/off and mode selectors for the CUE/SOLO function. 8 Digital Control Section (page 49) The PM5000’s digital control features are concentrated in this section. One of the main functions of this section is storage and recall of console settings to and from the scene memory. In addition to memorizing the on/off status of panel switches, the scene memory can also store fader settings that will be reproduced by the motorized channel and VCA faders when recalled. A fader time function is provided to specify the amount of time it will take for the faders to physically reach the recalled settings. This section also provides access to utility functions that deﬁne basic operation of the console and the way it interacts with some types of external equipment. External CF (CompactFlash) memory cards can be initialized and used to store scene memory data. ) Memory Card Slot The console's memory card reader is located on the front panel. The PM5000 can use CF (CompactFlash) memory cards (see page 59). NO T E The two screws on the right side of the digital control section can be used to attach a protective cover. The six screws on the sides of the master sections can be used to attach a book rest or a talkback cable. These 8 screws do not affect the mechanical strength of the unit. Use the attached screws or M3-size machine screws 8 millimeters or less in length. Rear Panel PM5000-52C &*( ™£¢ # ! ∞ ¡º ^% $ PM5000-28 &*( ™£¢ # # @ ¡º @ ! ¡º # @ ¡º @ ! ∞ ^% $ NO T E All PM5000 inputs and outputs are balanced except for the PHONES outputs and expansion connectors. See the input/output speciﬁcations at the end of this manual for details. 12 PM5000 Overview ! Mono (Stereo) Inputs ( Stereo Output and Mono Output XLR-type input connectors, DIRECT OUT connectors, and INSERT IN and OUT connectors are provided on each input channel. Stereo modules feature separate connectors for the L and R channels, but do not have DIRECT OUT connectors. These are the stereo and mono master outputs (ST OUT, MONO (C)). @ Sub Inputs Each stereo aux master has L and R stereo aux SUB IN connectors, each group/aux master has G/A SUB IN connectors, both monitor outputs feature stereo 2TR IN (1 & 2) and L/C/R CUE SUB IN connectors, and the stereo and mono master outputs have L and R ST SUB IN and MONO(C) SUB IN connectors. L and R MATRIX SUB IN connectors are also provided for all matrix outputs. Please check the supplied block diagram for details. º Lamp Connectors The supplied gooseneck lamps can be connected here (4 connectors on the PM5000-52C, 3 on the PM5000-36 and PM5000-28). Lamp brightness can be adjusted via the [LAMP DIMMER] control on the meter bridge. Engage the [LAMP OFF] switch to turn the lamps off. ¡ Fan Vents These are the air vents for the console’s internal cooling fans (4 locations on the PM5000-52C, 3 on the PM500036 and PM5000-28). Be sure that the vents aren’t blocked when installing the console. NO T E ™ Fan Switch Stereo aux SUB IN and G/A SUB IN connectors are not provided on the PM5000-28. Sets the speed of the console’s internal cooling fans to match prevailing operating conditions. Normally the [LOW] setting can be used. When the ambient temperature is high, however, such as in some outdoor applications when the console is exposed to direct sunlight, the [HIGH] setting should be used. Also switch to the [HIGH] setting if the top-panel temperature feels higher than normal. # Insert Inputs and Outputs Insert input and output connectors are provided on all 12 stereo aux masters, 8 group/aux masters, the stereo and mono masters, and the 4 stereo matrix and 8 mono matrix outputs. $ Stereo Aux Master Out % G/A (Group/Aux) Master Out ^ Matrix Out The stereo aux master, G/A (group/aux) master, and matrix output connectors are grouped together here. & Monitor Out These are the console’s two stereo monitor outputs (A & B). You can use outputs A and B as separate stereo monitor outputs, or use A and B simultaneously for LCR monitoring (MONITOR B = Center). * Talkback/Oscillator Out The talkback or oscillator signal appears at this output. £ +48V Master Switch This is the master switch for the 48-volt phantom power supply to all input channels. When using phantom power use the individual input channel [+48V] switches to turn phantom power on or off as required. ¢ External Expansion Connectors Type A and B CASCADE connectors, a D-sub 25-pin GPI connector, and MIDI IN/OUT/THRU connectors for connection to compatible external equipment. ∞ Power Supply Connector The dedicated external PW5000 power supply unit must be connected to this connector using the power supply cable supplied with the PM5000 console. 13 PM5000 Overview Expansion:Connecting to External Equipment The PM5000 is entirely self-contained and can be used effectively on its own, but it does provide some versatile expansion capabilities. In this section we’ll describe how the PM5000 can be synchronized with external gear and cascaded with other Yamaha mixing consoles. Type B The TYPE [B] cascade connector can be used to connect the PM5000 to a Yamaha PM4000 or PM3500 series console for linkage of the functions listed below. In this case the PM5000 will function as the master console, there is no need to use the utility mode to set the receive parameters. Cue/solo settings can, however, be transmitted from the PM4000/3500. • VCA master section (mute & fade, fade time link). • Mute master (except for the PM3500). • The cue/solo setting (sync of input cue only). MIDI IN MIDI RS232C OUT GPI THRU The PM5000 MIDI connectors allow connection to other MIDI equipment to provide the following capabilities: RS422 MASTER SLAVE A B NO T E See the detailed descriptions of the related utility functions in the Utility Functions section beginning on page 56. Cascade Two types of cascade connectors are provided on the PM5000 rear panel: TYPE [A] for connection to a second PM5000, and TYPE [B] for connection to Yamaha PM4000/3500 series mixing consoles. In either case the extra console will be added to increase the total number of available input channels. • Program change message reception from an external MIDI device for scene memory selection. • Transmission of appropriate program change messages to external MIDI gear when a scene memory is recalled on the PM5000. • Control change reception from an external MIDI device for control of PM5000 panel control values. • Transmission of appropriate control change messages to external MIDI gear when a panel control is operated on the PM5000. In order to select the PM5000’s 1000 internal scene memories using MIDI program change messages 1~128 it is necessary to use program change bank select messages or create an program change table for the PM5000. The program change table will also determine which program change number is transmitted by the PM5000 when a scene memory is recalled. MIDI settings can be accessed via the console’s utility functions. Also refer to the MIDI data list at the end of this manual. Type A When the TYPE [A] connectors of two PM5000 consoles are connected via a cross cable the functions listed below become linked between the master and slave consoles. The slave console’s utility mode can be used to specify reception of individual parameters. • • • • VCA master section (mute & fade, fade time link). Mute master. The cue/solo setting (sync of all cue groups). Scene memory (synchronized storage and recall of the same scene number). The TYPE [A] port can also be connected to the serial RS-422 or RS-232C port of a personal computer for ofﬂine console parameter editing. PM5000 setup data can be transferred to and from the console in standard CSV ﬁle format and edited in any spreadsheet application that can import and export CSV data. The edited data can then be directly read back into the PM5000. 14 NOTE Appropriate MIDI cables must be connected from the OUT connector of the transmitting device to the IN connector of the receiving device. The THRU connector on the receiving devices re-transmits the data received at the IN connector. On the PM5000 an “echo” function can be used to retransmit data received at the IN connector via the OUT connector. GPI (General Purpose Interface) The GPI port allows pulse-signal interfacing with compatible external equipment for bi-directional control of several functions. Receive functions include incrementing or decrementing of the PM5000 scene memory and talkback on/off switching. GPI data can be transmitted when a fader is operated (manually or automatically), or when a speciﬁed scene memory is recalled. All of these functions are accessible via the PM5000 utility functions. Refer to the GPI Pin Assignments chart at the end of this manual for more information. Input Channel Section Input Channel Section Mono Input Module Stereo Input Module Mono and Stereo Input Modules Mono and stereo input modules make up the console’s input channel section. In essence each stereo module contains two parallel mono signal paths, and the panel controls control both channels simultaneously. Head Amp Block Initial adjustment of the input audio signal level and other parameters can be carried out here. Mono Input Module Stereo Input Module 1 3 2 1 3 5 2 4 5 1 [+48V] Switch Engage this switch to supply +40-volt phantom power to the corresponding input. NOTE In order to use phantom power, the rear-panel [+48V MASTER] switch must be turned on. The [+48V MASTER ON] indicator on the left side of the meter bridge will light when the master phantom power switch is on. 2 [PAD] Switch When this switch is engaged a 26-db pad is inserted at the channel’s input to compensate for high-level source signals. The arrows indicate controls and indicators that differ between the mono and stereo input modules. 15 Input Channel Section 3 [GAIN] Control Adjusts the input level. When the [PAD] switch is off the input level can be adjusted from –10 dB through –60 dB. When the [PAD] switch is engaged the range is from +16 dB through –34 dB. NO T E Stereo modules feature concentric gain controls: the inner control adjusts the gain of the left channel and the outer control adjusts the gain of the right channel. 4 [L+R] Switch (stereo modules only) When this switch is engaged the stereo input signal is summed to a mono mix, allowing the stereo input modules to be used as mono input modules, as required. NO T E To maintain the proper subjective signal level the left and right channels are attenuated by 3 dB. 5 [ø] (Phase) Switch Engaging this switch reverses the phase (also referred to as the “polarity”) of the input signal. HPF Block The high-pass ﬁlter can be used to attenuate unwanted low-frequency noise that can adversely affect the overall sound. 6 EQ Block This 4-band equalizer features individually-adjustable HIGH, HI-MID, LO-MID, and LOW bands for versatile shaping of the channel signal. The HIGH and LOW bands are switchable between shelving and peaking operation, while the HI-MID and LO-MID bands are peaking types. 7 7 EQ Controls Two controls are provided for each EQ band: the upper “Q” control adjusts bandwidth, while the lower concentric control adjusts frequency (outer control) and gain (inner control). The HIGH and LOW bands additionally have a peaking/shelving switch that determines the band’s mode of operation: engaging the switch selects the shelving mode. 8 HIGH 1 kHz ~ 20 kHz, -15 dB ~ +15 dB (peaking and shelving modes) HI-MID 400 Hz ~ 8 kHz, -15 dB ~ +15 dB LO-MID 80 Hz ~ 1.6 kHz, -15 dB ~ +15 dB LOW 30 Hz ~ 600 Hz, -15 dB ~ +15 dB (peaking and shelving modes) * For all bands Q (bandwidth) can be adjusted from 0.5 ~ 3.0. 8 [EQ] Switch 6 [HPF] Switch and Control The ﬁlter is activated when the switch engaged, and the control can be used to adjust the high-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency from 20 Hz through 400 Hz. The ﬁlter has a 12-dB/oct. cutoff slope. 16 Turns the 4-band EQ block on or off. When the [EQ] switch indicator is off the EQ circuitry is bypassed. EQ is active when the indicator is lit. Input Channel Section Insert Block Stereo Aux Send 1~12 Block These switches are used to determine whether and where external processing gear connected to the rear-panel INSERT IN and OUT connectors will be inserted into the channel signal path. The controls in this block determine the levels at which the channel signal is sent to the console’s 12 stereo aux buses. ! ! Send Level and Pan Controls @ (mono modules) # Send Level and Balance Controls (stereo modules) ) 9 9 Insert [ON] Switch Turns channel insert on or off. When the [ON] switch is engaged an external equipment connected to the rearpanel INSERT IN connectors is inserted into the channel’s signal path. The [PRE] switch (below) determines whether the insert is pre- or post-EQ. ) [PRE] Switch Determines whether the channel’s INSERT IN and OUT connectors insert the externally connected gear before or after the channel EQ stage. When the switch is off the insert is post-EQ. When on (when the indicator is lit) the insert is pre-EQ. The inner controls adjust send level (0 dB at approximately 2 o’clock), and the outer controls adjust pan for mono modules or balance for stereo modules. @ [ON] Switch When an [ON] switch is engaged the send to the corresponding aux bus is active. # [PRE] Switch When this switch is engaged the prefader signal is sent to the corresponding aux bus. When off, the post-fader signal is sent to the aux bus. NO T E The channel signal appears at the rear-panel INSERT OUT connector whether the INSERT [ON] switch is engaged or not. 17 Input Channel Section G/A (Group/Aux) Send 1~8 Block Main Out Block These controls determine how the channel signal is sent to the console’s 8 group/aux buses. This block determines how the channel signal is assigned to the console’s main stereo and mono (center) buses. The stereo and mono outputs can be used independently, or combined for LCR output. Mono Input Module $ Stereo Input Module % ^ & ( º * ( ¡ ¡ º & [PAN]/[CSR] Control (mono modules only) $ Send Level Controls Adjust send level to the corresponding group/aux bus (0 dB at approximately 2 o’clock). % [ON] Switch When an [ON] switch is engaged the send to the corresponding group/aux bus is active. ^ [PRE] Switch When this switch is engaged the pre-fader signal is sent to the corresponding group/aux bus. When off, the postfader signal is sent to the group/aux bus. NO T E The above descriptions apply when the group/aux buses are used as 8 mono aux buses (the default mode). The functions of the controls will vary depending on the G/A bus mode selected via the group/aux master section – refer to “Group/Aux Switching” on page 32 for details. 18 Adjusts panning of the signal sent to the bus(es) to which the channel signal is assigned via the main out switches (. When the [ST] switch is engaged, assigning the channel signal to the stereo bus, stereo panning is adjusted via the inner control. When the [LCR] switch is engaged and the channel signal is assigned to both the stereo and mono buses in LCR mode, the outer [CSR] (Center-Side Ratio) control can be used – refer to the column below. * [BAL] Control (stereo modules only) Determines the stereo balance when the stereo-module [ST] main out switch is engaged to send the channel signal to the stereo bus. Input Channel Section ( Main Out Switches ¡ Level Meter Determine where the post-fader channel signal will be sent. To assign the channel signal to the stereo bus engage the [ST] switch and use the [PAN] & or [BAL] * control to adjust the stereo image. To send the signal to the mono bus engage the [MONO] switch. In all cases the channel fader determines the signal level. On mono modules it is also possible to send the channel signal to the stereo and mono buses in LCR mode, using the mono bus as the center signal. To do this engage the [LCR] switch and use the [CSR] control & to adjusts the Center-Side Ratio to achieve the desired LCR balance. Displays the channels post-EQ pre-fader signal level. The [PEAK] indicator will light when the signal level exceeds 17 dB above nominal (0 dB) level. NOTE The [PEAK] indicator responds to the pre-EQ and pre-insert signal level as well as to the post-EQ pre-fader level. º Channel [ON] Switch Turns the input channel on or off. When off the channel signal is not sent to the STEREO AUX, GROUP AUX, STEREO or MONO buses. LCR vs. Stereo + Mono Operation When the [LCR] switch is engaged the stereo and mono (center) buses become linked for LCR operation and the [ST] and [MONO] switches cannot be engaged. On the other hand, when the [LCR] switch is not engaged the [ST] and [MONO] switches can be engaged simultaneously. In either case the channel signal is sent to both the stereo and mono buses. The difference between these two setups is described below. L Bus Level R Bus Level MONO(C) Bus Level Outer: CSR Inner: PAN LR CSR CSR Control: LR LR CSR CSR Control: Center LR CSR CSR Control: CSR For example, mono sources are normally positioned in the stereo sound ﬁeld or swept from one side to the other by adjusting the panning to the stereo bus. This works ﬁne when the distance between the left and right speakers is relatively small, but problems arise in venues where the speakers are further apart. In fact, in even modest venues if a channel is panned fully left, for example, audience members sitting on the right side of the house will hear very little of that signal, if any. In such cases it is useful to provide a center channel, the output level of which will be adjusted to reinforce the stereo image and provide more effective coverage. Manually adjusting the levels and panning of the stereo and mono buses to achieve this effect can be extremely difﬁcult, and that’s where the LCR output mode with CSR (Center-Side Ratio) control comes in handy. With this system and an LCR speaker setup it is possible to produce natural stereo positioning and smooth panning in large venues with a single control. The [PAN] control adjusts panning as always, while the [CSR] control determines how the center channel responds to [PAN] control operation as shown in the diagrams above. The more the [CSR] control is rotated clockwise, the higher the center channel level as the [PAN] control approaches center position. 19 Input Channel Section Channel Fader Block The channel faders determine the level of the channel signal sent to the console’s master buses, and are of primary importance in setting up the balance between the various channels in the mix. The channel faders can also be assigned to speciﬁc VCA and mute groups for group level and mute control. £ ¢ ∞ § ™ ¶ ™ Channel Fader § MUTE Indicators 1~8 Adjusts the out signal level from the corresponding channel. The channel faders also affect the signal level sent to the stereo aux and group/aux buses when the [PRE] switches associated with the corresponding sends are off (i.e. they are sending the post-fader signal). Indicate the mute groups to which the corresponding channel is assigned. More details are provided in the “Channel Grouping” section. NO T E The channel faders are motor-drive types that will physically move to the memorized settings when a scene memory is recalled – after the speciﬁed “fade time,” if one has been programmed. Refer to “Scene Memory Functions” on page 51 for details. £ [RECALL SAFE] Switch ¢ [FADER SAFE] Switch Either of these switches can be engaged to prevent the corresponding data from changing the channel settings when a scene memory is recalled. Use the [RECALL SAFE] switch to maintain the master bus assign switch settings, or [FADER SAFE] switch to maintain the level of the channel fader. ∞ VCA Indicators 1~12 Indicate the VCA groups to which the corresponding channel fader is assigned. If a VCA group master to which the channel is assigned is muted via its [VCA MUTE] switch, the corresponding VCA indicator will ﬂash rather than light continuously. More details are provided in the “Channel Grouping” section on page 21. 20 ¶ [CUE] Switch When this switch is engaged the pre-fader channel signal is sent to the console’s CUE L&R buses regardless of the channel’s on/off status. The cue signal can be monitored via the rear-panel MONITOR OUT connectors or any of the console’s PHONES jacks. NOTE Using the VCA CUE function, the post-fader channel signal can be monitored. NOTE The [CUE] switches are also used to assign channels to VCA and mute groups (page 21), as well as to specify target channels when setting fade time parameters (page 52). Normal [CUE] switch function is suspended while any of these operations are in progress. Input Channel Section Channel Grouping This section will describe how channels can be assigned to VCA and mute groups. VCA Master Section VCA 1 VCA Mute Master Switches 2 VCA 3 VCA 10 VCA 11 VCA 12 VCA Grouping Assigning VCA and Mute Groups The PM5000 provides two methods of “grouping” input channels so that they can be controlled via a single master fader while maintaining the level relationship between the individual channels in the group. The traditional method is to send the channel signals to any of the console’s 12 stereo aux or 8 mono group/aux buses and use the bus master fader for group control. The second method, pioneered by Yamaha’s introduction of VCA-controlled groups in the PM3000 console, is to directly control the levels and muting of the channels assigned to a group via voltage control. The main advantage of this system is that a number of different group conﬁgurations – for different scenes in a show, for example – can be set up beforehand and then recalled instantaneously as needed. This type of speed and ﬂexibility is simply not possible using the traditional group bus assignment method. Each input channel can be freely assigned to any of 12 VCA groups and 8 mute groups for group level control via the VCA master faders or group muting via the mute master switches. VCA or mute group assignment is initiated by using the ASSIGN MODE keys in the PM5000’s digital control section. NOTE The ASSIGN MODE keys include a [FADE TIME] key which will not be discussed here. Fade time assignment speciﬁes the amount of time it will take the motor faders to reach the recalled fader levels when a scene memory is recalled. Refer to the “Scene Memory Functions” section on page 51 for details concerning the fade time function. 21 Input Channel Section VCA Group Assignment Procedure 1 Press the ASSIGN MODE [VCA] key to initiate the assignment procedure (the indicator will ﬂash). 2 Engage a VCA master [CUE] switch to specify the VCA master to which a channel or multiple channels are to be assigned. The [CUE] switch will ﬂash. If any input channels are already assigned to the selected VCA master, their corresponding VCA indicators will ﬂash. 3 Engage the [CUE] switches of the input channels to be assigned to the selected VCA master (the corresponding VCA indicators will ﬂash). To undo an assignment simply press the channel [CUE] switch a second time (the VCA indicator will go out). VCA Fader VCA 1 Channel Fader 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Repeat step 3 for all input channels to be assigned to the selected VCA master. 5 If a different VCA master [CUE] switch is pressed at this point the target VCA master will change accordingly and new channel assignments can be made. All channel assignments to the previously-selected VCA master will be conﬁrmed and their corresponding VCA indicators will light. 6 Channel assignments can now be made to the newly-selected VCA master. VCA Fader VCA 7 1 Channel Fader VCA 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press the ASSIGN MODE [VCA] key to end the assignment procedure (its indicator will go out). Pressing any other ASSIGN MODE key will also end the VCA assignment procedure – assignment will switch to the newly-selected ASSIGN MODE. NO T E Normal [CUE] switch operation is suspended during the assignment procedure but the current cue settings are retained. 22 Input Channel Section Mute Group Assignment Procedure 1 Press the ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key to initiate the assignment procedure (the indicator will ﬂash). 2 Engage a mute master ([1] ~ [8]) switch to specify the muter master to which a channel or multiple channels are to be assigned. The mute master switch will ﬂash. If any input channels are already assigned to the selected mute master, their corresponding MUTE indicators will ﬂash. 3 Engage the [CUE] switches of the input channels to be assigned to the selected mute group (the corresponding MUTE indicators will ﬂash). To undo an assignment simply press the channel [CUE] switch a second time (the MUTE indicator will go out). Mute Master Switch Channel Fader 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Repeat step 3 for all input channels to be assigned to the selected mute group. 5 If a different mute master switch is pressed at this point the target mute group will change accordingly and new channel assignments can be made. All channel assignments to the previously-selected mute group will be conﬁrmed and their corresponding MUTE indicators will light. 6 Channel assignments can now be made to the newly-selected mute group. Mute Master Switch Channel Fader 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press the ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key to end the assignment procedure (its indicator will go out). Pressing any other ASSIGN MODE key will also end the mute group assignment procedure – assignment will switch to the newlyselected ASSIGN MODE. NO T E Normal [CUE] switch operation is suspended during the assignment procedure but the current cue settings are retained. 23 Input Channel Section VCA Master and Master Mute Switch Group Control If a number of input channels are assigned to VCA masters or mute master switches as described in the preceding section, those channels can be controlled as a group from a single fader or mute switch. VCA Section VCA master faders 1 ~ 12 function as group faders for the assigned input channels, adjusting the output level of all assigned channels while maintaining the level relationships between them. The ﬁnal fader level of each channel will be the sum of the channel fader and VCA fader settings. In the example below input channels 1, 3, 5, and 7 are assigned to VCA group 1 while input channels 1 through 4 are assigned to the VCA 2 group. VCA Faders VCA 1 Channel Faders VCA 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Since the VCA 2 fader is set to 0 dB (nominal), the final fader levels of input channels 2 and 4 will correspond exactly to their respective channel fader settings. Since the VCA 1 fader is set to –20 dB and the VCA 2 fader is set to 0 dB, the final fader levels of channels 1 and 3, which are assigned to both VCA 1 and VCA 2, will 20-dB lower than the input channel fader settings. In the same way, the [VCA MUTE] switches on the VCA master modules function as group mute switches for the assigned input channels. VCA Faders Channel Faders [VCA MUTE] Switch VCA 1 VCA 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Since the VCA 2 [VCA MUTE] switch is engaged the final fader level of input channels 1 ~ 4 will be -∞. NO T E The [VCA MUTE] switches function in a slightly different way than the mute master switches. When a [VCA MUTE] switch is engaged the effect is the same as turning that VCA fader all the way down to -∞. The mute master switches, on the other hand, disengage the channel [ON] switches of the assigned channels. 24 Input Channel Section The VCA 1 ~ VCA 12 [CUE] switches function as group cue switches for all assigned input channels. When a VCA master [CUE] switch is engaged it will light, while the [CUE] switches of all assigned channels will ﬂash, and the signals from those channels will be routed to the console’s cue (L&R, C) buses for monitoring. VCA Faders VCA 1 Channel Faders VCA 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channels 1 and 3 can be monitored by engaging either the VCA 1 or VCA 2 [CUE] switch. NO T E Refer to the “Monitor Control Section” on page 40 for more details. The Mute Master Switches Mute master switches [1] ~ [8] function as group mute switches for the assigned input channels. Press any of the MUTE MASTER switches, [1] ~ [8], to mute the assigned channels. You can conﬁgure the channel [ON] switches to either ﬂash or go out entirely when muted, as described on page 25-1. Mute Master Switches Channel Faders 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 In this setup channels 1 and 3 can be muted by engaging either the mute master [1] or [2] switch. NO T E If the mute safe function is on, the channel [RECALL SAFE] switches can be used to prevent speciﬁed channels in the group from being muted when the assigned mute master switch is engaged (details on page 66). When the direct recall function is on and the [DIRECT RECALL] indicator is lit, the mute master switches can not be used for group muting (details on page 71). 25 Group Mute Channel [ON] Switch Indication Mode When the channels assigned to a MUTE MASTER ([1] ~ [8]) switch are muted, the [ON] switches of the muted channels can be set to either ﬂash or go out entirely. Flashing is the initial default setting. 1 Enter the Group Mute Display Setup Mode by turning the power off, and then back on while holding the ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] switch. Please note, however, that the console will automatically restart in the normal mode if no operations are performed for 5 seconds. M U T E M O D E : B L I N K PW5000 POWER SUPPLY POWER OPERATION MONITOR FAN LINE VOLTAGE HIGH NORMAL +16 -16 +12 +48 STOP THERMAL CAUTION ON OFF FAN SPEED AUTO Power Switch 25-1 HIGH + 2 While the Group Mute Display Setup Mode display is showing use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select either “BLINK” (the muted channel [ON] switches will ﬂash) or “STATIC” (the muted channel [ON] switches will go out). BLINK Mode STATIC Mode M U T E M U T E M O D E : B L I N K M O D E : S T A T I C Flashing 3 Going out Press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm the selection and restart in the normal mode. Press the [CLEAR/EXIT] key if you want to restart in the normal mode without altering the previous setting. NO T E • This setting is retained when the console power is turned off, but is not included in the setup memory and therefore can not be saved to a CF memory card. • When the STATIC mode is selected the [ON] switches will still ﬂash when PREVIEW is engaged. • When the STATIC mode is selected pressing the group-muted channel [ON] switches will be ignored. 25-2 Master Out Section Master Out Section Stereo Aux Master Module G/A Master Module Stereo/Mono Master Module Multiple Masters In Single Modules The master output section is made up of modules housing the masters for 12 stereo aux buses, 8 G/A (group/aux) buses, a stereo bus, and a mono bus. Both the stereo aux and G/A master modules combine pairs of adjacent masters – odd and even numbers – in each module. While the stereo aux master modules each handle two stereo signal pairs, each G/A master module can be used to handle two independent mono signals, a linked pair of mono signals, or a stereo pair. Similarly, the stereo/mono master module combines the console’s main stereo and mono bus masters. 26 Master Out Section Basic Signal Routing In the same was as the input channel modules, the only real difference between the stereo aux, G/A, stereo, and mono masters is whether they are mono or stereo. The basic routing is the same for all signals, as summarized in the diagrams below. ST AUX ST AUX L ST AUX ST AUX R TB/OSC MASTER OUT SUM GAIN ST AUX SUB IN L TO MATRIX MATRIX INSERT ST AUX SUB IN R G/A G/A IN TB/OSC G/A OUT MASTER OUT SUM GAIN TO MATRIX G/A SUB IN MATRIX INSERT STEREO STEREO BUS IN L STEREO BUS IN R TB/OSC STEREO OUT MASTER OUT SUM GAIN STEREO SUB IN L TO MATRIX MATRIX MONO (C) OUT MASTER OUT TO MATRIX MATRIX INSERT STEREO SUB IN R MONO MONO (C) TB/OSC SUM GAIN MONO (C) SUB IN INSERT * Shaded blocks correspond to switches on the modules. Each master receives the signal from the assigned input channels via the corresponding bus, and that signal is summed with the signal from the related SUB IN connector and the talkback and oscillator signal (in stereo in the stereo masters). [SUM GAIN] controls are provided at this point to allow excessively hot signals to be reduced as necessary to prevent overload. The next step in the signal path is the master insert, allowing external processing gear to be applied at this point. From there the signal goes to the corresponding rear-panel master output, and/or to the corresponding stereo or mono matrix. 27 Master Out Section Controls Common To All Masters Since the basic signal routing is common to the various master modules, all modules also feature many of the same controls. It is the differences that, in a sense, deﬁne the character of each module type. The stereo and mono masters have completely independent sets of controls, while the stereo aux and G/A masters each combine two pairs of channels with two identical sets of controls. In all cases the controls on the left side of the paired modules apply to an odd-numbered master while those on the right apply to the adjacent even-numbered master. In the illustrations below the black bullets with white numbers refer to controls common to all master modules. Odd-numbered Master Controls Even-numbered Master Controls 1 4 Odd-numbered Master Controls 1 4 Even-numbered Master Controls 1 4 1 4 ! ) @ 5 6 6 6 6 2 2 2 2 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 # 9 9 9 9 8 8 8 8 $ $ $ $ N OT E After the common controls have been described below, the independent controls (white bullets with black numbers) will be described for each type of master module. 28 Master Out Section 1 [TO MATRIX] Switch 8 Master Fader When this switch is engaged the signal from the corresponding master is sent to the stereo and mono matrix. The matrix send is derived after the master fader and master [ON] switch. Because of this the master [ON] switch must be engaged in order to send the master signal to the matrix via the [TO MATRIX] switch. Determines the output level presented at the corresponding master output connector. 2 [SUM GAIN] Control and Indicator 3 ∑·PEAK Indicators The ∑·PEAK indicators indicate the state of the signal after summing in each master. The indicators light when the mixed signal reaches 3-dB below clipping. When a ∑·PEAK indicator lights it is advisable to rotate the corresponding [SUM GAIN] control counterclockwise to reduce the sum gain to prevent possible overloading (a maximum reduction of 20 dB is possible). The SUM GAIN [ON] indicator will light to notify the operator that sum gain reduction is in effect. 4 [TB/OSC] Switch When the [TB/OSC] switch is engaged the oscillator and/or talkback signal can be sent to any or all of the console’s master outputs as well as the matrix. The signal to be sent is determined by the talkback section controls (page 38). 6 [INSERT] Switch NOTE The stereo aux master modules are dual conﬁgurations, each including two stereo master faders. 9 Master [ON] Switch Turns output of the corresponding master on or off. When a master [ON] switch is engaged and lit, the master signal is available at the corresponding master output. $ [CUE] Switch The [CUE] switches are used to monitor the corresponding master signals via the console’s cue bus. PFL (pre-fader listen) or AFL (after-fader listen) can be selected as required. When the monitor control section [MASTER PFL] switch is engaged, the [CUE] switches send the master’s pre-fader signal to the cue bus. If the [MASTER PFL] switch is disengaged the post-fader master signal is sent to the cue bus. NOTE With the initial default setup the AFL signal cannot be monitored unless the master [ON] switch is engaged. This can be changed to allow AFL monitoring even when the master [ON] switch is disengaged via a utility function (PRE ON, see page 69). When this switch is engaged external equipment connected to the corresponding INSERT IN and OUT connectors is inserted into the master signal. 7 [RECALL SAFE] Switch Engaging this switch prevents the corresponding master’s settings from being changed by a scene recall operation. The parameters to be protected can be speciﬁed via a utility function (page 65). 29 Master Out Section Stereo Aux Master Module Refer to the preceding “Controls Common To All Masters” section for descriptions of the stereo aux master controls not included in this section. 5 [L+R] Switch Engaging this switch sums the corresponding premixed stereo signal to a mono signal which is then delivered via both the L and R master channel. NOTE To maintain the proper subjective signal level the left and right channels are attenuated by 3 dB. 5 NOTE The [L+R] switches allow the stereo aux masters to be used as mono masters. In this case a signal applied to either the L or R SUB IN connector will be send to both the L and R master channels. Since the L and R insert patch points are independent, it is possible to separately process the left and right outputs even though the source for both channels is the same mono mix. ST AUX ST AUX L ST AUX R TB/OSC ST AUX SUM GAIN TO MATRIX ST AUX SUB IN L INSERT ST AUX SUB IN R 30 MASTER OUT MATRIX Master Out Section G/A (Group/Aux) Master Module Refer to the preceding “Controls Common To All Masters” section for descriptions of the G/A master controls not included in this section. ) [TO ST] Switch ! [PAN] Control @ [TO MONO] Switch When the [TO ST] switch is engaged the post-fader is sent to the stereo bus via the [PAN] control for left/right positioning. When the [TO MONO] switch is engaged the same signal is sent to the mono bus. ! ) @ NOTE The signal sent from the G/A master modules to the stereo and mono buses is the same as the post-fader AFL signal that can be monitored by using the [CUE] switches. For this reason with the initial default setup the signal cannot be monitored unless the master [ON] switch is engaged. However, similar to the way that this can be changed to allow AFL monitoring even when the master [ON] switch is disengaged via a utility function (MASTER CUE AFL POSITION = PRE ON), an internal switch setting can be changed to allow the G/A master signal to be sent to the stereo and/or mono bus whether the master [ON] switch is engaged or not. # # G/A Bus Mode Indicators G/A G/A IN G/A OUT TB/OSC MASTER OUT Indicate the current mode of the G/A master module. When the GROUP POST PAN indicator is lit the module is functioning as a group stereo master. When the GROUP PRE PAN indicator is lit the module is functioning as dual group mono masters. And when the AUX indicator is lit the module is functioning as a dual mono aux master. SUM GAIN TO MATRIX G/A SUB IN MATRIX INSERT 31 Master Out Section Group/Aux Switching The G/A modules are all dual types that can be set for GROUP POST PAN (stereo master), GROUP PRE PAN (dual mono master), or AUX (dual mono master) operation. The current mode of each G/A module is shown by the G/A bus mode indicators. Mono AUX mode (default) NO T E The G/A master module mode can be switched via a utility function (page 63). When the G/A bus mode is switched, the actual change occurs not in the G/A module, but in the way the mono or stereo input channel signal is sent to the group/aux buses (please refer to the block diagram). The operational differences between the three G/A bus modes are organized in the following chart. Be sure to select the mode that best suits your application. G/A Bus Mode From Mono Input Modules From Stereo Input Modules GROUP POST PAN (L = odd, R = even) The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch and [SEND LEVEL] control have no effect. The post-fader mono signal is L/R assigned via the [PAN] control and sent to the odd and even-numbered G/A buses (L = odd, R = even). The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch and [SEND LEVEL] control have no effect. The post-fader stereo signal is L/R balanced via the [BAL] control and sent to the odd and even-numbered G/A buses (L = odd, R = even). GROUP PRE PAN The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch and [SEND LEVEL] control have no effect. The post-fader mono signal is sent to the odd and even-numbered G/A buses in parallel. The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch and [SEND LEVEL] control have no effect. The post-fader stereo signal is sent directly to the odd and even-numbered G/ A buses (L = odd, R = even). AUX x 2 (default) The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch and [SEND LEVEL] control function normally. The post-fader mono signal is sent to the odd and even-numbered G/A buses in parallel. The G/A send block [PRE FADER] switch and [SEND LEVEL] control function normally. A mono mix of the post-fader stereo signal is sent to the odd and evennumbered G/A buses in parallel. NO T E When the G/A bus mode is set to GROUP POST PAN or GROUP PRE PAN or when the mode is set to AUX and the input channel [PRE FADER] switch is off the channel fader level affects the G/A bus send level. In such a case the send from channels assigned to a VCA or mute group will also be affected by VCA fader, [VCA MUTE] switch, and mute master switch operation. 32 Master Out Section Cue Operation Differences In the G/A Bus Modes The way the G/A master signal is sent to the cue buses varies according to the selected G/A bus mode. When the GROUP PRE PAN or AUX mode is selected adjacent G/A master channels function independently and the same signal is sent to both the L and R cue buses when cue is engaged. When the GROUP POST PAN mode is selected, however, adjacent G/A master channels function as a stereo pair and the odd-numbered master feeds the L cue bus while the even-numbered master feeds the R cue bus. CUE L CUE R Same mono signal to both L and R channels Same mono signal to both L and R channels CUE L+R CUE L+R In the GROUP POST PAN mode the two [CUE] switches on a module function in tandem so that engaging either one will automatically engage the other at the same time. Stereo signal L channel L L L R R R Stereo signal R channel 33 Master Out Section Stereo and Mono Master Modules Refer to the preceding “Controls Common To All Masters” section for descriptions of the stereo and mono master controls not included in this section. Stereo Master (Left) Mono Master (Right) Compared to the stereo aux and G/A master modules just described, the stereo and mono masters are relatively simple. The stereo master controls on the left side of the module correspond approximately to one half of the controls on a stereo aux module (i.e. the controls for one stereo pair). For maximum convenience in practical applications, however, independent [TB/OSC] switches are provided for the left and right channels so that the talkback or oscillator signal can be applied independently to one channel or the other, or to both if required. Similarly, the mono master controls correspond approximately to one half of the controls on a G/A master module. Since the stereo and mono masters feed the console’s master stereo and mono outputs there is no need for mono mix or send-to-stereo assignment switches. 34 Matrix Send and Master Out Section Matrix Send and Master Out Section Matrix Send Section The matrix send section is located at the top of the console’s master out section. From the hardware standpoint it is a “matrix send block” fed by the outputs of the various master modules, but from an operational perspective it is a separate section to which the signals from the master modules are assigned via their respective [TO MATRIX] switches. The master signals flow vertically. Stereo Aux Master Module G/A Master Module Stereo/Mono Master Module Monitor Module The matrix bus signals flow horizontally. STEREO MATRIX 1 STEREO MATRIX 2 STEREO MATRIX 3 STEREO MATRIX 4 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 2 MATRIX 3 MATRIX 4 MATRIX 5 MATRIX 6 MATRIX 7 MATRIX 8 [TO MATRIX] Switches The matrix send conﬁguration for each master is basically the same. From the top down there are four stereo matrices (ST MATRIX 1 ~ 4) and eight mono matrices (MATRIX 1 ~ 8). The outputs from the master modules can be assigned to the matrix inputs and the matrix send levels individually adjusted as required. 35 Matrix Send and Master Out Section Stereo Aux Master Module Stereo/Mono Master Module ST MATRIX Stereo channel sends to the stereo matrices are sent directly with the L/R balance determined by the source channel. (MONO) MATRIX Mono channel sends to the stereo matrices are internally mixed to mono. L R ST AUX L R ST AUX G/A Master Module L R ST L R SUB IN Stereo/Mono Master Module Mono master signals sent to the stereo matrices can be adjusted for level (inner control) and L/R balance (outer control). ST MATRIX Mono channel sends to the mono matrices are sent with the L/R balance determined by the source channel. (MONO) MATRIX G/A G/A MONO The level and balance of signals sent from the mono masters (group/ aux, mono) a stereo matrix can be adjusted via the inner and outer controls, respectively. Stereo signals from stereo masters (stereo aux, stereo) sent to a mono matrix are internally mixed to mono at the matrix input and then routed to the appropriate mono matrix bus. The stereo and mono master matrix input blocks also feature [SUB IN] controls that allow signals from the MATRIX SUB IN inputs to be sent to the matrix buses. The console’s talkback and oscillator signals can be fed to any matrix bus by engaging the [TB/OSC] switch located to the right of each [SUB IN] control (the talkback/oscillator signal is simultaneously assigned to the L and R channels of stereo matrix buses). The ∑·PEAK indicators light when the matrix bus signal reaches 3-dB below clipping. When a ∑·PEAK indicator lights it is advisable to reduce the send level from the corresponding masters until the indicator goes out. 36 Matrix Send and Master Out Section Matrix Master Out Section The matrix master out section is located to the right of the matrix send section. The matrix master out section determines where the signals received at the matrix send section will ﬁnally be output, with a comprehensive complement of [INSERT], [RECALL SAFE], and other functions. Matrix Send Section Matrix Master Out Section Easiest to conceive of as an extension of the matrix send section, the matrix master out section has corresponding independent stereo matrices (ST MATRIX 1 ~ 4) and mono matrices (MATRIX 1 ~ 8). Since the only function of this section is to control output of the signals from each matrix bus its control complement is quite simple, with no visible difference between the stereo and mono matrices (the L and R channels of stereo matrices are controlled simultaneously). The only difference is the MONO MODE indicator provided on the stereo matrices (ST MATRIX 1 ~ 4). The MONO MODE indicator lights when the corresponding stereo matrix is being used as a mono matrix. MONO MODE Indicator Matrix [ON] Switch Engaging the matrix [ON] switch activates the corresponding matrix output (output from that matrix is disable when the [ON] switch is disengaged). For active matrix outputs the [MASTER] control determines the level of the signal that will appear at the corresponding rear-panel MATRIX OUT connector. External processing gear connected to the MATRIX INSERT (MONO/ST) connectors is inserted into the matrix signal when the [INSERT] switch is engaged. The [RECALL SAFE] and [CUE] switches function in exactly the same way as those on the master out section (page 29). 37 Oscillator and Talkback Section Oscillator and Talkback Section The oscillator and talkback sections, located to the right of the master section, are independent. The oscillator section is capable of generating pink noise or sine-wave signals for testing and system setup via the TB bus, while the talkback section can be used to send the audio signal from the talkback mic via the TB bus. The [TB/OSC] switches provided on each master and matrix bus allow the talback/oscillator signal to be routed as required. [TB/OSC OUT] Switch [OSC ON] Switch Talkback [ON] Switch The oscillator and talkback signals are applied to the TB bus by engaging the [OSC ON] or talkback [ON] switch, respectively. Since the oscillator and talkback sections share the same TB bus, however, only one can be engaged at a time. If both the [OSC ON] and talkback [ON] switches are engaged simultaneously, the talkback section takes priority. The talkback and oscillator signals can be sent to the rear-panel TB/OSC OUT connector by engaging the [TB/OSC OUT] switch. 38 Oscillator and Talkback Section Oscillator/Talkback Signal Output The oscillator is capable of producing continuous or burst-output pink noise, or sine wave signals from 20 Hz through 20 kHz. Engage the oscillator section [PINK] switch to generate pink noise. If the [SWEEP/BURST] switch is off the pink noise produced will be continuous. When the [SWEEP/BURST] switch is engaged the control immediately above it can be used to set the burst-output interval from 1 second through 20 seconds. The length of each pink noise burst is ﬁxed at 200 milliseconds. To generate sine-wave signals disengage the [PINK] switch. To select the sine-wave frequency, use the [10k], [1k], or [100] frequency selector. If the [SWEEP/ BURST] switch is engaged the control immediately above it can be used to vary the selected frequency from 0.2x through 2x (in 120 steps), thus making the entire audible spectrum from 20 Hz through 20 kHz available. When the [OSC ON] switch is engaged the oscillator signal is output at the level determined by the oscillator [LEVEL] control (make sure the talkback section [ON] switch is disengaged). To deliver a talkback signal via the TB bus an appropriate microphone must be plugged into the INPUT connector (input level = –50 dB). When using a phantom-powered microphone engage the [+48V] switch to supply +48-volt phantom power to the INPUT connector. The [ ] switch engages an 80-Hz highpass ﬁlter for the microphone connected to the INPUT connector to cut out unwanted low-frequency noise. When the talkback [ON] switch is engaged the talkback signal is output at the level determined by the talkback [LEVEL] control. NOTE In order to supply phantom power to the talkback INPUT connector the rear-panel [+48V MASTER] switch must be turned on. When the [+48V MASTER] switch is on the +48V MASTER ON indicator on the left side of the meter bridge will light. NO T E The current oscillator setting – sine wave frequency or burst interval – can also be visually conﬁrmed via the digital control section message display when no other message is being displayed. 39 Monitor Control Section Monitor Control Section Monitor Source Three sources can be selected for monitoring: the stereo master signal, input from the 2-track inputs (2TR IN 1 & 2), and CUE. The stereo master signal can be monitored via the MONITOR A or MONITOR B output simply by engaging the corresponding [ON] switch and adjusting the [LEVEL] control as required. If the [2TR IN 1] or [2TR IN 2] switch is then engaged the monitor source will be switched to the corresponding 2-track input. Cue monitoring occurs when any channel or master [CUE] switch is engaged (cue monitoring takes priority over 2track input monitoring). Monitor Signal Normal Operation [2TR IN 1/2] Engaged [CUE] Engaged Stereo master. 2-track input. Cue NOTE If the console is set up so that the stereo master signal is not normally output (see page 67), only the cue signals will appear at the MONITOR outputs. The monitor out section controls output to the consoles two monitor outputs (MONITOR A & B OUT) as well as to the headphone jacks. NO T E A monitor delay function is provided to allow a delay to be applied to the monitor and headphone outputs for time alignment between the sound from the main house and monitor speakers. 40 Monitor Control Section The Monitor Outputs Cue Signal Monitoring The two monitor outputs can be used independently or simultaneously. When using MONITOR A and B at the same time, the [LCR] switch can be engaged to allow the MONITOR B L channel to function as the C (center) channel for LCR monitoring in conjunction with the L and R channels from MONITOR A. Engage the [L+R] switch to sum the L and R channels to form a mono mix which will be delivered via both the L and R outputs. If you engage the [+MONO (C)] switch the mono master signal will be output via L and R in addition to the center channel. If an input channel, VCA master, master out, or matrix out [CUE] switched is engaged while the stereo master or 2-track input signal is being monitored by the system’s monitor speakers or headphones, the corresponding cue signal can be monitored. L R Normal Operation L C R L+R (C) R+L [LCR] Engaged One will light during cue monitoring. The cue signals from the input channel section, VCA section, or master out section (including the matrix out section) can be monitored one section at a time. When a [CUE] switch is engaged in any section the corresponding cue indicator will light: INPUT CUE, VCA CUE, or MASTER CUE. The cue signal is derived from different points in different sections, as described in the chart below. Section To MONITOR OUT When [CUE] Engaged Cue Point Input Channel Channel (mono/stereo) PFL (ﬁxed) VCA Channels assigned to VCA groups (mono/stereo) AFL (after [PAN/ BAL] control) Master Out Stereo aux, G/A (group/aux), stereo, mono, matrix [MASTER PFL] switch ON: PFL OFF:AFL [L+R] Engaged L+C (C) R+C [+MONO (C)] Engaged L+R+C (C) R+L+C [L+R] and [+MONO (C)] Engaged NO T E The [LCR] switch has no effect on headphone output. When the [+MONO (C)] switch is engaged, however, the cue C signal is delivered to the L and R channels at the same level, producing a similar effect. 41 Monitor Control Section When a channel [CUE] switch is operated directly the channel’s pre-fader signal will be sent to the MONITOR OUTs regardless of whether the channel [ON] switch is engaged or disengaged. In contrast to this situation, cue monitoring of input channels via the VCA section is always AFL (post fader and post [PAN/BAL] control). For example, If a VCA master [CUE] switch is engaged, the [CUE] switches of all channels assigned to that group will ﬂash and only the signals from channels on which the channel [ON] switch is engaged will be sent to the MONITOR outputs. It is therefore possible to switch individual channels in a VCA group on or off while monitoring. Lit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Flashing VCA 1 VCA Fader 1 2 Channel fader 3 4 5 6 7 Only channels 1 and 5 can be sent to the MONITOR outputs It is thus possible to monitor the PFL or AFL signal from each input channel, but a considerable shift in level may occur when switching from one to the other. Cue trim controls are provided to compensate for this: the [INPUT CUE TRIM] adjusts the PFL cue signal level while the [VCA CUE TRIM] control adjusts the AFL cue signal level. Gain compensation for the PFL signals from each channel. Gain compensation for the AFL signals monitored via the VCA faders. 42 Monitor Control Section The cue points for all masters can be switched at once. To monitor the pre-master-fader signals engage the [MASTER PFL] switch, or disengage it to monitor the post-monitor-fader signals. In the latter case if the “PRE ON” cue point is selected (before the master [ON] switches – page 69) monitoring is possible even when output to the house speakers is off. [MASTER PFL] Switch [LAST CUE] Switch As described above cue monitoring can be active for one section at a time. Normally when multiple [CUE] switches in a section are engaged the corresponding signals are all sent to the monitor outputs (MIX CUE mode). When the [LAST CUE] switch is engaged, however, only the last [CUE] switch engaged in any one section will be active (LAST CUE mode). The Cue Stack Function All current [CUE] switch settings are normally disengaged if a [CUE] switch in a different section is engaged. When all panel [CUE] switches are turned off monitor output reverts to the main stereo program or 2-track input signal. In some situations, however, the PM5000 “cue stack” function applies. If, for example, cue monitoring is engaged for the master out section, then the VCA section, and then the input channel section (master out ➝ VCA ➝ input channel), and then all of the [CUE] switches in one of the latter sections are disengaged, the cue status of the preceding section will be restored. Input Channel Master Out NO T E VCA All active [CUE] switches will be disengaged when switching between the MIX CUE and LAST CUE modes. A neat “trick” to disengage all cues at once, therefore, is to engage and then immediately disengage the [LAST CUE] switch. Cue Stack Flow • Master Out ➝ VCA ➝ Input Channel • Master Out ➝ VCA If all VCA [CUE] switches are disengaged the preceding master out section cue status is restored. • VCA ➝ Input Channel If all input channel [CUE] switches are disengaged the preceding VCA section cue status is restored. • Master Out ➝ Input Channel If all input channel [CUE] switches are disengaged the preceding master out section cue status is restored. The cue stack function will not work if the above order is reversed (input channel ➝ VCA ➝ master out), or if a [CUE] switch in any other section is engaged. 43 Monitor Control Section Solo Mode Cue and Solo The terms “solo” and “cue” monitoring are often used interchangeably, and in some cases they are actually the same thing. In the PM5000 and most other sound-reinforcement consoles, however, “CUE” is a signal sent to the operator’s monitor speakers while “SOLO” is a signal sent to the speakers fed by the console’s master or matrix outs. Since solo monitoring in the PM5000 is handled in essentially the same way as cue monitoring, the term “cue/solo function” can be used in cases in which no clear distinction is necessary. CUE House Speaker House Speaker Guitar Bass Vocal Keyboard Guitar Bass Vocal Keyboard Console Monitor Console Monitor PM5000 (Cue Engaged) Guitar Guitar Guitar Bass Vocal Keyboard SOLO House Speaker House Speaker Guitar Guitar Console Monitor Console Monitor PM5000 (Solo Engaged) Guitar Guitar Guitar Bass Vocal Keyboard 44 Monitor Control Section Basic Operation Sub Speaker L Sub Speaker C Sub Speaker R The solo mode can be activated by holding the [SOLO MODE] switch on the meter bridge for more than two seconds – the [SOLO MODE] switch will ﬂash. For reasons why you might not be able to switch to the solo mode, see page 66. STEREO AUX1 ST MATRIX1 GROUP/ AUX1 MATRIX1 2ch Recorder SOLO MODE PREVIEW STEREO AUX SOLO SELECT GROUP/ ST· AUX MONO(C) MATRIX On-stage Monitor Speaker CH1 Signal STEREO NO T E The [PREVIEW] indicator is used for scene memory conﬁrmation editing (page 55). MONO CH1 [CUE] Switch NO T E If you engage the solo mode during cue monitoring, all [CUE] switches will be disengaged. Main House Speaker L No change in the output signal will occur when the solo mode is ﬁrst engaged (you won’t suddenly have only one channel blasting from your house speakers). Once the solo mode has been engaged the [CUE] switches are used to select the channel or channels to be soloed via the master or matrix outs. The channel [ON] switches of all other channels will ﬂash and their output will be muted. Let’s take a look at what happens if solo monitoring is engaged when channel 1 is feeding stereo aux 1 (L & R), group/aux 1, and the stereo and mono masters. Additionally stereo aux 1 is routed to stereo matrix 1 and group/aux 1 is routed to matrix 1. Main House Speaker C Main House Speaker R SOLO MODE PREVIEW STEREO AUX SOLO SELECT GROUP/ ST· AUX MONO(C) MATRIX NOTE Solo monitoring can be activated for one section at a time: input channel, VCA, or master out. The [LAST CUE] switch can be used to switch between the LAST CUE and MIX CUE modes. Also, the cue stack function will operate as described on page 43. When the solo mode is active and the channel 1 [CUE] switch is engaged, only the channel 1 signal will appear at all master and matrix outputs to which it is routed (the stereo aux 1 and group/aux 1 master [TO MATRIX] switches must be engaged). 45 Monitor Control Section Master Solo Select Sub Speaker L With complex, large-scale setups, the basic method of using individual [CUE] switches to check the sends to the main house speakers, sub-speakers, on-stage monitors, recording equipment and other gear can be confusing and tedious. The Master Solo function comes in handy in this type of situation. The four SOLO SELECT switches located below the [SOLO MODE] switch can only be used while the solo mode is active. These switches determine which section will be muted when a solo channel is engaged. For example, if the SOLO SELECT [STEREO AUX], [GROUP/AUX], and [ST. MONO (C)] switches are all engaged. No major change is immediately apparent, but when the stereo aux 1 master [CUE] switch is engaged the sub L & R speakers will automatically be soloed. In the same way, if the stereo master [CUE] switch is engaged the main L & R speakers will be soloed. Sub Speaker C Sub Speaker R 2ch Recorder ST AUX1 ST MATRIX1 GROUP/ AUX1 MATRIX1 On-stage Monitor Speaker CH1 Signal STEREO If the stereo master [CUE] switch is also engaged the main L & R speakers will also be soloed. All this time the channel 1 signal is being sent to the recording gear via stereo aux 1. The signal does not appear at the onstage monitors, however, because group/aux 1 is muted (an internal switch allows this setting to be changed so that the on-stage monitors do receive the channel 1 signal). MONO Main House Speaker L Main House Speaker C Main House Speaker R SOLO MODE PREVIEW STEREO AUX SOLO SELECT GROUP/ ST· AUX MONO(C) MATRIX With this setup it is possible to solo-monitor the stereo or stereo aux 1 master outputs by simply operating a single [CUE] switch, making comparison of the main and sub L & R speakers a simple operation. The SOLO SELECT switches are idea for this type of operation, letting you specify which groups of outputs are to be muted when a solo channel is engaged. NOTE The solo mode directly affects the signal at the console’s master outputs. In addition to the SOLO SELECT switches described above, the PM5000 has input solo safe and solo enable functions that can be used to prevent speciﬁed channels from being affected by solo operations. These functions are accessible via the utility mode (page 66). 46 Monitor Control Section Meter Bridge The PM5000 meter bridge features precise bar-graph meters that display the signal levels at the master outs (stereo aux, group/aux, stereo, mono), matrix outs (stereo, mono), cue (L/C/R), and the talkback/ oscillator bus, from –39 dB to PEAK level in 3-dB increments. 1 LAMP DIMMER PW CAUTION FAN CAUTION 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 STEREO MONO(C) 1 CUE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUT METER LED DIMMER SOLO MODE PREVIEW LAMP OFF STEREO AUX SOLO SELECT GROUP/ ST· AUX MONO(C) PANEL LED DIMMER MATRIX L STEREO AUX R C GROUP/AUX STEREO MATRIX MATRIX The meters are switched to display the stereo aux or stereo matrix signals, or the group/aux or mono matrix signals. The [METER SELECT] switch in the console’s monitor control section alternately selects aux or matrix monitoring for both of these meters at once. The CUE C meter is automatically switched to display the talkback/oscillator signal level when either the [OSC ON] or talkback [ON] switch is engaged (the TB/ OSC LED at the bottom of the meter will light). 1 L 2 R L CUE R L R PEAK +12 +12 +6 +6 0 STEREO AUX C PEAK 0 -6 -6 -12 -12 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -39 -39 TB/OSC STEREO MATRIX N OT E Since there are only four stereo matrices, meters 5 ~ 12 are not active when the meters are switched to stereo matrix level display. 47 Monitor Control Section The meter bridge also features independent dimmer controls for the meters, panel switch illumination, and gooseneck lamps, as well as a [LAMP OFF] switch for the gooseneck lamps. LAMP DIMMER OUT METER LED DIMMER Bar-graph meter dimmer. Gooseneck lamp dimmer. Gooseneck lamp off switch. LAMP OFF PANEL LED DIMMER Panel switch dimmer. Conﬁrmation LEDs are also provided for the phantom power supply and other power-supply voltages, as well as operation of the console and external power supply cooling fans. Phantom power supply and other voltage supplies. +48V +12V PW CAUTION FAN CAUTION +16V -16V +48V MASTER ON External power supply (lights when a problem is detected). Cooling fans (lights when a problem is detected). Master phantom power supply switch on. NO T E If excessive temperature or abnormal voltages are detected in the dedicated external PW5000 power supply unit the PW CAUTION indicator will light as long as continued operation is possible, but if operation becomes impossible the power supply will automatically shut down. The FAN CAUTION indicator if one or more of the PM5000’s internal cooling fans ceases to operate. In either case have the unit(s) checked by qualiﬁed service personnel as soon as possible. 48 Digital Control Section Digital Control Section Control Functions The digital control section includes the majority of functions used for digital control of the PM5000 scene memory and utility features. 4 5 1 2 ! 7 @ 6 # 3 $ % 8 9 9 ) 49 Digital Control Section 1 Scene Display (3 Digits + 3 Dots) 8 Alpha-numeric Keypad When the PM5000 scene memory function is active the current (last recalled) scene memory number – 000 ~ 999 – is shown on this display. The three display dots indicate the status of the current scene as follows: 9 [CLEAR/EXIT] & [ENTER] Keys Left dot: The scene contains no data. Center dot: A MIDI message has been received. Right dot: The panel settings are different from the recalled scene. NO T E When the PM5000 power is turned on the last panel setup before it was turned off is automatically recalled (scene memory “000” will be recalled the ﬁrst time the power is turned on after the console is initially shipped). 2 Message Display (4 Characters) Messages relating to certain operations and functions are displayed here. Error messages are also shown on the display when problems occur (page 94). 3 Parameter Display (12 Characters) Normally the name of the current scene is displayed here, but when a utility function is being used the name of the parameter being edited and its value is displayed. ) [INC] & [DEC] Keys The alpha-numeric keypad is used to enter scene numbers and titles, the [CLEAR/EXIT] key cancels scene number entry or deletes title characters, and the [ENTER] key conﬁrms an entered scene number or other operation. The [INC] and [DEC] keys are used to increment or decrement scene numbers or parameter values. Either key can be held for continuous scrolling in the corresponding direction. ! MONITOR DELAY Indicator This indicator will light when the PM5000’s digital delay has been applied to the monitor outputs via the corresponding utility function (page 68). @ [UTILITY] Switch Accesses the console’s utility functions. Editing and conﬁrmation of the various utility functions is carried out via the alpha-numeric keypad 8, [CLEAR/EXIT] and [ENTER] keys 9, and [INC] and [DEC] keys ). # [TITLE] Switch $ [ALPHABET] Switch 4 [RECALL] Switch 5 [RECALL UNDO] Switch 6 [STORE] Switch The [RECALL] switch actually recalls the settings for a speciﬁed scene memory, the [RECALL UNDO] switch undoes the last recall operation, and the [STORE] switch is used to store new scene data in the selected scene memory. 7 [PREVIEW] Switch When the [PREVIEW] switch is engaged the parameters of the selected scene are called to the console’s controls without affecting the current audio setup, allowing the settings to be previewed and edited as required. 50 Engage the [TITLE] switch when you want to edit the title of a scene memory. To enter characters rather than numbers via the alpha-numeric keypad 3, engage the [ALPHABET] switch. % [ASSIGN MODE] Switches The three assign mode switches are used for VCA and mute group setup (page 21) as well as setting the scene fade times (page 52). Digital Control Section Scene Memory Functions Overview A “scene” is a set of panel settings stored in one of the PM5000’s 1,000 internal scene memories (000 ~ 999). Any stored scene can be instantly recalled at any time for fast efﬁcient changes. The ﬁrst 10 scene memories (000 ~ 009) contain preset data for common basic setups. The presets cannot be overwritten, but the remaining 990 scenes (010 ~ 999) are available to store original setups. The parameters that can be store in each scene are listed in the chart below. Protect Capability Section Stored Parameters (Panel Controls) (■: Panel Control. ■: Utility Function) Input Level (channel fader) Fader Safe Channel on/off Recall Safe Stereo bus send on/off Mono bus send on/off LCR send on/off Stereo aux bus send on/off Group/aux bus send on/off VCA group assign Mute group assign Output Fade time assign on/off n/a STEREO AUX Master out on/off Recall Safe GROUP/AUX Master out on/off Stereo bus send on/off Mono bus send on/off STEREO Master out on/off MONO (C) Master out on/off STEREO MATRIX Master out on/off MATRIX VCA Master out on/off Fader Safe Level (VCA fader) Mute on/off (VCA mute) Other Fade time assign on/off n/a Scene title (entered after scene storage) n/a Fade time (common to input channels & VCAs) Since the parameters stored in the scene memory are the normal panel settings used in setting up signal routing and mixes, you can easily take “snapshots” of various setups you might need to recall later. The preview function can be used to check and edit the stored settings as necessary. Stored scenes can then be recalled instantaneously at any time. Fade time settings can be individually stored with each scene, so that when a scene is restored the faders settings will, rather than jump to the recalled values immediately, gradually fade to the recalled settings over the speciﬁed fade time. It is also possible to protect certain parameters so that the speciﬁed parameters will not change when a scene is recalled. The [RECALL SAFE] switches provided on the input channels, master outputs and matrix outputs, and the [FADER SAFE] switches provided on the input channel and VCA master faders are used to specify which parameters are to be protected for the corresponding input or master channel, as listed in the chart above. When a [RECALL SAFE] or [FADER SAFE] switch is engaged the corresponding settings will not be affected by scene recall operations, regardless of the settings contained in the recalled scene. NOTE If you don’t intend to use the PM5000 scene memory function, the “AUTOMODE OFF” mode can be selected (page 70) to prevent potential problems caused by accidental scene storage or recall operations. 51 Digital Control Section Fade Time 3 Engage the [CUE] switches of the input and master VCA channels to be assigned to the fade time function so that their indicators ﬂash. Pressing a ﬂashing [CUE] switch will cause the indicator to go out and that channel will be unassigned from the fade time function (it will not be affected by the fade time setting and the fader setting will change instantaneously when a scene is recalled). 4 Use the [INC] and/or [DEC] keys to set the fade time from 0.1 to 60 seconds, as required. The fade time can be set in 0.1-second increments from 0.1 through 10 seconds, in 0.2-second increments from 10 through 20 seconds, and in 0.5-second increments from 20 through 60 seconds. 5 When all of the above settings have been made as required disengage the ASSIGN MODE [FADE TIME] switch (its indicator will go out). Pressing any other ASSIGN MODE switch will have the same effect (the assign mode will change to that of the newly selected switch). 6 The speciﬁed fade time and fader assignments can be stored in a scene memory as described in the following section. Please note that if you recall a different scene before performing the scene store procedure the fade time settings you have made will be lost. Fade time settings can be used to create smooth transitions between recalled scenes. The fade time speciﬁed for a scene is common to all channel and VCA faders, but you can individually specify the faders to which the fade time will apply. The procedure for setting and assigning fade times is described below. 1 To set a fade time engage the ASSIGN MODE [FADE TIME] switch so that its indicator lights (at this point the [CUE] switches of input and VCA master channels currently assigned to fade time operation will ﬂash). 2 Press the [ENTER] key so that the fade time appears on the message display to activate the fade time function. The fade time function can be turned off at this point by pressing the [CLEAR/EXIT] key so that “OFF” appears on the display. 1 0 . 0 NOTE When a scene containing a fade time setting is recalled, “FADE” will appear on the message display while the scene fade is in progress (unless another message is being displayed at the same time). 52 Digital Control Section Scene Store Scene Recall The following procedure stores the panel settings along with the current fade time settings (set as described in the preceding section). Stored scene data can be recalled as follows. Execute the recall operation Message display Execute the store operation Parameter display Parameter display Alpha-numeric keypad Alpha-numeric keypad INC key INC key DEC key DEC key 1 2 3 Specify the scene memory number to which the scene is to be stored (010 ~ 999). The desired scene number can be directly entered via the alpha-numeric keys, or the [INC] and [DEC] keys can be used to scroll through the available scene memory numbers. In either case the selected scene number will ﬂash, and the current scene title will appear ﬂashing on the parameter display (no title will appear if the scene contains no data). Press the [STORE] switch and, if necessary, edit the scene title (steps 2 and 3 on page 54). If not necessary, press the [STORE] switch again. The following conﬁrmation message will appear. S U R E ? Y : 1 4 N : 3 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to store the scene. The scene number will light continuously indicating that the current settings have been stored in the selected scene. Press the [3] if you want to abort the store operation. NO T E Settings cannot be stored in protected scenes. If the protect function is active, it must be turned off before new data can be stored in the scene (page 62). NOTE Be sure to engage the [RECALL SAFE] or [FADER SAFE] switches for any channels on which the corresponding settings need to be maintained. 1 Specify the scene memory number from which the scene is to be recalled (000 ~ 999). The desired scene number can be directly entered via the alpha-numeric keys, or the [INC] and [DEC] keys can be used to scroll through the available scene memory numbers. In either case the selected scene number will ﬂash, and the scene title will ﬂash on the parameter display. 2 Press the [RECALL] switch. The scene number will light continuously and the corresponding scene settings will be recalled. NOTE If the selected scene contains no data “NoDT” will appear on the message display and the recall operation will be ignored (no changes will be made to the panel settings). NOTE When the theater mode is engaged, it is possible to directly recall scenes in sequence by using the [INC] and [DEC] keys, without having to press the [RECALL] key (page 69). The DIRECT RECALL switches can also be used for direct scene recall (page 71). NOTE Normally the channel and VCA faders will physically move to the recalled settings via the console’s motor drive system. Motor drive can be turned off if necessary (page 70). 53 Digital Control Section Recall Undo The previous scene recall operation can be undone by pressing the [RECALL UNDO] switch. If the [UNDO RECALL] switch is then pressed a second time the preundo state will once more be recalled. Title Edit Titles of up to 12 characters can be entered for each scene. Parameter display Edit title Select alphabet (non-numeric) characters Alpha-numeric keypadss ENTER key INC key DEC key CLEAR/EXIT key NO T E The [RECALL UNDO] switch will have no effect immediately after the console power has been turned on, before any recall operations have been performed. 1 Select the scene for which you want to enter or edit a title (010 ~ 999). To edit the title of the current scene press the [TITLE] switch so that its indicator lights. NOTE Scene numbers 000 through 009 cannot be edited. 2 A cursor will appear on the parameter display, and the character at the cursor location will ﬂash. The scene title can now be edited. Alphabet (nonnumeric) characters can be entered via the alphanumeric keypad after engaging the [ALPHABET] switch. The [CLEAR] key deletes the character at the cursor position and moves all following characters to the left. Numbers can be entered via the alpha-numeric keypad. When the [ALPHABET] switch indicator is lit the alpha-numeric keypad can be used to enter the characters of the alphabet. B A A N D # 0 1 O P E N The [INC] and [DEC] keys move the cursor left and right. 54 Digital Control Section Number Non-numeric Characters (selected sequentially by the key) Key 3 1 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . \ : ; < = > ? @ [ 2 A B C a b c 3 D E F d e f 4 G H I g h I 5 J K L j k l 6 M N O m n o 7 P Q R S p q r s 8 T U V t u v 9 W X Y Z w x y z 0 (space) The Preview Function The preview function is sort of an “ofﬂine editing function” that allows you to check and edit the contents of a scene memory location without affecting the console’s current status and audio output. 1 To turn the preview function on, engage the [PREVIEW] switch. Both the [PREVIEW] switch indicator and the PREVIEW indicator on the meter bridge will ﬂash while the preview function is on. SOLO MODE When the [ENTER] key is pressed to conﬁrm and enter the title, the [TITLE] switch indicator will go out and the scene number will revert to that of the current scene (if the title of the current scene was edited after the scene was stored, the scene number will not change). If you have edited the title of the current scene the new title will appear on the display immediately. A title edit operation in progress can be aborted by disengaging the [TITLE] switch. PREVIEW STEREO AUX SOLO SELECT GROUP/ ST· AUX MONO(C) MATRIX Flashes while the preview function is engaged. NO T E The preview function, described below, can be used to check the title of a scene other than the one that is currently. NOTE The preview function cannot be engaged while the utility mode is active (i.e. while the [UTILITY] switch indicator is lit). 2 To select a scene to preview simply enter the desired scene number (000 ~ 999). The desired scene number can be directly entered via the alpha-numeric keys, or the [INC] and [DEC] keys can be used to scroll through the available scene memory numbers. In either case the selected scene number will ﬂash, and the scene title will appear on the parameter display. NOTE The preview function cannot be engaged during a scene fade (i.e. a fade speciﬁed by the console’s fade time function). 55 Digital Control Section 3 Press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm the selected scene number and the scene number will light continuously. At the same time the scene settings will be reproduced by the panel controls but no change will occur in the console’s audio output. NO T E During preview all stored settings will be reproduced on the panel controls. In this state the [CUE] switches cannot be operated (the pre-preview settings are maintained), but the [RECALL SAFE] and [FADER SAFE] switches can be set as required. 4 If necessary, change the fader and switch settings as required (page 51). If you press the [STORE] switch at the point the edited settings will be stored in the scene memory selected in step 2, above (the scene number currently being displayed). If you select a different scene number and then press [STORE] the edited settings will be stored in the newly selected scene number. 5 When conﬁrmation and/or editing of the scene settings has been completed, exit from the preview mode in any of the following three ways. • Press the [PREVIEW] switch: The console will return to the pre-preview state. If the setting changes made in step 4 above have not been stored, they will be lost. • Press the [RECALL] switch: The current preview settings become the active console settings and console operation continues normally. If, however, a different scene number is selected before the [RECALL] switch is pressed, the current preview settings are overwritten by the settings from the recalled scene. In the latter case the preview settings will be lost if they have not been stored as described in step 4, above. • Press the [UTILITY] switch: The utility mode will be engaged and the console will return to the prepreview state. NO T E If the panel settings are saved to a CompactFlash memory card in CSV ﬁle format, the scenes can be edited ofﬂine on a personal computer (page 59). 56 Utility Functions Overview The utility functions include functions that facilitate operation of the PM5000 as well as the console’s basic setup parameters. Press the [UTILITY] switch to access these functions and parameters. NOTE The utility mode cannot be engaged while a scene title is being edited (page 54). If the title edit mode is active it will be necessary to disengage the [TITLE] switch and return to normal console operation before pressing the [UTILITY] switch to engage the utility mode. Similarly, the scene preview function (page 55) cannot be engaged while the utility mode is active. Digital Control Section Common Operations All utility functions are accessed and edited by using the alpha-numeric keypad, [CLEAR/EXIT] key, [ENTER] key, and [INC] and [DEC] keys while checking functions and values on the scene display, message display, and parameter display. 1 Press the [UTILITY] switch so that its indicator lights, a parameter will appear on the 12-character parameter display. At the same the corresponding parameter number will ﬂash on the scene display. Function Category C H E C K Scene Recall* NO T E The various utility parameters are selected by using the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the desired parameter number. You can also directly enter the desired parameter number (1 ~ 28) via the alphanumeric keypad. The parameter numbers will appears as “U01” through “U28” on the display. BATTERY CHECK 2 DATE/TIME 3 COMPACT FLASH MEMORY 4 LOCK MODE 5 MEMORY PROTECT 6 SCENE EDIT 7 G/A BUS MODE 8 STMATRIX MODE 9 GROUP ASSIGN SAFE 10 G/A BUS ASSIGN SAFE 11 RECALL SAFE SELECT 12 SOLO ENABLE 13 INPUT SOLO SAFE 14 MONITOR MODE 15 MONITOR DELAY 16 MASTER CUE AFL POSITION 17 THEATER MODE 18 FADER MODE 19 AUTOMATION 20 DIRECT RECALL/ MUTE MASTER 21 SCENE INC/DEC 22 GPI OUT 23 CASCADE 24 MIDI PGM CHANGE 25 MIDI CTL CHANGE 26 MIDI SETTING 27 MIDI ECHO BACK 28 MIDI PGM CHANGE TABLE GPI* Cascade* 2 1 Bus Mode* Monitor* When the [UTILITY] switch is engaged the last selected parameter will be recalled. Parameter Basic Safety & Protection* B A T T . Parameter No. MIDI* * In addition to storing the above parameters in the internal PM5000 setup memory, they can be saved externally on CompactFlash memory cards. 3 When the desired parameter has been selected, the ﬁrst editable value for that parameter will appear on the parameter display. D A T E D T 2 0 0 3 / 0 2 / 1 0 57 Digital Control Section 4 When a parameter that can be edited is selected, the ﬁrst editable parameter will appear ﬂashing on the display. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys or the alphanumeric keypad to edit the value as required, and then press [ENTER]. When available, the next editable value will ﬂash and can be edited in the same way. To go back to the previous editable value press the [CLEAR/EXIT] key. NO T E Basic Functions Battery Check (Parameter No. U01) The PM5000 has an internal memory backup battery that maintains the console’s scene memory, setup memory, and time/date settings while the power is off. This function makes it possible to check the condition of the memory backup battery. The procedure described in step 4, above, is not necessary for parameters that are used only for conﬁrmation (non-editable parameters). Although some editable parameters only have a single value while others have two or more editable values spanning more than one display page, the basic procedure for all is as described above (display pages are switched automatically). You can press the [ENTER] or [CLEAR/EXIT] key a number of times to step forward or backward to the value to be edited. B A T T . 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to check or edit the required parameters. When all utility operations are complete press the [UTILITY] switch so that its indicator goes out to exit from the utility mode and return to normal console operation. C H E C K Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and one of the following status messages will appear on the parameter display: Battery voltage OK. O K Battery voltage low. L o w B a t t e r y ! No battery present. N o B a t t e r y ! NOTE For battery replacement, please contact your nearest qualiﬁed Yamaha service center or personnel. 58 Digital Control Section Date/Time (Parameter No. U02) CompactFlash Memory (Parameter No. U03) This is the date and time maintained by the PM5000’s internal clock. The date and time parameters are used to time-stamp scene memory and other data saved to external CompactFlash memory cards. This function allows internal scene and setup memory data to be saved to and loaded from external CompactFlash memory cards. A memory card formatting function is also provided. D A T E / T I M E 1 C F M E M O R Y NOTE Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and the year, month, and day values will appear on the parameter display while “DT” (date) ﬂashes. At this point you could use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select “TM” (time) for editing rather than the date, but the date parameters will appear ﬁrst since they are usually edited ﬁrst. New CompactFlash memory cards must be formatted before use. CompactFlash memory cards are formatted in accordance with DOS (FAT16) format, and ﬁles are handled in CSV format. Data saved to memory cards can then be loaded into a personal computer via a card reader or similar device, and the data can then be edited in a standard spreadsheet application (ﬁle names comply with the DOS standard: 8 characters plus the “.CSV” extension). D T 2 0 0 3 / 0 6 / 1 0 1 2 Press the [ENTER] key and the year value will ﬂash. The ﬂashing value can be edited by using the [INC] and [DEC] keys. When a value has been edited as required press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the entry and move on to the next value. Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and one of the displays shown below will appear. Select LOD (load), SAV (save), DEL (delete), or FMT (format), as necessary, and press the [ENTER] key. L O D : Y A M A H A 0 1 S A V : A L L D T 2 0 0 3 / 0 6 / 1 0 3 D E L : Y A M A H A 0 1 Once the day (rightmost) value has been edited and the [ENTER] key pressed, the date is conﬁrmed and “DT” will ﬂash again. Press the [INC] or [DEC] key and the display will change to the time parameters: hour, minutes, and seconds. The leftmost “hours” value will be ﬂashing and ready for editing. In the same way as in the date display, edit each value as necessary and press [ENTER] to move on to the next value. When the ﬁnal “seconds” value has been edited and the [ENTER] pressed the time entry is conﬁrmed and complete. T M 1 5 : 4 5 : 3 2 F M T : F O R M A T NOTE When the load or delete functions are selected the name of the CSV ﬁle on the card will appear on the display (the “.CSV” extension will not be shown). NOTE If a memory card is not inserted, the parameter display will not change even when you press [ENTER]. NO T E If the backup battery runs out the date and time will be reset to 2001/1/1, 0:00:00, and will begin keeping time from that value. 59 Digital Control Section ● Format 2 If you selected FMT and pressed [ENTER] in step 1, above, the following conﬁrmation message should appear. S U R E ? Y : 1 3 Number Usable Filename Characters (selected in sequence by the number key) Key N : 3 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to begin formatting the card, or [3] to abort the operation. Never remove a memory card from the card slot during a format operation. The following display will appear while the card is being formatted. 4 E x e c u t i n g 1 ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) - @ 2 A B C 3 D E F 4 G H I 5 J K L 6 M N O 7 P Q R S 8 T U V 9 W X Y Z When the ﬁle name has been entered press the [ENTER] key. The following conﬁrmation message will appear on the display. S U R E ? Y : 1 NO T E CompactFlash memory cards can also be formatted using a computer, but we recommend that you format cards using the PM5000 format function to minimize the possibility of load errors. ● Data Save 2 N : 3 NOTE If a ﬁle with the same name already exists the message will conﬁrm that it is OK to overwrite the existing ﬁle – “SURE” in the above will appear as “OVWR”. 5 After selecting SAV and pressing [ENTER] in step 1, above, you will need to select the type of data to be saved (below) and then press [ENTER] to conﬁrm. • ALL: All PM5000 data (scene memory, setup memory, program change table). Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to begin saving to the card, or [3] to abort the operation. Never remove a memory card from the card slot during a save operation. The following display will appear while the data is being saved. E x e c u t i n g • SCENE: Scene memory data (scenes 010 ~ 999). • SETUP: setup memory data (page 57). • TABLE: The program change table data set up via utility function parameter number U28. 3 ● Data Load 2 Whatever data type you select you will need to enter a name of up to 8 characters for the ﬁle to be saved. Enter a name so you can easily identify the data later. S A V : N E W _ D A T A After selecting LOD and pressing [ENTER] in step 1, above, you will need to select the data ﬁle you want to load from the memory card. L O D : Y A M A H A 0 1 3 When you have selected the ﬁle to be loaded press the [ENTER] key. The following conﬁrmation message will appear. NO T E File names are entered using capital letters only. The character set available for ﬁle names is somewhat different from the set available for scene titles (refer to the chart below). Spaces cannot be used in ﬁle names. 60 S U R E ? Y : 1 N : 3 Digital Control Section 4 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to begin loading the ﬁle, or [3] to abort the operation. Never remove a memory card from the card slot during a load operation. The following display will appear while the data is being loaded. E x e c u t i n g Lock Mode (Parameter No. U04) This function can be an assurance when you have to leave the console unattended during breaks, for example. It locks the panel switch and channel fader settings so they can’t be changed. Panel settings that are not savable to the scene memory such as the channel rotary controls, EQ [ON] switch, HPF [ON] switch, etc., cannot be locked. ● Data Delete 2 After selecting DEL and pressing [ENTER] in step 1, above, you will need to select the data ﬁle you want to delete from the memory card. L O C K D E L : O L D _ D A T A 3 When you have selected the ﬁle to be deleted press the [ENTER] key. The following conﬁrmation message will appear. S U R E ? Y : 1 4 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and one of the displays shown below will appear: either ON or OFF with ﬂash on the parameter display L O C K : O N N : 3 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to begin deleting the ﬁle, or [3] to abort the operation. Never remove a memory card from the card slot during a delete operation. The following display will appear while the data is being deleted. E x e c u t i n g 1 M O D E L O C K : O F F 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select either ON or OFF. 3 Press the [ENTER] key and the following conﬁrmation message will appear. Press the alphanumeric [1] key to conﬁrm your selection, or [3] to abort the operation. S U R E ? 1 : Y 3 : N When the lock mode is turned on, the [UTILITY] switch will be disengaged and “LOCK” will appear on the message display. In this state the system is locked and the only operation that can be performed is to engage the [UTLILITY] switch and repeat the above procedure to turn the lock mode off and restore normal operation. NOTE Even while the lock mode is active scene recall operations can be carried out from an external device. If fader and other settings are changed while the lock mode is active the pre-lock settings will be restored as soon as the lock mode is disengaged. 61 Digital Control Section Memory Protect (Parameter No. U05) Scene Edit (Parameter No. U06) This function can be used to temporarily protect the scene memory from being overwritten (only the recall operation is available). Using this function you can change the order of stored scenes (010 ~ 999) to match the ﬂow and sequence of a music or theatrical production. By then using the “theater mode” (described later) you can directly recall scenes in sequence simply by using the [INC] and [DEC] keys. This function also allows protection of individual scenes. M E M . P R O T E C T NO T E The scene edit function, described below, can be used to protect individual scenes rather than the entire scene memory. Also, when the memory protect function is active it is not possible to use the scene edit function or load scenes from an external CompactFlash memory card. 1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and one of the displays shown below will appear: either ON or OFF with ﬂash on the parameter display P R O T E C T : O N P R O T E C T : O F F S C E N E 1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and one of the following messages will appear on the parameter display. Select MOV (move), CLR (clear), CUT (cut), CPY (copy), INS (insert), or PRT (protect), as necessary, and press the [ENTER] key. Move scene: The contents of the target (“trg”) scene memory are moved to the destination (“dst”) scene number. This is similar to a cut-and paste operation on a personal computer. M O V : 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select either ON (memory protected) or OFF. NO T E If you attempt a scene save or delete operation while memory protection is active “PROT” will appear on the parameter display and the operation will be cancelled. E D I T t r g > d s t Clear scene: Clears the contents of the speciﬁed target (“trg”) scene number, resulting in a “NO DATA” scene. You can also select “ALL” to clear all scenes (except those that are protected). C L R : t r g Cut scene: Cuts the selected target (“trg”) scene. Since there is no associated “paste” operation, this function effectively clears the selected scene, but all subsequent scenes are shifted back so the operation does not produce a “NO DATA” scene. C U T : 62 t r g Digital Control Section Copy scene: The contents of the target (“trg”) scene memory are copied to the destination (“dst”) scene number. This is similar to a copy-and paste operation on a personal computer. C P Y : t r g > d s t Insert Scene: Inserts a “NO DATA” scene immediately before the speciﬁed target (“trg”) scene number. All subsequent scenes are shifted up one number to accommodate the inserted scene. I N S : t r g Protect Scene: Protects the speciﬁed target (“trg”) scene from being changed by copy and clear operations. P R T : 2 t r g : O F F The PM5000’s G/A and stereo matrix buses can be set up to suit a wide range of applications. These settings are saved in the console’s setup memory, and are common to all scenes. G/A Bus Mode (Parameter No. U07) Each pair G/A buses (odd and even) handled by the G/A master modules can be used as dual mono group buses (GROUP PRE PAN), a stereo group bus (GROUP POST PAN), or dual mono aux buses (page 32). The main difference between the aux and group mode is that in the aux mode the input-module [PRE] switch can be used to determine whether the signal is sent to the G/A bus preor post-fader, while in the group mode the send is always post-fader. The difference between the two group modes is that in mono mode the send is pre-pan (i.e. before the [PAN/BAL] control), while in the stereo mode the send is post-pan. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to specify the target and destination scene numbers, and the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm (scene protect ON or OFF is selected in the same way). The following message will appear on the parameter display. S U R E ? Y : 1 3 Bus Mode N : 3 Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to execute the selected operation, or [3] to abort. NO T E Protected scenes cannot be cleared, cut, or speciﬁed as the destination scene for a copy operation. G / A 1 B U S M O D E Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and it will become possible to select the target G/A bus via the parameter display: use the [INC] and [DEC] or alpha-numeric keys to select ALL (all G/A buses) or the desired pair (1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8), and then press the [ENTER] key. A L L : * * * * * * * * 1 - 2 : G R P P O S T 63 Digital Control Section Stereo Matrix Mode (Parameter No. U08) 3 - 4 : G R P P R E 5 - 6 : A U X The L and R buses that make up the console’s four stereo matrices can also be used as mono matrices, both buses in each pair carrying the same L+R signal. When a stereo matrix is set for mono operation the corresponding MONO MODE indicator in the matrix out section will light (page 37). 7 - 8 : A U X NO T E Asterisks in the “ALL” display, as shown above, indicate that the G/A buses are set to different modes. If all buses are set to the same mode “GRP POST”, “GRP PRE”, or “AUX” will appear. M A T R I X 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select GRP POST (group stereo), GRP PRE (group mono) or AUX, and the press the [ENTER] key. The following conﬁrmation message will appear on the parameter display. S U R E ? Y : 1 3 1 N : 3 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and it will become possible to select the target stereo matrix via the parameter display: use the [INC] and [DEC] or alpha-numeric keys to select ALL (all stereo matrices) or the desired pair (ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4), and then press the [ENTER] key. A L L : * * * * * * * * Press the alpha-numeric [1] key to execute the selected operation, or [3] to abort. S T 1 : S T NO T E As soon as the mode change is conﬁrmed the mode indicators on target G/A modules will change to reﬂect then new mode. All [CUE] switches will automatically be disengaged. 4 M O D E S T 2 : M O N O Make changes to other G/A buses as necessary. S T 3 : S T S T 4 : M O N O NOTE Asterisks in the “ALL” display, as shown above, indicate that the stereo matrices are set to different modes. If all stereo matrices are set to the same mode “ST” or “MONO” will appear. 64 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ST (stereo) or MONO. 3 Make changes to other stereo matrices as necessary. Digital Control Section Safety and Protection Functions This category includes a number of “recall safe” functions that can be set to protect speciﬁc parameters when a scene is recalled, thus maintaining the settings of the protected parameters. There’s also a solo safe function that can prevent improper operation of the solo system from playing havoc with the console’s output by either making it impossible to engage the solo mode, or by preventing muting of speciﬁed input channels when the solo mode is engaged. These settings are saved in the console’s setup memory, and are common to all scenes. Group Assign Safe (Parameter No. U09) This function prevents changes to input-channel mute and VCA group assignments due to scene recall operations, maintaining the current settings. The group assign safe function can be applied to all mute groups and/or all assign groups. G/A Bus Assign Safe (Parameter No. U10) This function prevents changes to the G/A master module [TO ST] and [TO MONO] switch settings due to scene recall operations, maintaining the current settings. The G/A bus assign safe function applies to all G/A master modules. G / A Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (protected – scene recall has no effect) or OFF (not protected – scene recall will affect settings). G / A G R P 1 A S N . S A F E S A F E : O F F A S N . S A F E Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and it will become possible to select the target group: select MUTE or VCA and press the [ENTER] key. M U T E : O F F V C A 2 : O N Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (protected – scene recall has no effect) or OFF (not protected – scene recall will affect settings). 65 Digital Control Section Recall Safe Select (Parameter No. U11) Solo Enable (Parameter No. U12) Each input, VCA master, master out, and matrix out channel on the PM5000 features [RECALL SAFE] and [FADER SAFE] switches that can be used to protect all of the corresponding channel’s settings or just the fader setting from scene recall operations, allowing the speciﬁed settings to be maintained while scene recall operations only affect unprotected channels or settings. This functions as the master ON/OFF switch for entire recall safe system. There’s also a mute safe function for all input channels which, when active, exempts the channels on which the [RECALL SAFE] switch is engaged from MUTE MASTER switch mute operation when the channel is assigned to a mute group. Enables or disables the console’s solo function. If DISABLE is selected here the meter-bridge [SOLO MODE] switch will have no effect. The setting of this function cannot be changed while the solo mode is engaged. S O L O E N A B L E NO T E Protecting input channels from mute operation using the [RECALL SAFE] switch is not affected by the master recall safe ON/OFF setting. Although the same [RECALL SAFE] switch is used for both scene-recall and mute protection, the two functions are essentially unrelated. If, for example, the recall safe master setting is OFF but the mute safe function ON, engaging a [RECALL SAFE] will protect the corresponding channel from mute master operation but not from scene recalls. Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ENABLE (solo mode enabled) or DISABLE (solo mode disabled). S O L O : D I S A B L E NOTE If the solo mode is engaged it will not be possible to change the setting to “DISABLE”. If the solo mode is disengaged “ENABLE” will begin ﬂashing on the display and it will be possible to change the setting as required. R C L 1 S A F E S E L Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and it will become possible to select the target function: select RCL SAFE (recall safe) or MUT SAFE (mute safe) and press the [ENTER] key. Recall Safe: Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the recall safe function for all [RECALL SAFE] switches. R C L S A F E : O N Mute Safe: Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the mute safe function for all input-channel [RECALL SAFE] switches. M U T 2 66 S A F E : O F F Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn the selected function ON or OFF. Digital Control Section Input Solo Safe (Parameter No. U13) The PM5000 allows independent solo monitoring for the input channel, VCA and master sections: when the solo mode is active only channels on which the [CUE] switch is engaged are output while all other channels are muted. The input solo safe function can be applied to speciﬁed input channels so that they are not muted when the solo function is engaged. Monitor These functions are used to set up the operator’s monitoring environment and monitor output parameters. The three monitor functions described in this section are stored in the PM5000 setup memory and are common to all scenes. Monitor Mode (Parameter No. U14) I N 1 S O L O S A F E Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and it will become possible to select the input channel to which the solo safe function will be applied (the last selected channel will initially be displayed). The console’s three monitor sources are the cue signal, 2-track inputs, and stereo master signal, with priority in the order just listed. In other words, if the [CUE] and [2TR IN1/2] switches are off the stereo master signal will normally appear at the monitor outputs at all times. In some situations, however, you might want to have no signal at the monitor outputs during normal operation. This function determines whether the stereo master signal will or will not normally appear at the monitor outputs. C H 0 1 : O N 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select an input channel, then press the [ENTER] key. NO T E Consecutive input-channel numbers are selected, with stereo input channels counted as one channel. 3 4 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn the function ON (the channel will be muted when solo is engaged) or OFF (the channel will not be muted when solo is engaged). M O N I T O R M O D E Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select STEREO (the stereo master signal will normally appear at the monitor outputs) or MUTE (the stereo master signal will not normally appear at the monitor outputs). M O N I : S T E R E O Set the solo safe function for other input channels as required. 67 Digital Control Section Monitor Delay (Parameter No. U15) When the monitor speakers are located a signiﬁcant distance from the main house speakers the resulting delay between the two sources can severely reduce the intelligibility of the sound. In such situations the PM5000’s internal digital delay system can be used to delay the monitor output so that it becomes “time aligned” with the main house sound for maximum clarity. 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to set the selected parameter as required. NOTE If the unit type is changed after the delay value is set, the delay value will be recalculated and displayed according to the unit type selected (sound travels at 343.59 meters per second, or 1,127.26 feet per second under normal conditions). This is just an approximation, however, and for maximum accuracy it is advisable to set the delay value after the unit type has been speciﬁed. U N I T : m s e c T I M E : 3 0 0 m s T I M E : 3 3 8 f t T I M E : 1 0 3 m Unit type changed. U N I T : f e e t M O N I D E L A Y Unit type changed. 1 U N I T : m e t e r Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and one of the monitor delay parameters will appear on the parameter display: DELAY (the master delay switch), UNIT (the delay units to be used: milliseconds, feet, or meters), or TIME (the actual delay value). Normally you will start by turning the DELAY parameter ON, and then set the delay time as required. Select a parameter and press the [ENTER] key. Master switch: Turns the monitor delay ON or OFF. When ON the MONITOR DELAY LED will light. D E L A Y : O F F Delay units: Determines whether the delay time will be set in milliseconds (msec), meters (meter), or feet. U N I T : m s e c Delay value: The actual delay value based on the selected UNIT type. The maximum available delay is 1,800 milliseconds. T I M E : 68 3 0 0 m s 300/1000 (sec) x 1127.26 (feet/sec) = 338.178 (feet) 300/1000 (sec) x 343.59 (meter/sec) = 103.077 (meter) Digital Control Section Master Cue AFL Position (Parameter No. U16) The cue signal from each master section can be switched to pre- or –post-fader via the [MASTER PFL] switch in the monitor control section (page 43). This function determines whether the cue signal is taken from before or after the master [ON] switch. If the cue signal is taken from before the master [ON] switch it will appear at the monitor outputs even if the main outputs are turned off. Scene Recall The following functions can provide maximum scene recall efﬁciency in a wide range of applications. You can also turn the scene memory function off altogether to prevent accidental operation. These settings are stored in the PM5000 setup memory. Theater Mode (Parameter No. U17) When the theater mode is engaged it is possible to directly recall scenes in sequence using only the [INC] and [DEC] keys. This only applies to scene numbers 010 through 999, and empty “NO DATA” scenes will automatically be skipped. C U E P O S I T I O N Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select POST (normal operation: post master [ON] switch) or PRE (pre master [ON] switch). P O S : P O S T T H E A T E R M O D E O N Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (theater mode on) or OFF (theater mode off). T H E A T E R : O F F NOTE When using the theater mode it can be handy to specify a “temporary scene.” This can be done simply by entering a scene number via the alpha-numeric keys and pressing [ENTER] (don’t press [RECALL]). Then, regardless of the currently active scene, the [INC] and [DEC] keys will increment or decrement and directly select scenes starting from the speciﬁed temporary scene number. This ability to “pre load” a speciﬁc scene can make critically-timed transitions much easier to execute. NOTE GPI input (page 72) and MIDI control change messages (page 77) can also be used to effect scene changes. NOTE “THTR” will appear on the message display while the theater mode is engaged. 69 Digital Control Section Fader Mode (Parameter No. U18) Automation (Parameter No. U19) Normally the console’s motor fader system will physically move the faders to recalled settings when a scene recall or preview operation occurs. This function makes it possible to defeat the motor-drive system so that the faders do not move when scenes are changed (the faders levels do change internally). This function can be used to turn the PM5000’s scene memory off. When the scene memory function is turned off all recall, preview, motor fader, safe switch, MIDI, and GPI functions are also disabled so that the PM5000 functions like a tradition analog console. A U T O M A T I O N F A D E R M O D E Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (motor faders ON) or OFF (motor faders OFF). Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (scene memory ON) or OFF (scene memory OFF). A U T O : O F F M O T O R : O N NOTE NO T E When the motor faders are turned off level changes will result in a mismatch between the internal fader levels and the physical fader positions. This situation is indicated by a ﬂashing [FADER SAFE] switch. If you want to match the fader’s position with the internal level either press the [FADER SAFE] switch or move the fader slightly. In either case the motor drive for that fader will be temporarily engaged and the fader’s position will be adjusted to match the internal level (after this has been done the [FADER SAFE] switch will stop ﬂashing and will either light or go out according to the current fader-safe status). NO T E When the console is turned on the faders will initially move to match the internally set levels even if the fader mode function is OFF. 70 “AUTOMODE OFF” will appear on the parameter display while the scene memory is turned off. Even when the scene memory is disabled the channel [RECALL SAFE] switches can be used for mute safe operation (page 66). Digital Control Section Direct Recall/ Mute Master (Parameter No. U20) ● Scene Assignment In addition to their normal function as mute master switches, the console’s 8 MUTE MASTER switches can also be used as DIRECT RECALL switches for scene recall. In this case the scene numbers to be recalled by each direct recall switch must be assigned as described below. 1 Press [ENTER] after selecting “DIR RECALL” to move on to scene assignment. The parameter display should look like this. D I R 1 : - - - “DIR1” through “DIR8” on the display corresponds to MUTE MASTER switches [1] through [8]. 2 D . R C L / M . M S T R Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select MUTE MASTER (mute master operation) or DIR RECALL (direct scene recall operation). M U T E M A S T E R D I R R E C A L L Lights when “MUTE MASTER” selected. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the switch for which a scene assignment is to be made and press the [ENTER] key. When the scene number parameter (rightmost) parameter begins ﬂashing use the [INC] and [DEC] keys or the alpha-numeric keypad to enter the number of the scene to be recalled by that switch, and press [ENTER] again. Unassigned status “---” also can be selected. D I R 1 : 1 2 8 3 Assign scene numbers to the remaining switches in the same way. NOTE Switches that you don’t intend to use can be left unassigned (“---” on the display). Unassigned status will also automatically be set if an assigned scene is cleared to “NO DATA” status using the U06 utility function. Also, if the scenes are re-ordered the switch assignments will be automatically changed accordingly. Lights when “DIR RECALL” selected. NOTE When the MUTE MASTER switches are set for direct recall operation, the only master mute function that will apply to the input channels is VCA muting (page 24). Unassigned switches cannot be used for group muting. Mute master control via MIDI control change messages is also disabled. NO T E The mode cannot be switched to “DIR RECALL” while any of the switches are engaged in mute master mode. Disengage all mute masters prior to changing the setting. 71 Digital Control Section GPI Out (Parameter No. U22) GPI The PM5000’s rear-panel GPI port provides 3 input and 8 output channels for GPI pulse communication with external equipment. One of the input channels controls talkback on/off (same function as the TB [ON] switch). One of the functions in this section determines whether or not the remaining two input channels are active for scene increment and decrement control. The second function determines which of the 8 output channels are used for fader start signal transmission and scene linking. This function makes it possible to specify the GPI outputs to be used for fader start control (a signal is sent when a fader is raised above –60 dB or lowered to -∞) and for scene linking. Although 8 GPI outputs are provided so that these operations can be separated, it is possible to assign control to the same GPI outputs. Fader start settings are maintained in the console’s setup memory and are common to all scenes, while scene link settings apply to the current scene and are stored in the scene memory via a scene store operation. Scene Inc/Dec (GPI In) (Parameter No. U21) The GPI inputs can be used for sequential incrementing or decrementing of the PM5000 scene memory from external equipment. Scenes 010 through 999 can be recalled using this capability, and empty “NO DATA” scenes are automatically skipped. These settings are maintained in the PM5000 setup memory. NO T E Scene incrementing and decrementing via the GPI port is slightly different from the way the panel [INC] and [DEC] keys function in that incrementing and decrementing will always occur from the current scene – the “temporary scene” that can be used with the [INC] and [DEC] keys (page 69) cannot be used with GPI port control. If the preview function is active and a GPI scene change command is received, the preview function will be disengaged. G P I I N C / D E C Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select ON (GPI scene recall enabled) or OFF (GPI scene recall disabled). I N C / D E C : O N 72 G P I O U T Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select either the FADER START or SCENE LINK function for setup. F A D E R S T A R T S C E N E L I N K Digital Control Section ● Fader Start ● Scene Linking 1 1 After selecting FADER START and pressing the [ENTER] key a display like the one shown below will appear. The example display indicates that the input channel 34 fader (“CH34”) will produce a signal at GPI output number 3 (“GP3”) when fader is raised above –60 dB (“STR”). C H 3 4 : S T R : G P 3 2 Using the [INC] and [DEC] keys to set each parameter and the [ENTER] key to move on to the next parameter, set the fader start parameters in sequence as required: channel, fade type (STR or END), and the GPI output number. To prevent operational errors select “---” for GPI outputs you do not intend to use. The ﬁrst of the two example displays below shows the channel 21 fader set to produce a signal at GPI output number 5 when the fader is lowered to -∞, while the second example shows the channel 21 fader set to produce no GPI output. C H 2 1 : E N D : G P 5 After selecting SCENE LINK and pressing the [ENTER] key a display like the one shown below will appear. O U T 2 3 P O R T : G P 3 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys or the alpha-numeric keypad to select the GPI output to be used for scene linking of the current scene, and then press [ENTER]. If you do not want GPI output to be produced when the current scene is recalled set this parameter to “---” to prevent operation errors. O U T P O R T : G P 8 O U T P O R T : - - - Perform a scene store operation to store the settings you have just made to the scene memory (page 53). Note that your scene link settings will be lost if you recall a different scene before storing the settings. NOTE C H 2 1 : E N D : - - - 3 The settings cannot be store to a protected scene. Be sure to disable scene protection before storing the settings (page 62). Set other channels in the same way, as required. NO T E Fader start signal output occurs with both manual and motordriven fader operation (and is enabled even when the console’s motor drive system is disabled). For this reason it is important to consider whether you want GPI output triggered by both manual fader and automatic scene recall operations when making GPI output settings. Remember that if you set a fader to produce GPI output when it is moved manually, a scene recall that moves the fader in the same range will also produce GPI output. 73 Digital Control Section Cascade The PM5000 allows cascade connection to other consoles for master-slave operation. Two types of cascade connection are possible: type “A” for cascade connection of two PM5000 consoles, and type “B” for connection to PM4000/3500 series consoles (in the latter case the PM5000 is the master console). RS422 RS232C RS232C RS422 RS422 RS422 RS422 Cross Cable (Type A) MASTER MASTER MASTER SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE A A B PM5000 (Master) PM5000 (Slave) PM4000 SLAVE CONNECT RS232C MASTER MASTER SLAVE A CUE/SOLO MUTE PM3500 VCA VCA 1-8 CUE CTRL OFF OFF OFF CONNECT SLAVE MSTR SLAVE MSTR 1~4 Dedicated Straight Cable (Type B) RS422 B OFF OFF SLAVE MSTR SLAVE MSTR VCA/MUTE CONTROL 5~8 DISCON. CONNECT FAN PM 3500 1~4 VCA CTRL SLAVE PHANTOM MASTER HIGH (+48V) ON LOW OFF MIDI IN SLAVE 5~8 MASTER OUT CUE SOLO PM 3000 PM 4000 THRU B PM5000 (Master) PM4000 or PM35000 (Slave) A standard 9-pin RS-422 cross cable can be used for type A connection. A dedicated straight cable must be used for type B connection. Refer to the appendix of this manual for connector pin assignments. Please observe the following points when making cascade connections: • Make sure the power to both consoles is off when connecting the cascade cable. • After making the cascade connection, turn both consoles on and wait for all start-up processing to ﬁnish before operating the consoles. Also, do not operate one console while the other is turned off. NO T E The two cascade connection types cannot be used simultaneously. If both types of connection are made the type A connection will take priority. By connecting the master outs and matrix outs of the slave console to the master out and matrix out SUB IN connectors of the master PM5000 console the slave console can be used as an “expansion” console, increasing the number of available channels. NO T E On the salve PM5000 cascade-connected by TYPE A connector, setup memory data cannot be loaded from a memory card. 74 Digital Control Section Linked Functions When two PM5000 consoles are cascaded for channel expansion complete functional linking can be achieved as well (you can specify which functions are to be linked as described below). It is advisable only to link the functions you intend to use, however, to prevent confusion. The CUE function, in particular, can be bi-directionally linked between the consoles so that, for example, if an input channel on the slave console is cued channels in the same CUE group on the master console will also be engaged. O: Linked, X: Not linked Master → Slave Exceptions (Not Linked) Fader & Level O - X Mute O - X Mute Master ON/OFF O - X O (Bi-directional link possible) - O O - X Linked Functions (Type A) Slave Operation VCA Group 1~12 Mute Group 1~8 Cue Group Select Cue/Solo Last Cue (ON/OFF: MIX CUE switching) Cue Stack O - X Solo Mode (ON/OFF) O - X Master Solo Select - Not linked O: Independent operation O: Linked VCA groups conform to master settings Scene Recall Same Scene Number O - Scene Store Same Scene Number O - X NO T E Please note that the various utility settings remain active for linked functions. For this reason unexpected problems such as faders not moving, inability to save a scene because the scene is protected, master mute not functioning because the MUTE MASTER switches are assigned to direct scene recall, and others can occur. Plan your cascade setup carefully to avoid confusion. Since the functions provided by the PM5000 and other consoles differ, the functions that can be cascade-linked differ as well. Linked Functions (Type B) Master → Slave Exceptions (Not Linked) Slave Operation O - X VCA Group 1~8 Level (VCA level only. Faders do not move.) Mute (Slave VCA level set to -∞) O - X Mute Group 1~8 Mute Master ON/OFF *1 O - X Cue Group Select (Input channels only) O (Bi-directional link possible) - O: Master cue group not updated when slave cue engaged Solo Mode (ON/OFF) *2 O (Bi-directional link possible) - O: Slave solo mode cannot be disengaged from master - Not linked Cue/Solo Master Solo Select O: Independent operation *1 PM3500 series consoles have no mute group function. *2 The PM4000M (monitor version) has no solo function. NO T E If cue is engaged on the slave PM4000/3500 the PM5000 cue groups are input channel only. Further, since the number of VCA groups is different VCA group 9~12 operations on the PM5000 have no effect on the slave PM4000/3500. NO T E Be sure to set the slave PM4000/3500 console cascade mode to “SLAVE”. 75 Digital Control Section Cascade (Parameter No. U23) Cue Solo Function To allow fuss-free type A connection of PM5000 consoles, the PM5000 is shipped from the factory with all of the function links listed in the above chart ON. If you want to turn some of these off, use the following parameter on the slave PM5000. In a type B connection, turn the master PM5000 console CUE/SOLO function link ON if you want to enable cue/solo control from the slave console. C U E / S O L : O N Scene Recall S C N Scene Store NO T E If the physical cascade connection and hardware MASTER/ SLAVE selection has been completed, the following parameters turn function linking on or off the instant they are set. If a link is turned OFF it may be impossible to reproduce the previous slave settings. To avoid confusion it is advisable to make the hardware connections and settings after setting the software parameters. S C N 2 3 C A S C A D E Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys or the alpha-numeric keypad to select VCA1 ~ VCA12 (VCA groups 1 ~ 12), MUTE1 ~ MUTE8 (mute groups 1 ~ 8), CUE/ SOL (the cue/solo function), SCN RCL (scene recall), or SCN STR (scene store), and then press the [ENTER] key. VCA Group 1 (~ 12) V C A 0 1 : O N Mute Group 1 (~ 8) M U T E 1 : O N 76 S T R : O N Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn linking of the selected function ON or OFF. S C N 1 R C L : O N S T R : O F F Set the links for other functions in the same way, as required. Digital Control Section MIDI The MIDI IN, OUT, and THRU connectors provided on the rear panel allow PM5000 operation to be linked to external MIDI devices. If the PM5000 MIDI OUT connector is connected to the MIDI IN connector of an external device, the external device can be controlled by operations performed on the PM5000. On the other hand if the MIDI OUT of the external device is connected to the MIDI IN of the PM5000, the external device can remotely control the PM5000. The connections can also be made both ways, allowing bi-directional control. The MIDI THRU connector can be used to retransmit MIDI commands received at the MIDI IN connector to another MIDI device. MIDI commands that can be used with the PM5000 can be largely divided into Program Change and Control Change commands. The former apply to scene recall operations, while the latter apply directly to fader and switch operation. In other words, program change commands received from an external MIDI controller can be used to recall PM5000 scenes, while control change commands can be used to directly control the faders and switches. MIDI provides a greater range and degree of control than the GPI interface. You could, for example, use MIDI to continuously vary a stage lighting effect in response to a PM5000 fader operation. MIDI If the MIDI Echo Back function is turned on (page 82), MIDI commands received at the PM5000 MIDI IN connector are mixed with internally generated MIDI commands and transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. IN RS232C OUT GPI THRU RS422 MASTER SLAVE A B MIDI Control from external device A Control to external device B. IN RS232C OUT GPI Commands from external device A retransmitted to external device C. THRU RS422 MASTER SLAVE A B PM5000 MIDI IN OUT THRU Lighting Console PM5000 In order to effectively use the PM5000’s MIDI capabilities it is necessary to have a good grasp not only of the MIDI standard itself, but of the MIDI functions provided by both the PM5000 and the external MIDI devices used as well. For example, although the standard MIDI program change numbers only allow selection of 128 program numbers, the PM5000 has 1000 scene memories that need to be accessible. In the same way, the basic MIDI standard provides control change capability for up to 128 different parameters – a ﬁgure that is exceeded by the PM5000’s controllable faders and switches by a wide margin. 77 Digital Control Section Program Change The PM5000 employs a number of “strategies” to ensure full functionality with the standard MIDI implementation. For example, in order to be able to handle recall of all 1,000 PM5000 scenes via MIDI program change commands, bank select commands (a type of control change command) are used in conjunction with the program change messages in the same way that they are used in many synthesizers and tone modules. The parameters described below can be used to create a “program change table” that speciﬁes which scene numbers will be recalled by which MIDI bank and program change numbers. The reverse is true, too: when a scene is recalled via the PM5000 controls the corresponding bank and program change numbers can be transmitted to an external MIDI device. MIDI Channel/ Bank No. Program No. Scene No. 1 1 10 1 2 11 1 3 12 1 4 13 : : : 1 128 137 2 1 138 2 2 139 : : : 2 128 265 3 1 266 : : : 3 128 393 : : : 8 94 999 8 95 NO ASSIGN : : : 16 1 NO ASSIGN : : : 16 128 NO ASSIGN 0 3 : SINGLE MULTI 78 OMNI BANK 3 9 3 In order to provide the most ﬂexible operation with external MIDI devices, the PM5000 provides two MIDI program change modes: SINGLE and MULTI. Sixteen MIDI channels (1 through 16) are available for transmission and reception of MIDI commands, and in large MIDI setups it is common to assign a different channel number to each MIDI device so that programs can be recalled independently on each device. Also part of the standard MIDI implementation is an “OMNI” mode which, when enabled, allows commands to be received on any or all 16 MIDI channels. When the OMNI mode is disable MIDI commands can only be received via the device’s speciﬁed MIDI channel(s). The PM5000 takes advantage of this situation in the SINGLE mode, using four combinations of bank select number, OMNI ON/OFF status, and a separately speciﬁable MIDI receive channel to specify how the program change table will be used for scene recall. Receive MIDI MODE 1 2 3 : Transmit MIDI Channel Bank number referred to in table Maximum Selectable Scenes Transmit/Receive Messages MIDI Channel Bank number referred to in table Bank Select Program Change OFF OFF RX CH Same number as RX CH 128 TX CH 1 - 1~128 ON OFF 1~16 Same number as RX CH 128 TX CH 1 - 1~128 OFF ON RX CH Received bank number 1000 TX CH Bank number corresponding to selected scene 1~16 1~128 ON ON 1~16 Received bank number 1000 TX CH Bank number corresponding to selected scene 1~16 1~128 1000 Smallest bank number corresponding to selected scene - 1~128 (Smallest program number corresponding to selected scene) - - 1~16 Same as received MIDI channel - Digital Control Section Note that the PM5000 uses the same number of bank and MIDI channel numbers (1 ~ 16). If the bank number referred to in the program change table is limited to the same number as the receive channel, then a maximum of 128 scenes can be recalled from an external device. But if bank select numbers are used, and if the MIDI channel numbers embedded in received program change commands are converted to bank numbers, all 1,000 scenes can be recalled directly from an external device. In the same way scene recall operations performed on the PM5000 the corresponding program change commands can be transmitted according to the above conversion table. NO T E The above explanation may seem a little confusing, but this system has been implemented to allow effective connection with the widest possible range of external MIDI devices. For example the SINGLE mode (OMNI OFF, BANK OFF) allows some control even with external MIDI devices that have limited capabilities. If an external MIDI device is capable of bank number transmission it can be used to recall scenes on the PM5000. If the PM5000 OMNI mode is enabled scene recall can be effected from multiple external MIDI devices. You could also organize your scenes in the PM5000 scene memory into banks, transmitting the appropriate bank numbers from the controlling MIDI device to access your scenes. NO T E Bank select messages should be transmitted as a pair of MSB (CC#10) and LSB (CC#32), and the MSB value should be always set to “0”. The bank numbers can be speciﬁed by LSB value (0 ~ 15). Control Change Control change command reception and transmission are relatively simple compared to program change commands. Each PM5000 fader and switch is pre-assigned a number that is used for both reception and transmission. Parameter Category Name Control Change MIDI Channel Total (max.) NRPN Control Number (CC#) Input channel 1~30 (MSB) 30 1 1-5, 7-31 Input channel 1~30 (LSB) 30 1 33-37, 39-63 Input channel 31~52 (MSB) 22 2 1-5, 7-23 Input channel 31~52 (LSB) 22 2 33-37, 39-55 VCA(MSB) 12 3 1-5, 7-13 VCA(LSB) 12 3 33-37, 39-45 MSB (CC#99) 0 Level (Fader) ON Switch LSB (CC#99) Value (hex) 1-5, 7-31 1 1-5, 7-23 2 1-5, 7-13 Input channel 52 4 1-5, 7-23, 33-37, 39-55 3 1-5, 7-23, 33-37, 39-55 ST AUX 12 4 64-75 3 64-75 GROUP/AUX 8 4 76-83 3 76-83 ST MATRIX 4 4 84-87 3 84-87 MATRIX 8 4 88-95 3 88-95 ST MASTER 2 4 102, 103 3 102, 103 MONO 1 4 104 3 104 VCA MUTE 12 5 1-5, 7-13 4 1-5, 7-13 MUTE MASTER 8 5 14-21 4 14-21 0x0000(-∞) ~ 0x3FFF(+10dB) Transmit (MSB is NRPN) OFF: 0x00 ON: 0x7F Receive (MSB is NRPN) 0x00~0x3F: OFF 0x40~0x7F: ON Group Mute * The number of input channels refers to the number of input modules. There is no differentiation between mono and stereo modules. For example, to control the fader levels of input channels 1 ~ 30 from an external device, set the MIDI channel to “1” and specify the control numbers (01 ~ 05, 07 ~ 31) and the control value as required. Normally the control value is a number from 0 to 127 (7 bits), but higher resolution is required for fader control. For this reason the PM5000 uses two values – MSB and LSB – to provide 1,024-step control (the MSB and LSB are both 7-bit values providing a total of 14 bits, but only the highest 10 bits are actually used). 79 Digital Control Section ● NRPN Control MIDI Program Change (Parameter No. U24) In the PM5000 NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter number) data can be used for the same control functions as control change commands. NRPN is actually a subset of the MIDI control change numbers (CC#99, 98), and is commonly employed to allow system exclusive data transfer between different devices. Because of their special status, NRPN commands are omitted from the control change commands (refer to the above chart). Determines whether the PM5000 will transmit and receive program change commands. The program change table to be used is also speciﬁed here. The PM5000 panel controls can be controlled using either control change or NRPN commands. The parameters described below allow control change and NRPN control to be independently enabled and disabled as required. If both are enable control change commands take priority. M I D I 1 NO T E As with program change commands, control change commands are transmitted and received via speciﬁc MIDI channels. The transmit and receive MIDI channels speciﬁed by the following parameters (TX CH, RX CH), however, do not directly affect control change operation (they do affect NRPN and scene number increment/decrement control which has independently programmable transmission and reception). P G M C H G Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the required setting, then press the [ENTER] key. OFF: Program change commands will not be transmitted or received. P C : O F F NO T E ON: The corresponding program change command will be transmitted when a successful scene recall operation has been executed, but no data will be transmitted when an empty “NO DATA” scene is recalled. If the MUTE MASTER switches are assigned to direct scene recall (page 71), MUTE MASTER control via control change commands will be ignored. If the preview mode is active any received control change or NRPN commands will affect the currently active scene rather than the scene being previewed. Also, continuous level variations produced by fade time variations between scene changes will not be transmitted. P C : O N LOCAL: The corresponding program change command will be transmitted whenever a scene recall operation is performed, regardless of the results. P C : L O C A L 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the program change table to be used: either the pre-programmed DEFAULT program change table, or the userprogrammable USER table. DEFAULT: The pre-programmed program change table. D E F A U L T USER: A user-deﬁned program change table conﬁgured via the function described on page 83. U S E R 80 Digital Control Section MIDI Control Change (Program No. U25) MIDI Setting (Parameter No. U26) The functions in this section determine whether the PM5000 sends and receives control change commands, as well as whether NRPN will be enabled. This is the basic PM5000 setting for MIDI transmission and reception, including selection of the SINGLE or MULTI mode for program change transmission and reception. M I D I C T L C H G M I D I 1 Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the required setting, then press the [ENTER] key. 1 S E T T I N G Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the required setting, then press the [ENTER] key. Control Change C T L : O F F NRPN RX CH (Receive Channel): Program change commands will be received on the speciﬁed channel. R X C H : 1 0 N R P N : O N 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn the selected parameter ON (reception and transmission enabled) or OFF (reception and transmission disabled). TX CH (Transmit Channel): Program change commands will be transmitted on the speciﬁed channel. T X C H : 1 0 C T L : O N 3 Set the other functions as required. OMNI: When ON program change commands can be received on all 16 MIDI channels. When OFF reception occurs only on the speciﬁed RX CH. O M N I : O F F MODE: When set to SINGLE operation is determined by the RX CH, BANK, and OMNI parameters. When set to MULTI the OMNI and BANK settings are ignored and both parameters are forced ON. M O D E : M U L T I BANK: Bank select numbers will be received when this parameter is ON. B A N K : O N 81 Digital Control Section NO T E The transmit and receive channels are not used for control change transmission and reception (page 79). Since they are used for NRPN and scene number INC/DEC transmission and reception, it is necessary to set the transmit and receive channels of the external MIDI device to match those of the PM5000. 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to set the selected parameter as required. 3 Set the other functions as required. MIDI Echo Back (Parameter No. 27) Independently determines whether program change and control change commands internally generated by the PM5000 will be mixed with program change and control change messages received at the MIDI IN connector and transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. M I D I 1 E C H O Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select the required setting, then press the [ENTER] key. Program Change Echo P G M E C H O : O F F Control Change Echo C T L 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to turn the selected parameter ON (echo enabled) or OFF (echo disabled). P G M 3 82 E C H O : O F F E C H O : O N Set other MIDI functions as required. Digital Control Section MIDI Program Change Table (Parameter No. 28) ● Editing the User Table The program change table determines the correspondence between the PM5000 scene numbers and the program change numbers that will be received and transmitted. The table itself is a simple combination of MIDI channel/bank number, program number, and scene number parameters, but the way it operates will depend on the MIDI mode setting (page 78). The table can be initialed to return it to the initial factory-preset state when you want to start a new table from scratch. 1 M I D I P G M 1 5 : 1 2 8 : 9 9 9 2 Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys or the alpha-numeric keypad to set each parameters and then press the [ENTER] key to move ahead. 3 Repeat step 2 until the program change table is complete. NOTE T B L In this table one scene number is assigned to each combination of MIDI channel/bank number and program number. Any scene number (000 ~ 999) can be assigned to each program change combination, so it is possible to assign the same scene to different external program change commands. The program change command transmitted by a PM5000 scene recall operation, however, will always be unique. The program change data transmitted (MIDI channel/bank number and program change number) will depend on the selected MIDI mode and other settings. Refer to “Program Change” on page 78 for more details. Press [ENTER] after selecting the above display and a display like the one shown below will appear. Use the [INC] and [DEC] keys to select SETTING (edit the user program change table) or INITIALIZE (initialize the table to its initial factory settings). S E T T I N G I N I T I A L I Z E After selecting SETTING and pressing the [ENTER] key a display like the one shown below will appear. From left to right the parameters on the display are: MIDI channel/bank number (1 ~ 16) : Program number (1 ~ 128) : Scene Number (000 ~ 999). ● Initialize User Table 1 After selecting INITALIZE and pressing the [ENTER] key a display like the one shown below will appear. S U R E ? Y : 1 2 N : 3 Press the alpha-numeric keypad [1] key to execute the initialization operation, or the [3] key to abort. After initialization the contents of the user table will be the same as the default table. 83 Appendix Appendix Installing Options And Changing Internal Switch Settings Please refer module installation and internal setting changes to your Yamaha dealer or one of the Yamaha service centers. The following optional (sold separately) modules and transformer are available: ● Input Section Modules • MNM5000: Monaural input module. • MNR5000: Rear panel for monaural input module (includes wiring). • STM5000: Stereo input module. • STR5000: Rear panel for stereo input module (includes wiring). Module Removal and Replacement The procedure for removal of top-panel modules is the same for the input and master section. ● Top-panel Module Removal 1 Turn the console’s power supply OFF. 2 Loosen the screws at the top and bottom of the module. ● Master Section Options • • • • SAM5000: Stereo Aux master module. GAM5000: Group/Aux master module. SMM5000: Stereo/Mono master module. MON5000: Monitor module. ● Other Options • BLM5000: Blank module (includes rear panel). • ITR5000: Input transformer. The process of replacing faulty modules or changing internal switch settings requires removal and replacement of the modules. A Philips-head (“+”) screwdriver will be required. Before performing any of the operations described below be sure that the power supply is turned OFF. 84 The screws are ﬁtted with stop-washers that prevent them from being removed entirely. 3 Once loosened, grasp both screws ﬁrmly and pull straight upward to remove the module. This completes removal of master modules. The mono and stereo input modules are wired to the rear panel. Exercise caution when removing the modules so as not to damage the wiring. Once the module being removed is free of the top panel, gently lay it on its side on the top panel, without placing undue strain on the wiring. Appendix 4 Unplug the wiring connectors at the top (rear) end of the module that connect the module to the rear panel. There are two connectors on both mono and stereo modules, but their locations are slightly different. ● Removing Rear Panel Input Units When removing rear-panel input units that correspond to each mono and stereo input channel (these are available as options), it is necessary to ﬁrst remove the corresponding input channel and all connected wiring, as described above. 1 Make sure that the rear-panel unit you are about to remove corresponds to the input channel you have removed, then unscrew the upper and lower screws and remove the input unit. PM5000 rear panel Unplug these connectors Module 5 Press the snap button on the wiring harness to release the wire bundle, then remove the wiring from the module. When removing the wiring, be careful that the connectors don’t get caught on the module frame. This completes removal of the input module. 2 Wiring bundle Module frame rear-panel unit Press the snap button Press the snap button on the wiring harness to release the wire bundle, then remove the wiring from the console frame. Carefully pull the wiring and connectors through the rear-panel opening, making sure that the connectors don’t catch on any part of the console frame. This completes removal of the rear-panel unit. Meter bridge Take care that the connectors don’t get caught here Removal direction rear-panel unit Rear panel Faders View from above the console 85 Appendix ● Module Installation Input Transformer Installation The module installation procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure described above. Rear Panel Input Units First pass the wiring through the opening in the rear panel and pull it through to the open module area. Then attach the rear-panel unit with two screws. The PM5000 input modules feature electronically balanced inputs that do not normally require any additional isolation. If you would rather have conventional transformer-isolated balanced inputs, optional ITR5000 input transformers can be installed. NOTE The input impedance will change when the transformers are installed: electronically balanced input impedance = 3 kΩ, transformer input impedance = 1 kΩ. Top-panel Modules When an input module is being installed it is ﬁrst necessary to connect the wiring from the corresponding rear-panel input unit to the connectors on the module and secure the wire bundle in the wiring harness. When inserting the module into the console make sure that the connectors on the bottom of the module are aligned with the corresponding connectors on console frame. Input modules have two connectors (see the illustration below), while master modules have three. Guide pins are provided to make alignment easy – as long as the guide pins are properly inserted into the corresponding holes on the bottom of the module frame alignment should be almost automatic. Insert the module ﬁrmly until its panel is ﬂush with the console top, but avoid using excessive force. The number and location of input transformers is different for mono and stereo input modules. The installation procedure is outlined below. ● Transformer Installation On Input modules 1 Turn the console’s power supply OFF. 2 Remove the mono or stereo console on which the transformer(s) is to be installed as per the moduleremoval instructions above. 3 Attach the transformer to the mounting bracket supplied with the ITR5000 transformer kit with the nut as shown in the illustration. Make sure that the transformer leads are positioned in relation to the mounting bracket as shown in the illustration (the transformer leads must not be clamped between the transformer and mounting bracket). Do not clamp the transformer leads when mounting Guide pins Finally, secure the module with the two screws. NO T E When a module and/or rear-panel unit has been sent out for repair and the module slot is likely to be empty for a while, it is a good idea to install the blank module panels (BLM5000) to prevent objects from falling into the console and potentially causing damage. The BLM5000 blank module option includes blank panels for both the top-panel and rear-panel. 86 Transformer 4 Transformer mounting bracket Attach the transformer to the bottom stay of the module. Align the screw holes in the transformer mounting bracket with the screw holes just in front of (toward the fader end of the module) the square hole through provided for the transformer leads as shown in the illustration below, and secure with the two small M3 screws. On mono modules the transformer should face toward the front (fader) end of the module, and on stereo modules the second transformer should be mounted on the other side of the square lead hole, facing in the other direction so that the lead hole is not obstructed. Appendix Mono Input Module Transformer leads Shield Brown White Red Red White YAMAHA 5 J6 J6 1 2 Red Transformer R119 C113 Bottom stay R260 3 4 IN5 R106 R104 C183 C114 R119 CN201 CN202 R105 XK367 7 Stereo Input Module Remove (unplug) the existing small circuit board from the module, and replace it with the circuit board now soldered to the transformer leads. Next, neatly tie the transformer leads using the supplied cable tie, and cut off the excess tie. Mono input module Bottom stay Transformer Transformer Replace this circuit board 5 Tie the transformer leads with the cable tie Pass the transformer leads through the square lead hole. Mono Input Module Tie through the holes Cut Stereo input module Lead hole Stereo Input Module Replace these two circuit boards Tie the leads in the same way as shown above Lead hole 6 The transformer leads must now be soldered to the small circuit board included in the ITR5000 package. One circuit board is used for each transformer on stereo modules. The leads must be soldered to the circuit board as shown in the illustration below. 8 Make sure the transformer leads are completely contained within the module. That completes transformer installation. Be careful that the leads don’t get caught on any part of the console when installing or later removing the module. 87 Appendix Internal Switch Settings For Each module As you tell from the PM5000 block diagram, each module has a number of internal switch settings. These settings can be changed to “customize” the PM5000 signal ﬂow to most ideally suit your mixing requirements. The chart below lists the switches and their functions. In some cases two switches must be set appropriately to specify a function. When changing internal switch settings make only the necessary changes while referring to the block diagram. = initial factory settings. Module MONO Input Target DIRECT OUT AUX PRE FADER Switch No./ Switch No./ Setting Setting SW105 SW106 PRE n/a POST PRE The direct out signal is post-EQ, pre-fader. POST POST The direct out signal is post-fader, post-on switch. AUX PRE FADER PRE STEREO AUX MASTER G/A MASTER Oddchannel ST AUX TO MATRIX Oddchannel G/A TO MATRIX Oddchannel G/A TO STEREO ST MONO MASTER 88 L TO MATRIX Target Switch No./ Setting Switch No./Setting The direct out signal is pre-EQ (SW106 has no effect). The pre-fader aux signal is sent to the bus pre-EQ (PRE) or post-EQ (POST). SW106 PRE The pre-fader aux signal is sent to the bus pre-EQ (PRE) or post-EQ (POST). POST Ø SW MODE (Phase SW Mode) Module SW107 POST STEREO Input Selectable function SW105 L&R Input signal phase inversion is applied to both stereo channels (L&R) or only the left channel (L ONLY). L ONLY SW105 SW106 PRE PRE The even-numbered channel ST AUX TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, pre-on switch. POST PRE The even-numbered channel ST AUX TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch. The odd-numbered channel ST AUX TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, post-on switch. PRE POST The even-numbered channel ST AUX TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, post-on switch. The odd-numbered channel ST AUX TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on switch. POST POST The even-numbered channel ST AUX TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on switch. SW105 SW106 PRE The odd-numbered channel G/A TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, pre-on switch. PRE PRE The even-numbered channel G/A TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, pre-on switch. POST PRE The odd-numbered channel G/A TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch. POST PRE The even-numbered channel G/A TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch. PRE POST The odd-numbered channel G/A TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, post-on switch. PRE POST The even-numbered channel G/A TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, post-on switch. POST POST The odd-numbered channel G/A TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on switch. POST POST The even-numbered channel G/A TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on switch. SW102 SW103 PRE PRE The odd-numbered channel ST AUX TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, pre-on switch. POST PRE The odd-numbered channel ST AUX TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch. PRE POST POST POST SW102 SW103 PRE SW101 PRE The odd-numbered channel G/A TO STEREO signal is pre-on switch (PRE) or post-on switch (POST). POST SW102 SW103 PRE PRE The left-channel TO MATRIX signal is prefader, pre-on switch. POST PRE PRE POST Evenchannel ST AUX TO MATRIX Evenchannel G/A TO STEREO R TO MATRIX PRE The even-numbered channel G/A TO STEREO signal is pre-on switch (PRE) or post-on switch (POST). POST SW105 SW106 PRE PRE The right-channel TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, pre-on switch. The left-channel TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch. POST PRE The right-channel TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, pre-on switch. POST The left-channel TO MATRIX signal is prefader, post-on switch. PRE POST The right-channel TO MATRIX signal is pre-fader, post-on switch. POST The left-channel TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on switch. POST POST The right-channel TO MATRIX signal is post-fader, post-on switch. Appendix Internal Switch Locations On Each module POST PRE DIRECT OUT PRE EQ / POST EQ DIRECT OUT PRE FADER / POST FADER, POST ON SW Remove these screws and the bracket. Replace after making the required switch settings. J18 JB POST SW105 POST SW106 SW107 PRE AUX PRE POST/PRE EQ JB J Mono Input Module PRE Stereo Input Module SW106 POST PRE SW105 L&R L-ONLY Ø SW MODE Remove these screws and the bracket. Replace after making the required switch settings. 89 Appendix Stereo/Aux Master Module SW102 SW103 POST ON SW PRE TO MATRIX FADER POST STAUX.GA (EVEN) PRE POST ON SW PRE POST PRE FADER STAUX.GA (ODD) SW105 Printing SW106 Switches SW102 SW103 SW105 SW106 G/A Master Module GA (EVEN) GA (ODD) POST PRE ON SW POST TO ST PRE ON SW SW102 SW103 SW101 POST SW105 ON SW PRE POST FADER TO MATRIX PRE POST ON SW PRE PRE POST SW104 STAUX.GA (EVEN) FADER SW101 STAUX.GA (ODD) Printing SW106 SW104 Switches SW102 90 SW103 SW105 SW106 Appendix Stereo/Mono Master Module TO MATRIX SW102 SW103 SW105 POST ON SW PRE POST FADER PRE POST MONO MASTER ON SW PRE POST PRE FADER ST MASTER Printing SW106 Switches SW102 SW103 SW105 SW106 91 Appendix Connector Pin Assignments The connector diagrams refer to the console connectors. Cascade Connector PM3500/3500M These are the cascade connector pin assignments for the PM5000 as well as the PM4000/3500 series consoles that can be cascade-connected to the PM5000. Rear Panel VCA 1-8 PM5000 CUE CTRL VCA1~8 (D-sub 9-pin Connector) PM 3500 CASCADE TYPE B Pin Assignments (D-sub 25-pin Connector) 5 SLAVE 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pin # 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 OUT MASTER CUE SOLO Pin # 1 Function Pin # VCA EXT 1 14 VCA EXT 3 15 VCA EXT 4 3 VCA EXT 5 16 VCA EXT 6 5 VCA EXT 7 17 GND THRU VCA EXT 2 2 4 PM 3000 PM 4000 Function VCA EXT 8 18 MUTE EXT 1 6 MUTE EXT 2 19 MUTE EXT 3 7 MUTE EXT 4 20 MUTE EXT 5 8 MUTE EXT 6 21 MUTE EXT 7 9 MUTE EXT 8 22 GND 10 INPUT CUE EXT 23 SOLO EXT 11 GND 24 NC 12 NC 25 NC 13 NC 3 8 2 7 1 6 MIDI IN VCA CTRL 13 12 11 10 4 9 Function 1 VCA EXT 1 2 VCA EXT 2 3 VCA EXT 3 4 VCA EXT 4 5 VCA EXT 5 6 VCA EXT 6 7 VCA EXT 7 8 VCA EXT 8 9 GND CUE/SOLO Jack Tip INPUT CUE EXT Ring SOLO EXT Shield GND PM4000/4000M GPI Connector VCA/MUTE CONTROL Pin Assignments (D-sub 25-pin Connector) 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 4 9 15 3 8 14 20 13 19 24 2 7 12 18 23 1 5 6 11 22 Pin # 10 16 17 21 Pin # Function GPO 1 14 GPO 2 2 GPO 3 15 GPO 4 3 GPO 5 16 GPO 6 4 GPO 7 17 GPO 8 5 GND 18 GND 6 GND 19 GND GND 20 GND NC Function 7 1 VCA EXT 1 13 MUTE EXT 3 8 GND 21 2 VCA EXT 2 14 MUTE EXT 4 9 NC 22 INC DEC 23 GND Pin # Function Pin # 3 VCA EXT 3 15 MUTE EXT 5 10 4 VCA EXT 4 16 MUTE EXT 6 11 GND 24 TB REMOTE 5 VCA EXT 5 17 MUTE EXT 7 12 NC 25 TB REMOTE GND 6 VCA EXT 6 18 MUTE EXT 8 13 NC 7 VCA EXT 7 19 GND 8 VCA EXT 8 20 GND 9 GND 21 GND 10 NC 22 INPUT CUE EXT 11 MUTE EXT 1 23 SOLO EXT / NC (*) 12 MUTE EXT 2 24 NC * = SOLO EXT on the PM4000, NC on the PM4000M • Compatible plug: JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited) #SRCN6A25-24P 92 Function 1 Appendix PM5000 Self-diagnostic Function The PM5000 automatically performs a battery of internal tests when the power is turned on. If no problems are encountered the scene number will appear on the display and normal operation will be possible. If a system or other internal error is found console operation will be suspended and/or an error message will appear on the display. If an error message appears, refer to the Error Messages on page 94. Initializing the Internal Memory If an error occurs during the self-diagnostic memory check (above), normal operation can sometimes be restored by initializing the internal memory (initial factory setup). The memory initialization procedure described below can also be used to return the memory to a blank state prior to re-programming for the next show or tour. NO T E The scene memory, setup memory, and MIDI program change table are all initialized by this operation. If you want to keep any of the data be sure to save it to an external memory card before initializing the memory. 1 Turn the console power ON while holding the [STORE] key to start the initialization procedure. I N I T S U R E ? Y : 1 2 N : 3 Press the alpha-numeric keypad [1] key to initialize the memory. E x e c u t i n g Press the [3] key to abort the initialization operation. I N I T . 3 C A N C E L Normal operation resumes once the memory has been initialized. 93 Appendix Error Messages Any of the following messages appearing on the 4-character message display indicate that an error has occurred. Refer to the information listed below in combination with the “Troubleshooting” section on next page. Error Startup Error Message [H.ER] Fatal hardware error. [S.ER] Internal data error. [LoBT] Low backup battery. [CmER] [RxER] Internal communication error. [BfER] Error During Normal Operation Operation Error MIDI transmit/receive error. [CsER] Cascade connection error. [CfER] Memory card access error. [PROT] You attempted to store to a protected scene. [NoDT] You attempted to recall a NO DATA scene. [FULL] [SPC!] 94 Meaning Action The system cannot be started. Contact your Yamaha dealer or service center. There is a problem with the internal data, but the system can be started by pressing the [ENTER] key. Save all (ALL) data to a memory card and contact your Yamaha dealer or service center. If the battery voltage drops any further all data saved in the internal memory will be lost. Contact your Yamaha dealer or service center as soon as possible. Contact your Yamaha dealer or service center. Make sure that all external MIDI equipment is properly connected. This error can also be caused by attempting to send a large amount of data to the PM5000 at once. Check that both of the cascaded consoles are connected properly, that the correct cascade cable is being used, and that the [MASTER/ SLAVE] switch settings have been made properly. Check that the memory card has been properly inserted into the console’s card slot, that the card has sufﬁcient remaining capacity, and that it is properly formatted. Use the utility mode to turn memory protection off. If the entire memory is protected use the MEMORY PROTECT function. If a speciﬁc scene memory is protected use the SCENE EDIT function (page 62). If the left dot on the scene display is lit, that scene is empty and cannot be recalled. Make sure scene data is stored in the scene number to be recalled. You attempted to insert a scene when Move or delete the data in scene number 999. scene number 999 exists. There is a space in the name of the ﬁle you Save the ﬁle after deleting the space. attempted to save. Appendix Troubleshooting Symptom Power won’t turn on. Panel displays and illumination won’t light. A cascade-connected slave PM5000 or PM4000/3500 doesn’t respond. An external device connected to the GPI connector doesn’t respond. The PM5000 doesn’t response to control from an external GPI device. No sound input. No sound output. No sound from the headphone or monitor outputs. Sound from the headphone and monitor outputs is delayed. Only certain channels can be heard via the headphone and monitor outputs. Sound level is too low. Distorted sound. The sound does not change when console settings are changed. Can’t store a scene. Can’t recall a scene. Can’t save data to a memory card. Can’t load data from a memory card. Some channels are always active even when the SOLO mode is engaged. It takes a while for the faders to stop moving when a scene is recalled. Possible Cause & Solution • Is the dedicated PW5000 properly connected via the supplied power cable? • Is the PW5000 [POWER ON/OFF] switch in the ON position? • Is the [PANEL LED DIMMER] control on the meter bridge turned all the way down? • If all of the above check out OK and the power still won’t turn on, contact your Yamaha dealer or service center. • Are you connected to the right connector? The TYPE A connector is for connection between two PM5000 consoles, while the TYPE B connector is for connection to a PM4000/3500 console. • If you’re using the TYPE A connector is the [MASTER/SLAVE] switch set properly (page 74)? • If you’re using the TYPE B connector is the PM4000/3500 set to SLAVE mode? (Refer to the PM4000/3500 manual). • Are both the TYPE A and TYPE B connectors connected? If both are connected the TYPE A connector will take priority. • Are the GPI OUT scene link and fader start functions accessible via the utility mode set appropriately (page 72)? • Have you selected the same port number for scene link and fader start control (page 73)? • If you intend to use the scene increment/decrement function, is SCENE INC/DEC turned ON (page 72)? Also are scenes actually stored in scene numbers 010 ~ 999? • Is the input channel [ON] switch engaged? • Is the input channel fader set to an appropriate level? • Have you engaged the [CUE] switch of a channel that is receiving no input while the SOLO mode is engaged? • Is the VCA fader assigned to the input channel set to an appropriate level? Is a [VCA MUTE] or [MUTE MASTER] switch assigned to the channel engaged? • Are the appropriate master module [ON] switches engaged? • Is the [LCR] switch engaged and the [CSR] control turned all the way to the right (CSR) (page 19)? • Is the “MUTE” monitor mode selected (page 67)? In this case monitor output will be muted when the CEU/SOLO function is OFF. • Has a monitor delay been programmed (page 68)? • Is a [CUE] switch engaged? • Are the [PAD] switch and [GAIN] controls in the head ampliﬁer blocks set appropriately? • Are the input channel faders set to appropriate levels? • Are the master module faders set to appropriate levels? • Are VCA faders assigned to the channels set to appropriate levels? • Are the [PAD] switch and [GAIN] controls in the head ampliﬁer blocks set appropriately? • Are the input channel faders set too high? • Are the master module faders set too high? • Are one or more EQ gain controls set too high? • Is the [PREVIEW] switch engaged (page 55)? • Is the LOCK mode engaged (page 61)? • Is the cascade [MASTER/SLAVE] switch set to the SLAVE position? • Are you attempting to save to a read-only scene number (000~009)? • Is the memory protect function turned ON (page 62)? • Has the scene been protection via the SCENE EDIT settings (page 62)? • Is console automation turned OFF (page 70)? • Are any [RECALL SAFE] or [FADER SAFE] switches engaged? • Is console automation turned OFF (page 70)? • Has the memory card been properly formatted to DOS format (page 59)? • Does the memory card have enough remaining capacity to store the data? • Has the memory card been properly formatted to DOS format (page 59)? • Is the ﬁle to be loaded in CSV format? • Have more than 128 ﬁles been saved to the memory card? The PM5000 will recognize up to 128 ﬁles on one memory card. Files exceeding this number cannot be display by the PM5000. • Is INPUT SOLO SAFE engaged for those channels (page 67)? • Has a fade time been speciﬁed (page 52)? 95 Appendix Specifications 1. General Specifications 0dBu is referenced to 0.775 Vrms. Total Harmonic Distortion (Master Output) Less than 0.1% (THD+N) 20Hz-20kHz @ +14dBu 600Ω (Input Gain Control at Maximum) Frequency Response (Master Output) 0+1,-3dB 20Hz-20kHz @ +4dBu 600Ω (Input Gain Control at Maximum) Hum & Noise (20Hz-20kHz) *1 -128dBu Equivalent Input Noise. Rs=150Ω -100dBu Residual Output Noise. Input Gain=Maximum -92dBu (96dB S/N) STEREO AUX Master fader at nominal level and all assign SW's off. Input Pad =OFF -87dBu (91dB S/N) GROUP/AUX Master fader at nominal level and all assign SW's off. Input sensitivity=-60dBu Maximum Voltage Gain *2 Crosstalk -92dBu (96dB S/N) STEREO, MONO (C) Master fader at nominal level and all assign SW's off. -64dBu (68dB S/N) STEREO AUX, GROUP/AUX, STEREO, MONO (C) Master fader and one input fader at nominal level. -89dBu(93dB S/N) MATRIX Master at nominal level and all Matrix mix controls at minimum level. 64dB MONO IN to MONO IN INSERT OUT,DIRECT OUT (pre fader) 80dB MONO IN to STEREO AUX OUT (PRE),GROUP/AUX OUT (AUX mode & PRE) 90dB MONO IN to STEREO AUX OUT (POST),GROUP/AUX OUT (AUX mode & POST) 84dB MONO IN to GROUP/AUX OUT (GROUP mode), STEREO OUT(INPUT to ST), MONO (C) OUT (INPUT to MONO) 90dB MONO IN to MATRIX OUT (GROUP/AUX MASTER GROUP mode to MATRIX) 64dB ST IN to ST INSERT OUT 80dB ST IN to STEREO AUX OUT (PRE) 90dB ST IN to STEREO AUX OUT (POST) 84dB ST IN to GROUP/AUX OUT (GROUP mode), STEREO OUT (INPUT to ST) 81dB ST IN to MONO (C) OUT (INPUT to MONO) 77dB ST IN to GROUP/AUX OUT (AUX mode & PRE) 87dB ST IN to GROUP/AUX OUT (AUX mode & POST) 10dB SUB IN to Master OUT 6dB 2TR IN to MONITOR OUT -80dB @ 1kHz, -70dB @ 10kHz Adjacent inputs. -80dB @ 1kHz, -70dB @ 10kHz input to output.(except between L and R) MONO & ST INPUT PAD 26dB MONO & ST INPUT GAIN 50dB INPUT High Pass Filter 12dB/octave roll off below 20-400Hz at -3dB points. INPUT Equalization *3 Variable +15, -15dB maximum HIGH 1k-20kHz (peaking/shelving, Q=0.5-3) HI-MID 0.4k-8kHz (peaking, Q=0.5-3) LO-MID 80-1.6kHz (peaking, Q=0.5-3) LOW 30-600Hz (peaking/shelving, Q=0.5-3) Sweep sine wave oscillator/Pink noise with burst 4 mode selectable (100Hz/1kHz/10kHz/PINK) Selectable FIX or SWEEP for 100Hz/1kHz/10kHz by SWEEP/BURST ON/OFF switch, sweep range: x0.2-x2, Less than 1% T.H.D. @ +4dBu Selectable continue or BURST for PINK noise by SWEEP/BURST ON/OFF switch. PINK NOISE: ﬁxed 200msec, INTERVAL: variable 1sec-20sec Phantom Power +48VDC is applied to balanced inputs for powering condenser microphones via 6.8kΩ currentlimiting/isolation resistors. Input LED Meter 9-points (PEAK/+12/+6/+3/0/-3/-6/-12/-25dB) LED level meter built into each MONO-IN and STIN module. PEAK +12/+6/+3/0 LED (yellow) turns on when pre-Fader level reaches +12/+6/+3/0dB. -3/-6/-12/-25 LED (green) turns on when pre-Fader level reaches -3/-6/-12/-25dB. Output LED Meter 96 LED (red) turns on when pre-EQ level or post-EQ level or pre-Fader level reaches 3dB below clipping. 20-points (PEAK, +15, <3dB step>, -39dB) LED level meter. STEREO AUX 1 (L, R)-12 (L, R), STEREO MATRIX 1 (L, R)-4 (L, R) (STEREO AUX/STEREO MATRIX selectable) GROUP/AUX 1-8, MATRIX 1-8 (GROUP/AUX, MATRIX selectable) STEREO (L, R), MONO (C) CUE (L, R, C), TB/OSC (CUE C, TB/OSC automatic select) PEAK LED (red) turns on when pre-LineAmp level reaches 3dB below clipping. +15/··/0 LED (yellow) turns on when pre-LineAmp level reaches +15/<3dB step>/0dB. -3/··/-39 LED (green) turns on when pre-LineAmp level reaches -3/<3dB step>/-39dB. Appendix Dimensions Width 28ch 1432 mm 36ch 1671 mm 52ch 2148 mm Depth 1113 mm Height Weight 349 mm 28ch 153 kg 36ch 179 kg 52ch 228 kg *1 Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @ 12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation. Temperature condition @+10 - +25°C *2 PAN/BAL: the left or the right turning around. *3 Turn over /roll-off frequency of shelving: 3dB below maximum variable level. 2. Inputs/Outputs 2.1 Input Characteristics Connection PAD 0 MONO IN 1-n ch *1 ST IN 1-4ch 26 0 26 Gain Trim Actual Load Impedance For Use With Nominal Input Level *3 Sensitivity *4 Nominal Max. before Clip Connector In Mixer *2 -80dBu (0.078mV) -60dBu (0.775mV) -40dBu (7.75mV) -60 3kΩ 50-600Ω Mics 600Ω Lines -10 -54dBu (1.55mV) -34dBu (15.5mV) -14dBu (155mV) -30dBu (24.5mV) -10dBu (245mV) +10dBu (2.45V) -4dBu (0.489V) +16dBu (4.89V) +30dBu (24.5V) + 4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) XLR-3-31type STEREO AUX SUB IN (1-12) [L, R] *5 GROUP/AUX SUB IN (1-8) *5 STEREO SUB IN [L, R] MONO(C) SUB IN MONITOR SUB IN [L, R, C] MATRIX SUB IN [L, R] 10kΩ 600Ω Lines -6dBu (388mV) TALKBACK IN 3kΩ 50-600Ω Mics -66dBu (0.39mV) -50dBu (2.45mV) -30dBu (24.5mV) XLR-3-31type MONO IN INSERT IN 1-n ch *1 ST IN INSERT IN 1-4ch STEREO AUX INSERT IN (1-12) [L, R] GROUP/AUX INSERT IN (1-8) STEREO INSERT IN [L, R] MONO (C) INSERT IN STEREO MATRIX INSERT IN (1-4) [L, R] MATRIX INSERT IN (1-8) 2TR IN 1, 2 (L, R) *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 XLR-3-31type -16dBu (123mV) 10kΩ 600Ω Lines +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) Phones Jack (TRS) +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) XLR-3-31type -6dBu (388mV) 10kΩ 600Ω Lines -2dBu (616mV) 24ch, 32ch, 48ch All XLR connectors are balanced, Phone Jacks are balanced (T=+, R=-, S=GND). 0dBu is referenced to 0.775Vrms. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4dBu (1.23V), or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum level. Only 28ch version does not have STEREO AUX SUB IN and GROUP/AUX SUB IN. 97 Appendix 2.2 Output Characteristics Connection Actual Source Impedance For Use With Nominal Output Level *3 Nominal Max. before Clip Connector In Mixer *2 STEREO AUX OUT (1-12) [L, R] GROUP/AUX OUT (1-8) STEREO OUT [L, R] MONO(C) OUT STEREO MATRIX OUT (1-4) [L, R] MATRIX OUT (1-8) MONITOR OUT (A,B) [L, R] TB/OSC OUT 150Ω 600Ω Lines +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) XLR-3-32 type MONO IN DIRECT OUT 1-n ch *1 150Ω 600Ω Lines +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) Phone Jack (TRS) 150Ω 10kΩ Lines +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) Phone Jack (TRS) 8Ω Phones 100mW 150mW 40Ω Phones 75mW 150mW MONO IN INSERT OUT 1-n ch *1 ST IN INSERT OUT 1-4ch STEREO AUX INSERT OUT (1-10) [L, R] GROUP/AUX INSERT OUT (1-12) STEREO INSERT OUT [L, R] MONO(C) INSERT OUT STEREO MATRIX INSERT OUT (1-4) [L, R] MATRIX INSERT OUT (1-8) PHONES OUT x3 10Ω Phones Jack (STEREO) *1 24ch, 32ch, 48ch *2 All XLR connectors are balanced, Phone Jacks (TRS) are balanced (T=+, R=-, S=GND). Phone Jacks (STEREO) are unbalanced. *3 0dBu is referenced to 0.775Vrms. 2.3 Others CASCADE TYPE A / PC (for PM5000 or PC) Dsub-9P (male) CASCADE TYPE B (for PM4000/PM3500 series) VCA GROUP 1-8, MUTE GROUP 1-8, CUE SOLO RS232C/RS422 digital Dsub-25P (female) - analog GPI (General Purpose Interface) Dsub-25P (female) - digital MIDI IN OUT THRU DIN 5P (female) - digital DC POWER IN +16V, -16V, +12V, +48V - 3. Others 3.1 Included Accessories Power Supply Connection Cable (3.6m) Gooseneck Lamps (4 for the PM5000-52C, 3 for the PM5000-36 and PM5000-28) Console Cover Owner's Manual 3.2 Optional Accessories Option Modules Input Transformer ITR5000 Power Supply Link Cable PSL5000 European models Purchaser/User Information speciﬁed in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2. Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4 98 * Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Appendix MIDI Data Format STATUS 1. TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA 1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE 1.1.1 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) BANK SELECT <Reception> In SINGLE mode when BANK is ON, this message can be received if the Rx CH matches. This will specify the bank for a subsequently received program change. <Transmission> 1011nnnn Bn Control Change 01100010 62 NRPN LSB 0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value 01100011 63 NRPN MSB 0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value 00000110 06 DATA ENTRY MSB 0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value 00110110 26 DATA ENTRY LSB 0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value 60 h (INC) and 61 h (DEC) are not supported. In SINGLE mode when BANK is ON and you recall a scene memory, a bank select message will be transmitted on the speciﬁed Tx CH. 1.1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn) STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change 00000000 00 Bank Select MSB <Reception> 0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value 00100000 20 Bank Select LSB 0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value In the SINGLE mode this message can be received if Program Change Rx is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. If OMNI is ON, however, this message will be received regardless of the channel. A scene memory will be recalled according to the settings of the Program Change Table. 1.1.2 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) ASSIGN <Reception> If CONTROL CHANGE is ON and this message is received, the parameter that is assigned to the MIDI channel will be changed. <Transmission> If CONTROL CHANGE is ON and an assigned parameter has been modiﬁed, this message will be transmitted from the selected MIDI channel. STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change 0ccccccc cc Control No.(1-5, 7-31,33-37,39-95, 102-104) 0vvvvvvv vv Value The values of channel or VCA faders are transmitted in 14-bit form using MSB and LSB bytes. In the case of the MULTI mode, if Program Change Rx is ON this message will be received on all MIDI channels, and will be divided into banks according to the channel. If Program Change ECHO is ON, this message will be echoed. <Transmission> In the case of the SINGLE mode, if Program Change Tx is ON this message will be transmitted on the Tx CH channel when a scene is recalled. This will be transmitted according to the settings of the Program Change Table. In the case of the MULTI mode, this will be transmitted on the MIDI channel according to the bank. If the recalled memory number is assigned to more than one program number, the program number for the lowest-numbered channel of the lowest-numbered bank will be transmitted. STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Program No.(0-127) In the ON switch, 00H through 3fH is assigned to OFF and 40H through 7fH is assigned to ON. 1.2 ACTIVE SENSING (FE) 1.1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) NRPN <Reception> <Reception> Once this message has been received, and there is an interval of 300 ms during which nothing is received, Running Status will be cleared, and MIDI communication will be initialized. If NRPN is ON and the Rx CH matches, this message will be received. This message will change the parameter corresponding to the received NRPN number. The CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN numbers are the same as the LSB of the NRPN numbers. STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing <Transmission> If NRPN is ON and an assigned parameter is modiﬁed, this message will be transmitted on the Tx CH. If both CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN are simultaneously ON, an assigned parameter will be transmitted as a control change assign message. 99 Appendix 2. TRANSMISSION CONDITION BANK ON CONTROL CHANGE BANK SELECT $BnH CONTROL CHANGE NRPN $BnH NRPN ON MIDI Tx CH? ASSIGN ON CONTROL CHANGE $BnH PROGRAM CHANGE $CnH PGM ON MIDI OUT MIDI Tx CH? or MULTI ON ECHO ON MIDI IN 3. RECEIVE CONDITION BANK ON MIDI Rx CH? NRPN ON CONTROL CHANGE BANK SELECT $BnH CONTROL CHANGE NRPN $BnH ASSIGN ON CONTROL CHANGE $BnH MIDI IN MIDI Rx CH? or OMNI ON or MULTI ON PGM ON PROGRAM CHANGE $CnH ECHO ON MIDI OUT 100 Appendix MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA [Mixing Console] / Model: PM5000 Function Date: May, 01, 2003 Version: 1.00 Transmit Receive Remarks Basic Channel Default Changed 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 Memorized Mode Default Messages Altered X X ******************* OMNI off / OMNI on X X Memorized True Voice X ******************* X X Velocity Note ON Note OFF X X X X After Touch Key’s Ch’s X X X X Pitch Bend X X 0, 32 Control Change 1-5, 7-31, 33-37 39-95, 102-104 98, 99 O O O O Bank Select *1 O O 6, 38 O O NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number) Data Entry (for NRPN) Program Change True# 0-127 ******************* 0-127 0-999 System Exclusive X X Note Number System Common Song Position Song Select Tune X X X X X X System Real Time Clock Commands X X X X Aux Messages Local ON/OFF All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset X X X X X X O O Notes Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Assignable *1 See Control Change parameter assign chart. Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO O : YES X : NO 101 Index Index Symbols F [+48V] Switch ...................................................................... 15 +48V Master Switch ............................................................. 13 ∑·PEAK Indicators ............................................................... 29 [ø] (Phase) Switch ................................................................ 16 Fade Time .............................................................................52 Fader Mode ...........................................................................70 [FADER SAFE] Switch ........................................................20 Fader Start .............................................................................73 Fan Switch ............................................................................13 Fan Vents ..............................................................................13 Format ...................................................................................60 A AFL ...................................................................................... 42 [ALPHABET] Switch .......................................................... 50 Alpha-numeric Keypad ........................................................ 50 [ASSIGN MODE] Switches ................................................. 50 Assigning VCA and Mute Groups ....................................... 21 Automation ........................................................................... 70 B backup battery ...................................................................... 58 [BAL] Control ...................................................................... 18 bank select ............................................................................ 78 Battery Check ....................................................................... 58 blocks .................................................................................... 10 burst ...................................................................................... 39 Bus Mode ............................................................................. 63 C Cascade .................................................................... 14, 74, 76 Cascade Connector ............................................................... 92 CC# ....................................................................................... 79 Channel Fader ....................................................................... 20 Channel Fader Block ............................................................ 20 Channel Grouping ................................................................ 21 Channel [ON] Switch ........................................................... 19 [CLEAR/EXIT] Keys ........................................................... 50 Common Operations ............................................................. 57 CompactFlash Memory ........................................................ 59 Connector Pin Assignments ................................................. 92 Control Change ...............................................................77, 79 Cue ........................................................................................ 44 Cue Signal ............................................................................ 41 Cue Stack Function .............................................................. 43 cue/solo function .................................................................. 44 [CUE] Switch .................................................................20, 29 current scene ......................................................................... 72 D Data Delete ........................................................................... 61 Data Load ............................................................................. 60 Data Save .............................................................................. 60 Date/Time ............................................................................. 59 [DEC] Key ............................................................................ 50 Digital Control Section ...................................................12, 49 Direct Recall ......................................................................... 71 E [ENTER] Key ....................................................................... 50 EQ Block .............................................................................. 16 EQ Controls .......................................................................... 16 [EQ] Switch .......................................................................... 16 Error Messages ..................................................................... 94 Expansion: Connecting to External Equipment ................... 14 External Expansion Connectors ........................................... 13 102 G G/A (Group/Aux) Master Module ........................................31 G/A (Group/Aux) Master Out ...............................................13 G/A (Group/Aux) Send 1~8 Block .......................................18 G/A Bus Assign Safe ............................................................65 G/A Bus Mode ............................................................... 33, 63 G/A Bus Mode Indicators .....................................................31 [GAIN] Control .....................................................................16 gooseneck lamps ...................................................................48 GPI ...........................................................................14, 72, 92 GPI Out .................................................................................72 Group Assign Safe ................................................................65 Group/Aux Switching ...........................................................32 Grouping ...............................................................................21 H Head Amp Block ...................................................................15 HPF Block .............................................................................16 [HPF] Switch and Control ....................................................16 I [INC] Key .............................................................................50 Initializing the Internal Memory ...........................................93 Input Channel Section .................................................... 11, 15 Input Solo Safe ......................................................................67 Insert Block ...........................................................................17 Insert Inputs ..........................................................................13 Insert Outputs ........................................................................13 Insert [ON] Switch ................................................................17 [INSERT] Switch ..................................................................29 Internal Switch Settings For Each module ............................88 L [L+R] Switch ................................................................. 16, 30 Lamp Connectors ..................................................................13 LAST CUE mode ..................................................................43 LCR vs. Stereo + Mono Operation .......................................19 Level Meter ...........................................................................19 Lock Mode ............................................................................61 M Main Out Block .....................................................................18 Main Out Switches ................................................................19 Master Cue AFL Position .....................................................69 Master Fader .........................................................................29 Master Out Section ........................................................ 11, 26 Master Solo Select ................................................................46 Master [ON] Switch ..............................................................29 Matrix Master Out Section ....................................................37 Matrix Out .............................................................................13 Matrix Send and Master Out Section ............................. 11, 35 Matrix Send Section ..............................................................35 Memory Card Slot .................................................................12 Memory Protect ....................................................................62 Message Display ...................................................................50 Meter Bridge .................................................................. 12, 47 Index MIDI ...............................................................................14, 77 MIDI channel ....................................................................... 78 MIDI Control Change .......................................................... 81 MIDI Echo Back ............................................................77, 82 MIDI Program Change ......................................................... 80 MIDI Program Change Table ............................................... 83 MIDI Setting ......................................................................... 81 MIX CUE mode ................................................................... 43 Module Removal and Replacement ..................................... 84 modules ................................................................................ 10 Monitor Control Section .................................................11, 40 Monitor Delay ...................................................................... 68 MONITOR DELAY Indicator ............................................. 50 Monitor Mode ....................................................................... 67 Monitor Out .......................................................................... 13 Monitor Outputs ................................................................... 41 Monitor Source ..................................................................... 40 Mono Input Module .............................................................. 15 Mono Inputs ......................................................................... 13 Mono Output ........................................................................ 13 motor faders .......................................................................... 70 MULTI ................................................................................. 78 Mute Group .......................................................................... 23 MUTE Indicators 1~8 .......................................................... 20 Mute Master ......................................................................... 71 Mute Master Section ............................................................ 12 [Mute Master] Switches ....................................................... 25 N NoDT .................................................................................... 53 NRPN ................................................................................... 80 O OMNI mode ......................................................................... 78 Oscillator and Talkback Section .....................................11, 38 Oscillator/Talkback Signal Output ....................................... 39 P [PAD] Switch ....................................................................... 15 [PAN] Control ...................................................................... 31 [PAN]/[CSR] Control ........................................................... 18 Panel Layout ......................................................................... 10 Parameter Display ................................................................ 50 PFL ....................................................................................... 42 pink noise .......................................................................38, 39 Power Supply Connector ...................................................... 13 preset data ............................................................................. 51 [PRE] Switch ..................................................................17, 18 Preview Function .................................................................. 55 [PREVIEW] Switch ............................................................. 50 Program Change ................................................................... 78 program change table ........................................................... 78 R Rear Panel ............................................................................. 12 Recall Safe ............................................................................ 66 Recall Safe Select ................................................................. 66 [RECALL SAFE] Switch ...............................................20, 29 Recall Undo .......................................................................... 54 [RECALL UNDO] Switch ................................................... 50 [RECALL] Switch ................................................................ 50 RX CH ............................................................................78, 81 S Safety and Protection ............................................................65 Scene Display ........................................................................50 Scene Edit .............................................................................62 Scene Inc/Dec (GPI In) .........................................................72 SCENE LINK .......................................................................72 Scene Linking .......................................................................73 Scene Memory ......................................................................51 Scene Recall ................................................................... 53, 69 Scene Store ............................................................................53 Send Level and Balance Controls .........................................17 Send Level and Pan Controls ................................................17 Send Level Controls ..............................................................18 Signal Routing ......................................................................27 SINGLE ................................................................................78 Solo .......................................................................................44 Solo Enable ...........................................................................66 Solo Mode .............................................................................44 solo safe ......................................................................... 65, 67 Stereo and Mono Master Modules ........................................34 Stereo Aux Master Module ...................................................30 Stereo Aux Master Out .........................................................13 Stereo Aux Send 1~12 Block ................................................17 Stereo Input Module .............................................................15 Stereo Inputs .........................................................................13 Stereo Matrix Mode ..............................................................64 Stereo Output ........................................................................13 [STORE] Switch ...................................................................50 Sub Inputs .............................................................................13 [SUM GAIN] Control ...........................................................29 [SUM GAIN] Indicator .........................................................29 T talkback mic ..........................................................................38 Talkback/Oscillator Out ........................................................13 [TB/OSC] Switch ..................................................................29 temporary scene ....................................................................69 Theater Mode ........................................................................69 Title Edit ...............................................................................54 [TITLE] Switch .....................................................................50 [TO MATRIX] Switch ..........................................................29 [TO MONO] Switch .............................................................31 [TO ST] Switch .....................................................................31 Top Panel ..............................................................................10 TX CH ............................................................................ 78, 81 Type A ..................................................................................14 Type B ............................................................................ 14, 92 U User Table .............................................................................83 Utility Function .....................................................................56 [UTILITY] Switch ................................................................50 V VCA Group ...........................................................................22 VCA Grouping ......................................................................21 VCA Indicators 1~12 ............................................................20 VCA Master and Master Mute Switch Group Control .........24 VCA Master Section .............................................................11 VCA Section .........................................................................24 103 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 SWEDEN Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400 Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil Tel: 011-3085-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 TAIWAN NORWAY OTHER COUNTRIES INDONESIA Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 SINGAPORE EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe, Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2441 PA10 Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation ©2003 Yamaha Corporation WA22580 403MWAP1.2-03C0 Printed in Japan